Motionpack 110

I DESCRIPT,
IVE INFORMATION
MOTIONPACK-110
YASKAWA MOTION CONTROLLER FOR FA/FMS
FOR UP TO 3-AXIS DRIVE
V
YASKAWA
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 2
2. SYSTEM 6
2.1 GENERAL 6
2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SPECIFICATIONS 7
2.3 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION OF MODULES 11

2.3.1 Operation of Motion Modules 11
2.3.2 Operation of Axis Modules 12
2.3.3 Operation of Micro PC Modules 14
2.3.4 Operation of CRT Control Station 15
2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MODULES 15
3. FUNCTIONS 22
3.1 TYPES OF OPERATION MODES 22

3.1.1 Editing Mode (EDIT) 22
3.1.2 Memory Operation Mode (MEM) 23
3.1.3 Jogging Mode (JOG) 23
3.1.4 Step Operation Mode (STEP) 23
3.1.5 Rapid Traverse Motion Mode (RAPID) 23
3.1.6 Manual Feed Mode (HANDLE) 24
3.1.7 DNC Operation Mode (DNC) 24
3.1.8 MDI Operation Mode (MDI) 24
3.2 MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT 24
3.3 FEEDRATE 26
3.3.1 Rapid Traverse Rate 26
3.3.2 Interpolation Feedrate Setting (F-FUNCTION) 27
3.4 FEEDRATE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION 29

3.4.1 Acceleration/Deceleration During Rapid Traverse and Jogging 29
3.4.2 Acceleration/Deceleration During Interpolation Feed 30
3.5 MEMORY OPERATION 30

3.5.1 Program Designation and Starting 30
3.5.2 Temporary Stop 31
3.5.3 Single-Block Operation 31
3.5.4 Machine Lock Operation 3I
3.5.5 Axis Omission 32
3.5.6 Optional Block Skip Function 32
3.5.7 Manual Interruption of Automatic Operation 32
3.5.8 Block Preread 32
3.6 DNC OPERATION 33
3.7 UNRESTRICTED LENGTH POSITIONING 33
3.8 POSITION CANCEL 33
3.9 POSITION MEMORY 34
3.10 MECHANICAL HANDLE 34
]I
34
3.11 SPINDLE CONTROL FUNCTION
3.11.1 Normal Rotation, •Reverse Rotation, and Stop of Spindle 35
3,11.2 Spindle Gear Change 35
3.12 MDI OPERATION 36

3.12.1 Program Input in MDI Mode 36
3.12.2 Operation in MDI Mode 36
3.13 ADDRESS SEARCH FUNCTION 36
3.14 PARAMETER/PROGRAM PROTECT FUNCTION 37
3.15 ALARM CODE ouTPUT FUNCTION 38
4. PROGRAMMING 40
4.i INPUT FORMAT 40

Input
4.1.1
4.1.2 AddressFormat List
Characters 4041
4.1.3 Decimal Point Programming 42
4.1.4 Decimal Point Movement 42
4.1.5 Program Number 44
4.1.6 Sequence Number 44
4.1.7 Optional Block Skip 44
4.2 G FUNCTION 45
4.2.1 List of G Codes 45
D 4.2.2 Positioning (G00) 47
4:2.3 Error-Detect-Off Positioning (G06) 47
4.2.4 Linear Interpolation (G01) 48
4.2.5 Circular Interpolation (G02, G03) 48

4.2.6 Dwell (G04) 51
4.2.7 Offset Value Input (G10) 51
4.2.8 Plane Designation (G17, G18, G19) 53
4..2.9 Automatic Return-to-Reference Point (G28) 53
D 4.2.10 Skip Function (G31) 54

4.2.11 Position Offset in Z-Axis (G43, G44, G49) 55
4.2.12 Position Offset in X- and Y-Axes (G45 to G48) 57
4.2.13 Return-to-Machine Coordinate System (G53) 61
4.2.14 Notch Signal Commands A (G68, G69) 62
4.2.15 Notch signal Commands B (G66, G67) 63

4.2.16 Combined Operation Commands (G80 to G99) 65
4.2.17 Absolute/Incremental Command Designation (G90, G91) 74
4.2.18 Programming of Absolute Zero Point (G92) 75
4.3 EXTERNAL OFFSET COMMAND (INDIRECT SPECIFICATION) 76
4.4 SIGNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS 77

4.4.1 T-Functi0n 77
4.4.2 M-Function 78
D 4.4.4
4.4.3 M-Codes for Internal
M-Codes for Processing
Stop (MOO, M02, M30)(M90 79
to M99) 80
4.4.5 Subprogram (M98, M99) 80
4.5 S FUNCTION 81
CONTENTS 'Cont'd)-
5. PARAMETERS 84
5.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 84
5.2 VARIETIES OF PARAMETERS 84
5.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS 86

5.3.1 Setting Axis for Use (#1000) 86
5.3.2 Function Selection (#1001, #1002, #1003, #1005, #1006, #1009) 87
5.3.3 MF, SF, TF Signal Delay Time Setting (#1100) 90
5.4 SPECIAL PARAMETERS 90

5.4.1 Position Command Unit Setting (#1557, #1558, #1757, #1758, #1957, #1958) 90
5.5 MACHINE SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS 94

5.5.1 Max. Feedrate Setting at Manual Feed (#1101) 94
5.5.2 Interpolation Max. Feedrate Setting (#1102) 94
5.5.3 Jogging Feedrate Setting (#1104 to #1118) 94
5.5.4 Rapid Traverse Feedrate Setting (#1500, #1700, #1900) 95
5.5.5 Step Feed Displacement Distance Setting (#1122, #1123, #1124) 96

5.5.6 Software Limit Switch Function
(#1402, #1602, #1802, #1550, #1551, #1750, #1950, #1751, #1951) 96
5.5.7 Backlash Compensation Value Setting (#1405, #1605, #1805) 97
5.5.8 Pitch Error Compensation
(#1552, #1752, #1952, #1553, #1753, #1953, #1410 to #1473, #1610 to #1673, #1810 to #1873 97
5.5.9 Combined Operation Command (G83) Setting Data (#1202) 99
5.6 SERVO-RELATED PARAMETERS 99

5.6.1 Acceleration/Deceleration Constant
(#1407, #1607, #1807, #1501 to #1503, #1701 to #1703, #1901 to #1903) 99
5.6.2 Interpolation Feedrate Bias (#1475, #1675, #1875) 101
5.6.3 Feedrate Command Voltage Setting (#1408, #1608, #1808) 102
5.6.4 Position Loop Gain (#1474, #1674, #1874) 102
5.6.5 Servo Error Range (#1555, #1755, #1955) 103
5.6.6 Position Setting Range (#1406, #1606, #1806) 103
5.6.7 Drift Offset (#1401, #1601, #1801) 103
5.7 RETURN -TO-REFERENCE POINT 104

5.7.1 Direction of Return-to-Reference Point (#1403, #1603, #1803) 104
5.7.2 Return-to-Reference-Point Approach Feedrate Setting (#1504, #1704,#1904) 105
5.7.3 Return-to-Reference-Point Creep Feedrate Setting (#1505, #1705, #1905) 105
5.7.4 Return-to-Reference-Point Approach Distance (#1556, #1756, #1956) 105
5.7.5 Reference Point Area (#1125) 105
5.8 SPINDLE PARAMETER SETTING 106

5.8.1 Spindle Mode Setting (#2004) 106
5.8.2 Maximum Rotation Speed on Each Gear (#2150, #2151, #2152 106
5.9 NO-USING PARAMETER SETTING 106
6. I/0 ALLOCATIONS 108
6.1 I/O SIGNAL TYPES AND ALLOCATION AREA 108
6.2 I/O SIGNAL FORMAT 112
6.3 CAUTIONS ON ALLOCATION 112
IV
6.4 I/O SIGNAL DETERMINATION (PREPARATION FOR ALLOCATION 113
6.5 ALLOCATION METHOD 114

6.5.1 Allocation Operation (Use of Personal Computer) 115
6.5.2 Explanation of Allocation Commands 115
,6.6 STANDARD ALLOCATION I17 " 7'

6.7 I/O ALLOCATION ADDRESS LIST 122
7. OPERATION OF CRT CONTROL STATION 128
7.1 CHARACTER DISPLAY AND KEYS 128

7.1.1 CRT Character Display 128
7.1.2 Function Keys 129
7.1.3 Address Keys 129
7.1.4 Data Keys 130
7.1.5 Next Key 130
7.1.6 Page Keys 131
7.1.7 Cursor Keys 131
7.1.8 Edit Keys 131
7.1.9 Memory Data Keys 132
7.1.10 Reset Key 132
7.2 DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION "' 133

7.2.1 General Display f33
7.2.2 Command Data Display 135
7.2.3 Display of Current Position Values 135
7.2.4 Display of Alarm Codes 737
7.2.5 Displaying State of I/0 Signals 738
7.2.6 Display of Registered Program Number 139
7.3 DISPLAYING AND WRITING PARAMETERS 739
7.4 DISPLAYING AND WRITING OFFSET DATA I4!
7.5 EDITING PROGRAMS 143

7.5.1 Program Register and Call 743
7.5.2 Insertion of Programs ]44
7.5.3 Altering Programs 144
7.5.4 Program Erase 745
7.5.5 Search Functions 145
8. PERSONAL COMPUTER 148
8.1 INTERFACE W_TI-t Motionpack-ll0 148
8.2 OPERATINGMETHOD WHEN USING PC-8201 IS1
8.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT BETWEEN CRT CONTROL STATION

AND PERSONAL COMPUTER 155
8.3.1 Input of Program from Personal Computer 756
8.3.2 Output of Program to Personal Computer I56
8.3.3 Collation of Program with File in Personal Computer 157
8.3.4 Input of Parameters from Personal Computer I57
8.3.5 Output of Parameters to Personal Computer 758
8.3.6 Input of Offset Data from Personal Computer 758
8.3.7 Output of Offset Data to Personal Computer 759
V
.CONTENTS.(Cont'd)
8.4 DIRECT TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE

8.4.1 Interface between Motion Module and Personal Computer 160
8.4.2 Commands 160
8.5 CREATING PROGRAMS 161

8.5.1 Input of Programs from CRT Control Station 161
8.5.2 Input of Programs from Personal Computer 161
8.5.3 Examples of Programs 161
9. INTERFACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT 164
9.1 ITEMS RELATED TO POWER SUPPLY 165

9.1.1 Power-on Sequence 165
9.1.2 Control Power Units 165
9.2 INPUT/OUTPUT AT MACHINE SIDE 168

9.2.1 Rules for Input/Output Signals 168
9.2.2 Detail of Input Signals 171
9.2.3 Detail of Output Signals 181
9.3 CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND CRT CONTROL STATION

9.3.1 Connection between CRT Control Station and Motion Module 185
9.3.2 Connection between Personal Computer and Motion Module 186
9.3.3 Connection between DNC Personal Computer and Motion Module 188
9.4 CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND AXIS MODULES 189
9.5 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND Servopack, TG AND PG 190

9.5.1 Connection between Axis Modules and Servopack 190
9.5.2 Connection between Axis Modules and TG and PG 191
9.6 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND SPINDLE DRIVES 193
9.7 CONNECTION BETWEEN MICRO PC MODULE

AND MOTION MODULE/PERSONAL COMPUTER 194
9.7.1 Connection between Micro PC Module and Motion Module .194
9.7.2 Connection between Micro PC Module and Personal Computer 195
9.8 CONNECTION BETWEEN MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR AND MOTION MODULE 196
9.9 CONNECTOR TERMINAL NUMBER AND SIGNAL NAMES 197

9.9.1 Motion Module, Type JEFMC-C02 [] 197
9.9.2 Axis Module, Type JEFMC-B011 199
9.9.3 CRT Control Station, Type JEFMC-H011 199
9.9.4 Micro PC Module, Type JEFMC-Bll0 200
9.10 SIGNAL CABLES 202

9.10.1 List of Cables 202
9.10.2 Cable Specifications 203
9.10.3 ConnectOr 204
9.11 WIRING PRECAUTIONS 205

9.11.1 Prevention of Interference between Wires 205
9.11.2 Insertion of Surge Suppressors into Coils 206
9.11.3 Use of Insulating Transformers and Line Filters 206
9.11.4 Grounding Method 206
9.11.5 Power Supply of 5 VDC 207
VI
10. SETTINGS AND INDICATIONS FOR MODULES 210
10.1 MOTION MODULE SYSTEM SETTING 210
10.2 INDICATIONS FOR MOTION MODULES 210

10.2.1 Indications of Input Signal Monitor 210
10.2.2 Status Indications 211
10.3 AXIS MODULE ADDRESSING (AXIS SETTING) 212
10.4 INDICATIONS FOR AXIS MODULES 213
10.5 MICRO PC MODULE ADDRESSING 213
10.6 INDICATIONS FOR MICRO PC MODULES 214

11. TEST RUN 218
11.1 TEST RUN METHOD 218

11.1.1 Wiring Check 218
11.1.2 Power-on Check 218
11.1.3 Voltage Check 219
11.1.4 Input Signal Check 219
11.1.5 Input/Output Diagnosis Number List 220

11.1.6 Setting Parameters 225
11.1.7 Manual operation and Confirmation of Moving Direction 227
11.1.8 Confirmation of Stroke Limit 228
11.1.9 Confirmation of Return-to-Reference Point Operation 229
11.1.10 Confirmation of Memory Operation 230
11.2 ADJUSTMENT METHOD 231

11.2.1 Adjustment of Reference Point 231
11.2.2 Adjustment of Position Loop Gain (value of Kp) 232
12. APPLICATIONS 234
12.1 SELECTION OF SERVOMOTOR AND Servopack 234

12.1.1 Confirmation of Machine Specifications 234
12.1.2 Selection of Servomotors 234
12.1.3 Examination of Servo Performances 236
12.1.4 Selection of Detector 237
12.1.5 Selection of Servomotor Type and ServopackType 238
12.2 APPLICATION CIRCUITS 239
APPENDIX-1 LIST OF ALARM CODES 250
APPENDIX-2 LIST OF SERVOMOTORS 255
APPENDIX-3 LIST OF Servopack UNITS 258
APPENDIX:-4 LIST OF Motionpack-110 261
VII
INDEX
Subject ..... Section No. .Page
. . . • . ..
A Absolute/Incremental Command Designation (G90, G91) ..................... 4.2.17 ............... 74

Acceleration/Deceleration Constant
(#1407, #1607, #1807, #1501to#1503, #1701to#1703, #1901 to #1903) ...... 5.6.1 •.............. 99
Acceleration/Deceleration During Interpolation Feed ........................... 3.4.2 ............... 30
Acceleration/Deceleration During Rapid Traverse and Jogging ............ 3.4.1 ............... 29
Address Characters .......................................... : ................................ 4.1.2 ......... : ..... 42
AddressKeys 7.1.3 129

ADDRESS SEARCH FUNCTION ...................................................... 3.13 ............... 36
ADJUSTMENT METHOD .................................................................. 11.2 ............... 231
Adjustment of Position Loop Gain (value of Kp) 11.2.2 ............... 232
Adjustment of Reference Point 11.2.1 ............... 231
ALARM CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION ................................................ 3.15 ............... 38

ALLOCATION METHOD .... _............................................................. 6.5 ............... 114
Allocation Operation (Use of Personal Computer) .............................. 6.5.1 ............... 115
Altering Programs ........................................................................... 7.5.3 ............... 144
APPLICATION CIRCUITS ...................................... ......................... 12.2 ............... 239
APPLICATIONS .............................................................................. 12 .................. 234
Automatic Return-to-Reference Point (G28) ....................................... 4.2.9 ............... 53

AXIS MODULE ADDRESSING (AXIS SETTING) .............................. 10.3 ............... 212
Axis Module, Type JEFMC-B011 ......................................................... 9.9.2 ............... 199 /
Axis Omission .................................................................................... 3.5.5 ............... 32
B Backlash Compensation Value Setting (#1405, #1605, #1805) .................. 5.5.7 ............... 97
Block Preread .......................................... 3.5.8 ............... 32
C Cable Specifications ........................................................................... 9.10.2 ............... 203

CAUTIONS ON ALLOCATION .......... _.............................................. 6.3 ............... 112
CHARACTER DISPLAY AND KEYS ................................................ 7.1 ............... 128
Circular Interpolation (G02, G03) 4.2.5 ............... 48
Collation of Program with File in Personal Computer ........................ 8.3.3 ............... 157
Combined Operation Command (G83) Setting Data (#1202) .............. .... 5.5.9 ............... 99
Combined Operation Commands (G80 to G99) .................................... 4.2.16 ............... 65
Command Data Display ..................................................................... 7.2.2 ............... 135
Commands ....................................................................................... 8.4.2 ............... 160
Confirmation of Machine Specifications ............................................. 12.1.1 ............... 234
Confirmation of Memory Operation ................................................... 11.1.10 ............... 230

Confirmation of Return-to-Reference Point Operation ........................ 11.1.9 ............... 229
Confirmation of Stroke Limit ............................................................ 11.1.8 ............... 228
Connection between Axis Modules and Servopack ................................. 9.5.1 ............... 190
CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND
Servopack, TG AND PG ....................................................................... 9.5 .................. 190
CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND

SPINDLE DRIVES ........................................................................... 9.6 .................. 193
Connection between Axis Modules and TG and PG .............................. 9.5.2 ............... 191
Connection between CRT Control Station and Motion Module ............... 9.3.1 ............... 185
VIK
7: = ""
, Subject ' Section No.' " Page
Connection between DNC Personal Computer and Motion Module _....... " 9.3.3 ': .......... '":_188
CONNECTION BETWEEN MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR AND .....
MOTION MODULE ........................................................................ ".... 9.8 " 196
Connection between Micro PC Module and Motion Module ......... :-.. .... 9.7. 1 "194
CONNECTION BETWEEN MICRO PC MODULE AND .....
MOTION MODULE/PERSONAL COMPUTER ................................. _"" 9. 7 -'"': ...... "'194
Connection between Micro PC Module and Personal Computer ............ 9.7.2 ............... 195
CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND "

AXIS MODULES .............................................................................. 9.4 ................ 189
CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND
CRT CONTROL STATION AND PERSONAL COMPUTER ................ 9. 3 , ":.......... :'" 185
Connection between Personal Computer and Motion Module ............... 9. 3. 2 ............... 186
Connector .......................................................................................... 9. 1O. 3 ............... 204
CONNECTOR TERMINAL NUMBER AND SIGNAL NAMES ............ 9.9 ........... :"" 197
Control Power Units ........................................................................... 9. 1.2 .......... •..... 165

CRT Character Display ..................................................................... 7. 1.1 --': ....... --'- 128
CREATING PROGRAMS 8.5 "'"............. 161
CRT Control Station, Type JEFMC-H011 ............................................. 9. 9.3 ............... 199
Cursor Keys ........... ......................................................................... 7. I, 7 ..... ":"'."."" 131
D DATA INPUT/OUTPUT BETWEEN CRT CONTROL STATION

AND PERSONAL COMPUTER ....................... .............. :.................. 8.3 ............... 155
Data Keys ....................................................................................... 7. 1.4 ...... ""_":" 130
Decimal Point Movement .................................................................. 4.1.4 ............... 42
Decimal Point Programming ............................................................ 4. 1.3 ............... 42
DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS ................................................... 5. 1 ............... 84
Detail of Input Signals .................................................................. ...... 9.2.2 ............... 171

Detail of Output Signals ..................................................................... 9.2.3 .... "- ......... 181
DIRECT TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE•
AND PERSONAL COMPUTER ......................................................... 8. 4 ............... 160
Direction of Return-to-Reference Point ' (#1403, #1603, #1803) ............... 5.7. 1 ............... 104
DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION ..................................... _.... 7.2 ............... 133
DisPlay of Alarm Codes ........................... _......................................... 7. 2.4 ............... 137

Display of Current Position Values .................................................... 7.2.3 ............... 135
Display of Registered Program Number ............................................. 7.2.6 ............... 139
DISPLAYING AND WRITING OFFSET DATA ................................. 7. 4 ............... 141
DISPLAYING AND WRITING PARAMETERS .................. ............... 7.3 ...... ......... .139
Displaying State of I/O Signals ......................................................... 7.2.5 ............... 138

DNC OPERATION ........................................................................... 3.6 ............... 33
DNC Operation Mode (DNC) ............................................................ 3. 1.7 ............... 24
Drift Offset (#1401, #1601, #1801) ...................................................... 5. 6. 7 ............... 103
Dwell (G04) ...................................... •................................................ 4.2. 6 ............... 51
E Edit Keys .......................................................................................... 7.1.8 ............... 131

Editing Mode(EDIT) 3. 1.1 ............... 22
EDITING PROGRAMS ..................................................................... 7.5 ...... ......... 143
IX
INDEX (Cont'd)
Subject Section No. Page
Error-Detect-Off Positioning (G06) ................................................... 4.2.3 ............... 47

Examination of Servo Performances ................................................... 12.1.3 ................ 236
Examples of Programs ........................................................................ 8.5.3 ............... 161
Explanation of Allocation Commands ................................................ 6.5.2 ............. -- 115
External Dimensions in mm ............................................................... 9.10.3.1 ............ 204
EXTERNAL OFFSET COMMAND (INDIRECT SPECIFICATION) ...... 4.3 ............... 76
F FEEDRATE ....................................................................................... 3.3 ............... 26

FEEDRATE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION .............................. 3.4 ............... 29
Feedrate Command Voltage Setting (#1408, #1608, #1808) ..................... 5.6.3 ............... 102
For DC Servomotor 12V Transistor Output PG 9.5.2.2 ............... 192
For DC Servomotor 5V Line Driver Output PG .................................... 9.5.2.1 ............... 191
For Setting Parameters on the CRT Control Station .............................. 11.1.6.1 ............ 225
For Setting Parameters on the Personal Computer .............................. 11.1.6.2 ............ 226
Function Keys .................................................................................... 7.1.2 ............... 129
Function Selection (#1001, #1002, #1003, #1005, #1006, #1009) ............... 5.3.2 ............... 87
FUNCTIONS ......................................................... - ........................ ..... 3 .................. 22
FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION OF MODULES ................................. 2.3 ............... 11
G G FUNCTION .................................................................................... 4.2 ............... 45

GENERAL .......................................................................................... 2.1 ............... 6
General Display ......................................... , ....................................... 7.2.1 ............... 133
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MODULES .................................... 2.4 ............... 15
Grounding Method ........................................................................... 9.11.4 ............... 206
I I/O ALLOCATION ADDRESS LIST ................................................... 6.7 ............... 122

I/O ALLOCATIONS ........................................................................ 6 .................. 106
I/O SIGNAL DETERMINATION
(PREPARATION FOR ALLOCATION) ............................................. 6.4 ............... 113
I/O SIGNAL FORMAT ..................................................................... 6.2 ............... 112
I/O SIGNAL TYPES AND ALLOCATION AREA ................................. 6.1 ............... 108
INDICATIONS FOR AXIS MODULES ................................................ 10.4 ............... 213

INDICATIONS FOR MICRO PC MODULES ....................................... 10.6 ............... 214
INDICATIONS FOR MOTION MODULES .......................................... 10.2 ............... 210
Indications of Input Signal Monitor 10.2.1 ............... 210
Indications of Input Signal Monitor ...................................................... 10.6.1 ............... 214
INPUT FORMAT .............................................................................. 4.1 ............... 40

Input Format List .............................................................................. 4.1.1 ............... 40
Input of Offset Data from Personal Computer ....................................... 8.3.6 ............... 158
Input of Parameters from Personal Computer ....................................... 8.3.4 ............... 157
Input of Program from Personal Computer .......................................... 8.3.1 ............... 156
Input of Programs from CRT Control Station ............ ........................... 8.5.1 ............... 161
Input of Programs from Personal Computer ....................................... 8.5.2 ............... 161
Input Signal Check .............................................................................. 11.1.4 ............... 219
X
Subject Section
No. Page
INPUT/OUTPUT AT MACHINE SIDE ................................................ 9.2 .................. 168

Input/Output Diagnosis Number List ................................................ 11.1.5 ............... 220
Insertion of Programs ........................................................................ 7. 5. 2 .................. 144
Insertion of Surge Suppressors into Coils 9. 11.2 ............... 206
INTERFACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT ............................................. 9 ..................... 164
Interface between Motion Module and Personal Computer ..................... 8. 4. 1 .................. 160
INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-ll0 ................................................... 8. 1 .................. 148
Interpolation Feedrate Bias(#1475, #1675, #1875) ................................. 5.6.2 .................. 101
Interpolation Feedrate Setting (F-FUNCTION) ...... .............................. 3. 3. 2 .................. 27
Interpolation Max. Feedrate Setting (#1102) .......................................... 5. 5. 2 .................. 94
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................. 1 ..................... 2

ITEMS RELATED TO POWER SUPPLY ............................................. 9. 1 .................. 165
J Jogging Feedrate Setting (#1104 to #1118) ............................................. 5. 5. 3 .................. 94

Jogging Mode (JOG) ........................................................................... 3. 1.3 .................. 23
k Linear Interpolation (G01) .................................................................. 4.2.4 ......... ......... 48

LIST OF ALARM CODES ........................................................... :...... APPENDIX-1 -.- 250
List of Cables .................................................................................... 9. 10. 1 ............... 202
List of G Codes 4.2. 1.................. 45
LIST OF Motionpack -110 .................................................................. APPENDIX-4-.- 261
LIST OF SERVOMOTORS ............................................................... APPENDIX-2 "'" 255

LIST OF Servopack UNITS .............................................. •................ APPENDIX-3 "'" 258
M Machine Lock Operation ............................. ........................................ 3. 5. 4 .................. 31

M -Codes for Internal Processing (M90 to M99) .................................... 4.4.4 .................. 80
M-Codes for Stop (MOO, M02, M30) ................................................... 4.4.3 .................. 79
M-Function ....................................................................................... 4.4.2 .................. 78
MACHINE SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS .................................... 5.5 .................. 94
Manual Feed Mode (HANDLE) ............................................. ............... 3. 1.6 .................. 24

Manual Interruption of Automatic Operation ....................................... 3. 5. 7 .................. 32
Manual Operation and Confirmation of Moving Direction ..................... 11.1.7 ............... 227
MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT .................................... 3.2 .................. 24
Max. Feedrate Setting at Manual Feed (#1101) ....................... ............. 5. 5. 1 .................. 94
Maximum Rotation Speed on Each Gear (#2150, #2151, #2152) ............ 5.8.2 .................. 106
MDI OPERATION .............................................................................. 3. 12 36
MDI Operation Mode (MDI) "........... _....................................... 3. 1.8 .................. 24
MECHANICAL HANDLE ...................................... _........................... 3. 10 .................. 34
Memory Data Keys ............................................................................ 7. 1.9 .................. 132
MEMORY OPERATION .................................................................. 3.5 .................. 30

Memory Operation Mode (MEM) ...................................................... 3. 1.2 .................. 23
MF, SF, TF Signal Delay Time Setting (#1100) ................................. 5. 3. 3.................. 90
MICRO PC MODULE ADDRESSING ................................................ 10.5 .................. 213
Micro PC Module, Type JEFMC-Bll0 ................................................ 9.9.4 .................. 200
XI
INDEX (Cont'd)
MOTION MODULE SYSTEM SETTING ............................................. 10. 1 .................. 210

Motion Module, Type JEFMC-C02[_ ................................................... 9.9. 1 .................. 197
N Next Key ........................................................... . ......................... "" 7.1.5 .................. 130

NO -USING PARAMETER SETTING ................... -............................ 5.9 .................. 106
Normal Rotation, Reverse Rotation, and Stop of Spindle ..................... 3. 11.1 ............... 35
Notch Signal Commands A (G68, G69) ............................... ................. 4.2. 14 ............... 62
Notch.Signal Commands B (G66, G67) .............................. '.................. 4.2. 15 ............... 63
0 Offset Value Input (G10) ..................................................................... 4.2.7 .................. 51

OPERATING METHOD WHEN USING PC-8201 ............ ..................... 8. 2 .................. 151
Operation in MDI Mode .................................................................. 3. 12.2 ............... 36
Operation of Axis Modules ................................................................ 2.3.2 .................. 12
Operation of CRT Control Station .............................................. •........ 2.3. 4 .................. 15
OPERATION OF CRT CONTROL STATION .................................... 7 ..................... 128

Operation of Micro PC Modutes ................................... : .............. :...... 2. 3.3 .................. 14
Operation of Motion Modules ............................................................ 2.3. 1.................. 11
Optional Block Skip ........................................................................... 4. 1.7 .................. 44
Optional Block Skip Function ............................................................ 3.5. 6.................. 32
Output of Offset Data to Personal Computer ....................................... 8.3.7 .................. 159

Output of Parameters to Personal Computer ....................................... 8. 3. 5.................. 158
Output of Program to Personal Computer .......................................... 8.3.2 .................. 156
P Page Keys ....................................................................................... 7. 1.6 .................. 131

PARAMETERS .............................................................................. 5 ..................... 84
PARAMETER/PROGRAM PROTECT FUNCTION ........................... 3. 14 .................. 37
PERSONAL COMPUTER .................................................................. 8 ..................... 148
Personal Computer _ * CRT Control Station_ Motion Module ......... 9. 3.2. 2 ............... 187
Personal Computer , , Motion Module ............................................. 9. 3.2. 1............... 186

PG for AC Servomotor ..................................................................... 9. 5. 2.3 ............... 193
Pitch Error Compensation (#1552, #1752, #1952, #1553, #1753,
#1953, #1410to#1473, #1610to#1673, #1810 to#1873) ........................ 5.5.8 .................. 97
Plane Designation (G17, G18, G19) ................................................... 4.2.8 .................. 53
POSITION CANCEL ........................................................................ 3.8 .................. 33
POSITION MEMORY ........................................................................ 3. 9 ................... 34

Position Command Unit Setting
(#1557, #1558, #1757, #1758, #1957, #1958) ....................................... 5.4.1 ............... 90
Position Loop Gain (#1474, #1674, #1874) .......................................... 5.6.4 ............... 102
Position Offset in X - and Y-Axes (G45 to G48) .................................... 4.2. 12 ............... 57
Position Offset in Z-Axis (G43, G44, G49) ....................................... 4.2. 11 ............... 55
Position Setting Range (#1406, #1606, #1806) .................................... 5.6.6 ............... 103
Positioning (GO0) .............................................................................. 4.2.2 ............... 49
Power Supply for Input/Output Signals' . .............................. : ............. 9. 1.2.3 ............... 168
Power Supply for PG ........................................................................ 9.1.2. 2 ............... 167
Power Supply of 5 VDC ............................................................... • ..... 9. 11.5 ............... 207
I
XII
J
Subject ' Section No. Page
Power Units for Motion Modules, Axis M0duies

and Micro PC Modules ...................................................... •................. 9. 1.2. 1............. 2'165
Power-on Check " 11.1.2 •.............. 218
Power-on Sequenc " 9.1.1"................. 165
Prevention of Interference between Wires ............................................. 9. 11. i ............. "'205
Program input in MDI Mode ............................................................... 3. 12. i 36
Program Register and Call ................................................ ............ 7.5. ! ............... 7"143

Program Designation and Starting 3.5. 1.................. 30
Program Erase 7.5. 4..................145
Program Number .............................................................................. 4. i. 5............... :.. 44
PROGRAMMING .............................................................................. 4 40
Programming of Absolute Zero Point (G92) 4.2. 18 ............... 75
FI Rapid Traverse Feedrate Setting (#1500, #1700, #1900) ........................ 5. 5. 4.................. 95

Rapid Traverse Motion Mode (RAPID) ............................................. 3. 1.5 ................... 23
Rapid Traverse Rate ........................................................................ 3.3. 1.................. 26
Reference Point Area (#1125) ................................... - .................... 5. 7. 5.................. 105.
Reset Key .......................................................................................... 7. 1.10 :.............. 132
Return -to-Machine Coordinate System (G53) .................................... 4.2. 13 ............... 61

RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT ................................................... 5.7 .................. 104
Return-to-Reference-Point Approach Distance (#1556, #1756, #1956) ...... 5. 7. 4 .................. 105
Return-to-Reference-Point Approach Feedrate Setting
(#1504, #1704, #1904) ............................................................ ............ 5.7.2 .................. 105
Return-to-Reference-Point Creep Feedrate Setting
(#1505, #1705, #1905) ........................................................................ 5.7.3 .................. 105
Rules for Input Signals ........................................................................ 9.2. 1.1 ............... 168

Rules for Input/Output Signals ......................................... ................... 9. 2. 1 ............... 168
Rules for Output Signa!s ..................................................................... 9. 2. 1.2 ............... 169
S S FUNCTION ............................................................ ........................ 4.5 .................. 81

Search Functions ................................................................................. 7.5.5 .................. 145
Selection of Detector ........................................................................ 12. 1.4 ............... 237
SELECTION OF SERVOMOTOR AND Servopack .............................. 12. 1 .................. 234
Selection of Servomotor Type and Servopack Type .............................. 12. 1.5 ............... 238
Selection of Servomotors ........................................ .......................... 12. 1.2 ............... 234

Sequence Number .............................................................................. 4. 1.6 ................ " 44
Servo Error:Range (#1555, #1755, #1955) .......................................... 5.6. 5.................. 103
SERVO-RELATED PARAMETERS ................................................... 5.6 .................. 99
Setting Axis for Use (#i000) ............................................................... 5. 3. 1.................. 86
Setting Parameters ........................................................................... 1"1.1.6 ............... 225

SETTINGS AND INDICATIONS FOR MODULES .............................. 10 ..................... 210
SIGNALCABLES 9. 10 ................ "'202
SIGNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS ..................... .................................... 4.4 .................. 77
Single-Block Operation ....................................................................... • 3.5.3 ............... 31
NII
INDEX (Cont'd)
Skip Function (G31) ........................................................................... 4.2. 10 ............... 54

Software Limit Switch Function
(#1402, #1602, #1802, #1550, #1551, #1750, #1950, #1751, #1951) ............ 5.5.6 ............... 96
SPECIAL PARAMETERS .................................................................. 5. 4 .................. 90
SPINDLE CONTROL FUNCTION ...................................................... 3. 11 .................. 34
Spindle Gear Change ........................................................... ............. 3. 11.2 ............... 35
Spindle Mode Setting (#2004) ....... :....................................................... 5.8. 1 ............... 106

SPINDLE PARAMETER SETTING ................................................... 5.8 .................. 106
STANDARD ALLOCATION ...... ;.................................... .................... 6.6 .................. 117
Status Indications .............................................................................. 10. 2.2 ............... 211
Status Indications .............................................................................. 10.6. 2 ............... 216
Step Feed Displacement Distance Setting (#1122, #1123, #1124) ............ 5.5.5"- ................ 96
Step Operation Mode (STEP) ............................................................... 3. 1.4 .................. 23
Subprogram (M98, M99) ..................................................................... 4.4.5 .................. 80
SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 2 ..................... 6
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SPECIFICATIONS ........................ 2.2 .................. 7
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS ....................................... 5.3 .................. 86

Spindle Mode Setting (#2004) ............................................................... 5.8. 1.................. 106
T T-Function .......................................................................................... 4.4. 1 .......... •....... 77

Temporary Stop ........................................................................ -......... 3. 5.2 .................. 31
Terminal Number and Dimensions in mm .......................................... 9.10. 3. 2 ............ 205
TEST RUN .................................................................................. ..... 11 ..................... 218
TEST RUN METHOD ........................................................................ 11.1 .................. 218
TYPES OF OPERATION MODES ...................................................... 3. 1 .................. 22
U UNRESTRICTED LENGTH POSITIONING .. .............. :...................... 3.7 .................. 33

Use of Insulating Transformers and Line Filters ................................. 9. 11.3 ............... 206
V VARIETIES OF PARAMETERS ......................................................... 5.2 .................. 84

Voltage Check .................................................................................... 11.1.3 ............... 219
W Wiring Check ............................................................. :...................... 11.1.1 ............... 218

WIRING PRECAUTIONS .................................................................. 9. 11 .................. 205
XIV
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 2
_L
1. INTORODUCTION
With the increasing integration of FA and FMS concepts in manufacturing industries, the
demand for flexible motion control systems for material handling, processing and
fabricating is mounting.
As an automatic motion control method, numerical control (NC) has been in wide
use, but NC has been rather exclusively developed for machine tools, and is not always
convenient for use for diverse production activities.
The general purpose motion controller Motionpack-ll0 has been developed to offer a
versatile and convenient means of controlling motions in FA and FMS applications.
The main features of Motionpack-110 can be described as follows:

• Linear motions of up to 3 components and spindle speed are automatically controlled in
combination.
• Diverse motion types such as involved in FA and FMS can be programmed easily.
• The motions can be controlled by personal computers.(DNC function)
• Logic control can be combined with motion control, by micro PC module.
• Building block design in the electro-mechanical composite configuration.
Motionpack-110 with these features is a very convenient and useful means for
automatically and flexibly controlling the motions of material handling systems, processing
machines and assembly lines.
This manual describes the configuration, programming, operation, and

maintenance of motion control systems based on Motionpack-ll0.
Understanding the contents of this manual will enable you to take full advantage of
the performance capabilities of Motionpack-ll0 in the composition of automatic systems
and.programs in your plan.
2
f
® ® @
OMICRO PC MODULE
®MOTION MODULE
_) AXIS MODULE
@ Servopack UNITS
CRT CONTROL 585-183

STATION
586-147
583-34 583-34
SERVOMOTOR SERVOMOTOR
Simple Motion Control System
(Simple 2-Axis Positioning System)

"_ ,
3
NOTE
1. In this manual, we have endeavored to outline to the greatest extent
possible accurate information on individual functions and associated
functions. However, while functions that "can" be performed are finite,
what "cannot" be performed or "must not" be attempted are virtually
limitless. Therefore, things which are not explicitly described as possible
should be considered to be impossible.
2. In this manual, one pulse is assumed to be 1 _ m. For systems in which 1

pulse is not lzm, but 0.01 ram, 0.1 °, etc., necessary conversions must be
made.
3. The specifications in this manual are subject to change without prior

notice.
585-186
585-204
4 I
CONTENS
2. SYSTEM 6
2.1 GENERAL 6
2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SPECIFICATIONS 7
2.3 FUNCTIONS AND oPERATION OF MODULES 11

2.3.1 Operation Of Motion Modules 11
2.3.2 Operation of Axis Modules 12
2.3.3 Operation of Micro PC Modules 14
2.3.4 Operation of CRT Control Station 15
2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MODULES 15
5
2. SYSTEM
2.1 GENERAL
Motionpack-ll0 is a general purpose controller that realized motion control in 1 to 3 axial

directions spindle control and logic control with the use of functionally divided standard
modules, and has the following features.
• The modules are individually available in the same way as with YASKAWA Servomotors.
Users can easily configure their own systems by freely combining them.
• Motionpack-110 has ample motion control basic functions. Their combinations are easily
implemented by programming, by parameters, by inputting from the CRT control station
or by a personal computer.
• It uses the established machine tool NC language, supplemented by general industrial

application functions.
• It can be connected to a host computer with RS422 transmission (RS232C is also possible)
to configure hierarchical systems.
• Motionpack-110 offers enhanced motion control systems for material handling, processing,
and fabricating. Because Motionpack-ll0 can be combined with a simple CAD system
by DNC function, it allows part data from a master computer, such as a personal
computer, to be received and perform motion control.
• Motion control including logic is available.
• Many types of YASKAWA general-purpose units for system composition are available
for connection such as servo controllers, motors, and variable speed drives.
6
2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SPECIFICATIONS
System configurations of Motionpack-ll0 are,shown in Fig. 2.1 and the specifications in

Table 2.1.
__,
"_'=_-' "_" " HAND-HELD
PERs0.AL
COMPUTER
_1 9 COMPUTER
! _ Motionpack-1 10
MOTION
588-309 MODULE
CRT CONTROL
585-18 STATION FA BUS
txxi,xsiz
xsis
xst
AXIS ' ' MICRO PC
MODULE MODULE
586-154 586-154"_ 586-154"_ 586-154 586-152
SERVOMOTOR
1 .
I
•
!
t SPINDLE
CONTROLLERS, DRIVE
Servopacks
585-245 685-318
SERVOMOTORS 1
(
/ , 583-34
382-39.
_
Iqqq_
I-'!"13
_ "
,e
" 481-8
X-AXIS Y-AXIS Z-AXIS SPINDLE 473-5239
478-151
I/0 DEVICES
Fig. 2.1 Motionpack-110System Configuration -7

2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
Table2.1 Motionpack-110 Specifications

(Mark © : available)
Motion Module
Functions Specifications Type JEF MC-
C020 C023 C027
ControlledAxes 1 to 3 axes O O O
Simultaneously Controllable • 3 axes for positioning O O O
Axes • 2 axes for circular interpolation

-- © O
• 3 axes for linear interpolation
Spindle Control Spindle speed command (S5-digit) analog output

according to motion control.(Axis module and O O O
external power _+15 VDC are required.)
Least Output Increment 1 pulse O O O
Max Programmable Dimension _+99999999 pulses O O O
Conversion of Input Enable

Increment Unit and Pulse O © ©
Feed Function 400 kpps max (at x4) O O O

• Rapid Traverse Rate 24 m/min max at 0.001ram/pulse O O O
• Feedrate Setting 24 m/min max at 0.001mm/pulse -- O O
• Feedrate Override At 25%, 50% or 100% of the feedrate or available
between 10% and 200% (21 steps). -- O O
Automatic Acceleration/ • Linear and 2-stage linear acc/dec for positioning O O O

Deceleration and manual feed.
• Exponential for interpolation. -- O O
Operation Mode
• Edit Motiondata programming O O O
• Automatic
MEM Automatic operation by program stored in memory. O O O
DNC Automatic operation by program while receiving part
data from the master computer. -- -- O
• Manual
STEP Manual operation of preset distance : 3-stage setting
of S, M and L (simultaneous 3-axis operation O O O
available).
JOG Jog feed : 16-stage setting (simultaneous 3-axis

operation available). O O ©
RAPID Rapid traverse rate : 3-stage setting of 25%, 50% or
100% (simultaneous 3-axis operation available). © 0 0
HANDLE With up to 3-manual pulse generators, machine re-
sponds when pulse generator handle manually
turned. Control only in the selected axial direction. -- O O
Travel distance selection per graduation : Any one of
1, 10 or 100 pulses.
Reference Point Return :
• Automatic Return Automatic return to reference point (G 28). O O O
• Manual Return Simultaneous 3-axis return by JOG or RAPID. O O O
Mechanical Handle Operation by mechanical handle (simultaneous 3-axis

operation available). 0 0 0
Single Block Automatic operation block-by-block using external

signals. 0 0 0
8
Table2.1 Motionpack-110 Specifications (Cont'd)
(Mark O : available
Motion Module
Functions Specifications Type JEFMC-
C020 C023 C027
Optional Block Skip Max 8 blocks skipped when optional skip signal ON. O O O
Machine Lock ]Execution of automatic operation program, with the

O O O
machine standing still, using external signals.
Axis Omission ]Only the desired axis can be freed from motion
O O O
control and subject to an operation by program.
Soft Limit IEnable, 4- direction from reference point. O O O
External Reset Enable by external input signal. O O O
Emergency Stop Enable by external input signal. O O O
Start Enable by external input signal. O O O
Stop (Temporary) Enable by external input signal. O O O
Machine Ready Enable by external input signal. O O O
Compensation Function :
• Backlash Enable, 0 to 127pulses. O O O
• Pitch Error Enable, 0 to 4-127 pulses, 64 points for all axes. O O O
Program : NC (part) program in compliance with JIS* B 6313.

• Program Number 0 0000 to 0 9999. Up to 99 program numbers
registered. O O O
• Sequence Number N 0000 to N 9999. Block number. O O O
Calling in Programming Calling and execution from any blocks of programming. O O O
Motion Control :
• Positioning Max simultaneous 3 axes.
• Error detect ON mode (G 00). O O O
• Error detect OFF mode (point-to-point control
available) (G 06). O O O
• Linear Interpolation (Optional) Max simultaneous 3 axes (G 01). -- O O
• Circular Interpolation Max simultaneous 2 axes.
(Optional) • Clockwise (G 02) -- O O
• Counterclockwise(G 03) -- O O
Circular radius and circular radius coordinate
designation enable.
• Dwell 0.001to 99999.999 s (G 04). O O O
• Offset Value Input Direct input of offset value in program (G 10). O O O
• Plane Designation Designation of plane for making circular
-- O O
interpolation (G 17, 18, 19).
• Automatic Return to Reference Returning to reference point automatically (G 28).
Point 0 0 0
• Skip Program advanced to next block when skip signal ON
-- 0 0
(G 31). --> (O 01)
• Position Offset • Z-axis (G 43, G 44, G 49) O O O
• X-, Y-axis (G 45to G 48) O O O
• Machine Coordinate System Temporary motion on machine coordinate system
Setting (G53). O O O
Absolute/Incremental :Movement data designated as to whether absolute or
Programming incremental value.
• Absolute(G 90) O O O
• Incremental(G 91) O O O
• Programming of Absolute Zero Designation of position of "absolute zero point" O O O

Point (G 92).
• Japanese Industrial Standard.
9
2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
Table2.1 Motionpack-110 Specifications (Cont'd)

(MarkO : available)
Motion Module
Functions Specifications Type JEF MC-
C020 C023 C027
Combined Operation
Command (Optional) :
• Drilling Cycle A drilling operation can be expressed with one -- O O
command (G 81).
• Spot Facing Cycle A drilling operation including spot facing can be -- O O
expressed with one command (G 82).
• Deep Hole Drilling Cycle A drilling operation including pecking can be -- O O
• Tapping Cycle A tapping operation can be expressed with one -- O O
command (G 84).
• Boring Cycle 1 A boring operation can be expressed with one -- O O
command (G 85).
• Boring Cycle 2 A boring operation including a spindle control can be -- O O
• Boring Cycle 3 A boring operation including a dwell can be -- O O
expressed with one Command (G 89).
• Return ro Initial Point Z axis returning position designation at the end of -- O O
(Part Ready Point) combined operation (G 98).
• Return to R Point IZ axis returning position designation at the end of -- O O
(Part Start Point) combined operation (G99).
• Cancel The above combined operations are cancelled (G 80). -- O O
Notch Signal: Selection of specifications A or B.
• Specifications A • When the specified point is reached during O O O
positioning operation, an 8-point signals is output
at low speed. (G68)
• Notch signal output reset by G68. (G69) O O O
• Specifications B • A 1-point high speed notch single. (G66) O O O
• A 1-point low speed notch signal. (G67) O O O
Unrestricted Length Used to control the machine that continually repeats O O O
Positioning motion in the same direction.
Position Memory Retained the current value display (only axis O O O
position) on previous turning OFF of the power.
Position Cancel By keying from the CRT control station, the current O O O
position can be indicated as 0.
Decimal-point The decimal point position on the screen can be
Movement Indication changed to the desired place. O O O
Signal Output :
• Miscellaneous (M) Functions M2-digit/M2-digit BCD output to external devices. O O O
• Program stop (M 0O). O O O
• End of program (M02). 0 0 0
• Return to program head after end of program O O O
(M 30).
• Subroutine program call (M 98). 0 0 ©
• Subroutine program end (Return to main program) O O O
(M 99).
• Tool (T) Functions T2-digit/T2-digit BCD output for tool selection. O © O
Advance Reading Function One block read in advance. O O O
Memory Capacity 5k bytes (standard) or 64k bytes (optional). 5kB 64kB 64kB
Communication Function
Personal Computer _ Program and parameter transmissions, diagnostic
Motion Module (machine) monitoring signal transmission, O O O
commands.
Micro PC (Programmable The logic control is available for external l/O devices O O ©
Controller) Function by Micro PC Module. ....
10
2.3 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION OF MODULES ."
The operation of the component modules of Motionpack-l_0 are as follows:
2.3.1 OPERATION OF MOTION MODULES
The motion modules serve as the key to the control of the Motionpack-110 systems, and
incorporate an 8-bit microcomputer. They read the parameters and programs when they are
input from the CRT control station or from a personal computer. When a start signal is
received, they analyze the program, generate position data, and control up to 3 axis and a
spindlemodulesviaan FA bus.
They also receive position data, alarm, and status signals from the axis modules via
the FA bus, analyze them, and transmit them to the CRT control station and personal
computer for display. They also process input/output signals. The motion module is
communicated with a micro PC module via the FA bus, as well.
The control block diagram of motion modules is given in Fig. 2.2. Expansion
memories and interpolation units are optionally available.
INPUT/OUTPUT
• 64 INPUTS
. 32 OUTPUTS
_oT,oN_oou,_ --I_ ...... ----
:
II • , oP
1 oc _-_ l--l
ssN
I
LL, F..........
I _ 5 I IZZ_. MICROPC
i _" " 1 I _ I(F/_ ;- MODULE

..... , / _ _/ ' '' --
: i __ I ,+----:----_-:
CRT CONTROL I o _ PROGRAM/MANUAL t
b/A/IUP4 UK _"_'21t II ,_ z
_--=- rI II II n_C¢¢T II L
I II ANA L Y SS
I --
/ 'I .....
_IfFA ' "--"_', MODULE
PERSONAL '+/--_1= _ I I"1 E;#E_;v t-_ I PROCESSING BUS)L
COMPUTER ,(RSmI___ I I / I_1"_u')L t
..........
I __ I "1;_'_o_'_"
I-" ' , _ _ _--7 I ',
-P-'-------_
',EXPANSION' r --- "_---1 / "'_ _rT! PERSONAL
...... , MEMORY : INTERPOLATION/ | _ _j ; I_"_ _ COMPUTER
......... ,CALCULATION ; " =, ._ _ '(RS422)t
L....... _ :_: L..........
/AXm ',u_°_,
--1 INFORMATION _-
/ PROCESSING I °+
Fig. 2.2 Control Block Diagram of Motion Module
11
2.3.2 OPERATION OF AXIS MODULES
Axis modules are units each of which controls motion along one axis. They each incorporate
an 8-bit microcomputer, read and analyze the position data from the motion modules and
external signals, and output speed commands to the Servopack to accomplish the desired
motor motions.
They output position data, alarm and status signals as answer-back data for
transmission to the motion modules.
(1) Fig. 2.3 shows the axis module control block diagram. The axis modules generate
command positions and inputs the data to the error register. The signals generated by
the PG and processed into pulses are fed back to the error register as current position
signals, so that the contents always represent the current position error. The position
error signals are converted into pulse width in the PWM circuit, luther converted into
analog voltage signals by the D/A conversion circuit, and output to the Servopack as
speed command voltages. When the position destination is reached, the contents of the
error register become zero, and the speed command becomes 0V.
During the control process, the contents of the error register are checked for excess
error, etc., and when an abnormal state is detected, alarm processing is executed.
AXIS MODULE
- - - i___L
MODOLE TPROCESSING
A"SM'SS ONi____I
I I ANSWERBACK1
PROCESSING ]
!I (FA BUS)= (
I COMMAND
....... -J ANALYSIS
1
POSITIONDATA
I
IPROCEi$1NG J
l
POSITIONs.COM
MAND
POSITIONDETECTON
Servopack
OFFSET SPEED "
I PROCESSING COM M A_ _],__._
POSITION I I L'_ _-I _ c_) SERVOMOTOR
I / ERROR VALUE(ERROR PULSE)I I
_._REGISTER_'_ PWM H D/A _1 I (_TG
POSITIONI
l PULSE I_ FEEDBACK PULSE_

PROCESSING
-- PG
Fig. 2.3 Control Block Diagram of Axis Module
12 (For Axis Control)

(2) The axis module can be used for spindle control by setting a selection switch. In this
case, speed reference analog voltage is output by a reference from the motion module.
Fig. 2.4 shows the axis module control block diagram for spindle control.
AXIS MODULE
' ' 7 PROCESSING

JANSW AC
/PROCESSlNG
,I(FA BUS)
' ] , IANALOG OUTPUT1
, COMMAND | .JPROCESSING L
..... _'l (SPINDLE /
---J ANALYSIS , I FUNCTION) |
1
POSITION DATA
PROCESSING
1
REFERENCED
P0S TION
POSITION
REFERENCE
-_ POSITION
DETECTION SPINDLE
COMPENSA
TION_ SPEFEED
EN_SPINDLE
I
J I PROCESSING
I NUMBER
J OF I L_ I _ MOTOR
/
L--_ER
I_%'_'%LSES
R0RL_..C_-_--I
I
VALUE
I POSITION
URRENT
l pULSE I
IPROCESSlNGI
I (x4) I
Fig. 2.4 Control Block Diagram of Axis Module (for Spindle Control)
13
2.3.3 OPERATION O.F MICRO PC MODULES
Micro PC module performs a logic control related to total control in Motionpack-110 system.
Use of the micro PC module allows expansion I/O (64-input/32-output points) to increase in
addition to standard I/O (64-input/32-output points). To change over standard I/O for
expansion I/O, alternation of I/O allocation is required. Changing over in the unit of 1 bit is
available.
For programming a ladder diagram or monitoring, connect a personal computer

(PC8201) to RS-422 port of the micro PC module.
I
, EXPANSION I/O
I
• I ° 64 INPUTS
I
, • 32 OUTPUTS
I
MICRO PC MODULE
,
[_ ..............
I/O PROCESSING _ MASKING

OUTPUT
MOTION -[ =I-
MODULE PROGRAM _
I
ANALYSIS = t
(FA PROCESSING
BUS z
" II Z _Z_ COMPUTER
PERSONAL
EXECUTION MONITOR mz 4"_
2)_
I= LOGICPROGRAM
SECTION PROCESSINE ]____...
o,o
_ o
_ i
f._ LLI I
......... . _- I MANUAL z _ L ......
- SETTINGFOR <
rr'_o - - -
I/0, REGISTER, -- _- a.
RELAY, TIMER
VALUES
91
OTHER
_1 COMMANDS
:' I ANALYSIS
Fig. 2.5 Control Block Diagram of Micro PC Module
14
2.3.4 OPERATION OF CRT CONTROL STATION
)
This CRT Control station is for formulating and editing programs, displaying the system
operation state and position data. It incorporates an 8-bit microcomputer, and exchanges
data with the motion module via a serial interface port. It uses a 9-inch CRT, and the
maximum character display capacity is 32 x 16 lines. Data input from the keyboard is
transmitted to the motion module via the serial interface port.
(1) Items Transmitted to Motion Module:
• Programming
• Collecting, editing, displaying, calling-up and storing of program

• Displaying, writing and altering of parameter
• Displaying, writing and altering of offset
(2) Items Transmitted from Motion Module:
• Displaying system operating status (alarm, I/O signal status, commands)
• Displaying current value
2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MODULES
(1) General Specifications of Motion Module, Axis Module and Micro PC Module
Table 2.2 General Specifications of Motion, Axis and Micro PC Modules
Items Specifications
" Power Supply 4.75 to 5.25 VDC
Motion module: 3 A (including lithium battery* )

Consumed Current Axis module: 0.5 A
MicroPC module: 1 A(includinglithium battery* )
Holding Time 10 ms
Ambient Temperature to +55°C (excluding peripheral devices)
Storage Temperature -20°C to +85°C (excluding lithium battery)
Humidity 5 _ to 95 % relative (non-condensing)
Vibration-Resistance In compliance with JISt C0911 (excluding peripheral devices)
Shock-Resistance In compliance with JISt C0912 10G max (excluding peripheral devices
Environmental Condition Free from explosive, inflammable, corrosive gases
Grounding Grounding resistance: 100 _ or less

Dielectric Strength 1500 VAC for 1 minute
Insulation Resistance 100 M_) or more at 500 VDC (between FG and 0V)
Noise Immunity 1500 Vp-p, pulse width: 1 _s
Motion module: 2.8 kg
Weight Axis module: 0.7 kg
Micro PC Module: 1.3 kg (including lithium battery)

• Lithium battery: Type JZFMZ-BA01, 3V 1.2AH, with holder, connector and lead
t Japanese Industrial Standard
15
2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MODULES (Cont'd)
(2) General Specifications of CRT Control Station
Table 2.3 General Specifications of CRT Control Station
Items Specifications
Power Supply 85 to 120 VDC, 50/60 Hz
Consumed Current 0.5 A
Holding Time 10ms
Ambient Temperature 0 to +55°C (excluding peripheral devices)
Storage Temperature -20°C to +85 °C (excluding lithium battery)
Humidity 5 % to 95 % relative (non-condensing)
Vibration-Resistance In compliance with JIS* C 0911 (excluding peripheral devices)
Shock-Resistance In compliance with JIS* C 0912 10G max (excluding peripheral devices)
Environmental Condition Free from explosive, inflammable, corrosive gases
Grounding Grounding resistance: 100 _ or less
Dielectric Strength 1500 VAC for 1 minute
Insulation Resistance 100 M_ or more at 500 VDC
Noise Immunity 1500 Vp_p, pulse width: 1 /zs
CRT 9", 32 characters × 16 lines
Keyboard Flat keyboard (function, numeric, edit and cursor keys)
Communication Port RS422 port ×2
Weight 6 kg
* Japanese Industrial Standard
16
(3) Dimensions of Modules in mm
(a) Motion Module

Type JEFMC-C02 [-]
MR CONNECTOR, 20P
RECEPTACLE: TYPE MR 20F METAL FITTING FOR METAL FITTING FOR
CASE:TYPE MR 20L RACK MOUNTING BASE MOUNTING
; ® -_
170
_ 65 (215)
, 93 MR CONNECTOR, 50P
95 RECEPTACLE: TYPE MR50F
3-M3 DIA EXTERNAL CASE: MR50L
TERMINALS(+5V,0V, FG)
Note :
1. This drawing shows a motion module, type JEFMC-C027.
Differences between above module and other motion
modules are as follows:
Type JEFMC- Difference
C020 Not provided with *1 and .2.
C023 Not provided with *1.

C027 The same as diagram above.
2. Specified cable: Type JEFMC-W084
Fig. 2.6 Motion Module
17
2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MODULES (Cont'd)
(b) Axis Module MR CONNECTOR, 20P

1
Type _EFMC-B011 RECEPTACLE: TYPE MR20F METAL FITTING FOR METAL FITTING FOR
CASE: MR20L RACK MOUNTING BASE MOUNTING
,: IIIII
a-MamA EXTERNAL //1= ('_) _i 86.3
TERMINALS (+EV, 0V, FG) ! IT0 _ i
(1283)
Fig. 2.7 Axis Module

(c) Micro PC Module
Type JEFMC-Bll0 METAL FITTING FOR METAL FITTING FOR
RACK MOUNTING BASE MOUNTING
-t_
_,CONN,C,O,.,o_ _-_'-
c_s_:
_OL 1001_1_0
RECEPTACLE:TYPE
MR CONNECTOR, 50P
RECEPTACLE:
MR20F
TYPE MR50F
_"
I _- I
l sErl^l, x,,
MR CONNECTOR_ 20P [ ,.C_.L,,. , _1
' 3-M3 DIA EXTERNAL 101 011

--I • Specified bus cable
Type JE FMC-W100.
\'x_. :
II
(43) 100
(143)
18
Fig. 2.8 Micro PC Module
(d) CRT Control Station
Type JEFMC-H011
_ _...-DC POWER SUPPLY
<X " ;: :: ; _l 2 CASES, /

i i ! ! i. i _ 2-20P CONNECTORS, i J'_
' ' _ . r _-_
_! 8-M3
D,A
_.1 _ ,_,_m_TAPPED HOLE S Drilling Planfor Panel
: = I
8-4 DIA
MTG HOLES
GROUND / [] [] ", '_
(M4O_A
SCREW) _.:_ N_'_@ .... _. 9,
TERMINAL
L,.
9"CRT _ _[]_[_ _=][_['_ l ,,,_]
""_)'
......
s,,?l ......
" "'!''_ .........
,.._) (_ J!i._]_41_
FLAT KEYBOARD
Fig. 2.9 CRT Control Station
19
CONTENTS
3. FUNCTIONS 22
3.1 TYPES OF OPERATION MODES 22

3.1.1 Editing Mode (EDIT) 22
3.1.2 Memory Operation Mode (MEM) 23
3.1.3 Jogging Mode (JOG) 23
3.1.4 Step Operation Mode (STEP) 23
3.i.5 Rapid Traverse Motion Mode (RAPID) 23
3.1.6 Manual Feed Mode (HANDLE) 23

3.1.7 DNC Operation Mode (DNC) 24
3.1.8 MDI Operation Mode (MDI) 24
3.2 MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT 24
3.3 FEEDRATE 26
3.3.1 Rapid Traverse Rate 26
3.3.2 Interpolation Feedrate Setting (F-FUNCTION) 27
3.4 FEEDRATE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION 29

3.4.1 Acceleration/Deceleration During Rapid Traverse and Jogging 29
3.4.2 Acceleration/Deceleration During Interpolation Feed 30
3.5 MEMORY OPERATION 30

3.5.1 Program Designation and Starting 30
3.5.2 Temporary Stop 31
3.5.3 Single-Block Operation 3i
3.5.4 Machine Lock Operation 31
3.5.5 Axis Omission 32
3.5.6 Optional Block Skip Function 32

3.5.7 Manual Interruption of Automatic Operation 32
3.5.8 Block Preread 32
3.6 DNC OPERATION 33
3.7 UNRESTRICTED LENGTH POSITIONING 33
3.8 POSITION CANCEL 33
3.9 POSITION MEMORY 34
3.10 MECHANICAL HANDLE 34
3.11 SPINDLE CONTROL FUNCTION 34

3.11.1 Normal Rotation, Reverse Rotation, and Stop of Spindle 35
3.11.2 Spindle Gear Change 35
3.12 MDI OPERATION 36

3.12.1 Program Input in MDI Mode 36
3.12.2 Operation in MDI Mode 36
3.13 ADDRESSSEARCH FUNCTION 36
3.14 PARAMETER/PROGRAM PROTECT FUNCTION 37
3.15 ALARM CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION 38 21

3. FUNCTIONS
3.1 TYPES OF OPERATION MODES
Motionpack-110 has the following 8 types of operation modes:
(1) Editing Mode (EDIT)
(2) Memory Operation Mode (MEM) ...... Automatic operation
(3) Jogging Mode (JOG) ...... Manual operation
(4) Step Operation Mode (STEP) ...... Manual operation
(5) Rapid Feed Motion (RAPID) ...... Manual operation
(6) Manual Feed Mode (HANDLE) ...... Manual operation
(7) DNC Operation Mode (DNC) ...... DNC automatic operation
(8) MDI Operation Mode (MDI) ...... Automatic operation (with CRT control station Type
H012)
These modes are selectedby externalinput signals EDIT, MEM, JOG, STEP,
RAPID, HANDLE, DNC, and MDI.
MOTION
MACHINE MODULE
MEM
JOG
STEP _ .
RAPID _ .
HANDLE
EDIT_
DNC '"
MDI _---
Fig. 3.1
3.1.1 EDITING MODE (EDIT)
This mode is used when writing and reading programs and parameters in the memory in
the motion module, or doing other editing operations. These editing operations are executed
from the CRT control station or from a personal computer, as detailed in Section 7
"OPERATION OF CRT CONTROL STATION" or Section 8 "PERSONAL COMPUTER".
22
3.1.2 MEMORY OPERATION MODE (MEM)
In this mode, the system automatically operates under the control of the program stored in
the memory of the motion module. Interpolation operation requires feedrate override signals
(OV1 to Ova). For details, refer to Para. 3.5 "MEMORY OPERATION".
3.1.3 JOGGING MODE (JOG)
In this znode, the machine is manually controlled in motion. While a JOG signal (e.g. +JX:
+direction of X-axis, -JX:-direction of X-axis) is ON, the machine slide moves in the
specified direction at the specified feedrate, and when the signal is turned off, it stops after
deceleration.
The feedrate is set at 16 stages max by jog feedrate selection signals (JOV1 to
JOV8) and parameters, #1104 to #1118. Simultaneous 3-axis operation is available, and the
same feedrate applies to all the three axes.
3.1.4 STEP OPERATION MODE (STEP)
This mode is selected Whenthe machine slide is to

be manually driven in steps, that is, each time a
JOG signal is turned on, the slide of the
designated axis moves through one step. The I
distance covered by a step can be set at three STEP
OPERATION
(STEP)
levels by step multiplier signals (MP1, MP2) JOGSIGNAL
(EX.:-I-JX)
MOVED _I 1
and parameters (#1122, #1123, #1124). DISTANCE l-- ._4
The feedrate isthe same as for jogging. DISTANCE
BY ISSET
PARAMETER.
Simultaneous 3-axis operation is available, and

the same feedrate and step distance apply to all
the axes. Fig.3.2Step Operation
3.1.5 RAPID TRAVERSE MOTION MODE (RAPID)
This mode is used to move the machine manually at a rapid feedrate. While a JOG signal is
on, the slide of the axis of the JOG signal moves in the specified direction at the selected
feedrate, and when the signal is turned off, it stops after deceleration. The feedrate can be
selectedby rapid feed override signals (ROV1 to ROV3) from three levels: 100%, 50%, and
25%, with the 100% feedrate specified by parameters (#1500, #1700, #1900): Simultaneous
3-axis operation is available, and the 100% feedrate is set separately for each axis.
3.1.6 MANUAL FEED MODE (HANDLE)
This mode is for manually controlling the feed motion with a manual dial. In this mode, as
the manual dial is turned CW or CCW, the machine moves in a positive or negative
direction.
The distance to be covered by the slide per dial graduation is selected from three
levels: × 1, × 10, and × 100, by an external input signal (MP1, MP2).
23
¢,f .
3.1.6. MANUAL FEED MODE (HANDLE) (Cont'd).
Simultaneous 1-axis or 3-axis handle operation can be selected by setting the

parameter #1002 D6. For simultaneous 1-axis handle operation, one handle is changed by
using the axis change signal (HX for the X axis, HY for the Y axis, or HZ for the Z axis).
For simultaneous 3-axis handle operation, the three handles may be operated
separately. In addition, only the handle of the axis specified by using the axis change
signal (HX for the X axis, HY for the Y axis, or HZ for the Z axis) can be made effective.
See 9.2.2.
3.1.7 DNCOPERATION MODE (DNC)
This mode is selected for the host computer to operate Motionpack-110 DNC.
Automatic operation under motion control is performed while travel data is being
received from the host computer.
3.1.8 MDI OPERATION MODE (MDI)
This mode is selected to operate automatically for programs which are in one block specified
from the CRT control station. The specified programs are not stored in the memory of
Motion module:
NOTE
This mode is available for Motionpack-100 with CRT control station, on
and after type JEFMC-H012.
3.2 MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT
With the Motionpack-ll0 system, the machine reference point is used as the system reference
ponit, and the system can be brought to this reference point from various positions as
described below.
When the power is turned off, the reference point data is deleted, and it must be
reset after the power supply is turned on again. Usually, a pulse generator with a zero-point
pulse and a limit switch for indicating the reference point area are used to determine the
reference point.
The motion to return to the reference point is started when a JOG signal towards the
reference ponit (i.e., +JX or -JX) is turned on while an external reference return (ZRN)
signal is on in the JOG or RAPID mode.
When the machine returns to the reference point, it stops, the axis coordinate data
becomes "0", and a "return-to-reference point" signal (ZPX, ZPY, or ZPZ for X-, Y-, or
Z-axis, respectively) is output.
24
Table 3.1 shows the signals related to the return-to-reference point operation.
Table 3.1 Signals Related to Return-to-Reference Point"
_ ate I
stSigna Mode Reference
Return-to-
Input Signal Start Completion
Output Signal
Motion _ JOG RAPID ZRN

Point +JX/-JX+JY/-JY +JZ/-JZ ZPX ZPY ZPZ
X-axis Return-to- ON OFF

ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
Reference Point OFF ON
Y-axis Return-to- ON OFF

ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
Reference Point OFF ON
Z-axis Return-to- ON OFF

ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
Reference Point OFF ON I
/
Select JOG or RAPID mode. I
_""'-j££ ?DR
Turn on "reference point

_etur.(ZRN/i _ I
feed
Turn button.
on (hold down) manual RAPID OR JOG '_L
I
i /FEEDRATE ,,
point direction at the selected I - / ', _k FEEDRATI= ,-'t_ ^
The axis moves in the reference _ / ___ _ APPROACH --I_- I REFERENCE"
feedrate. J _ . PuINT
When the dog trips decal LS, I_ 7_ i _!

deceleration is made to approach _ECEL _ L1_''/ I i
! dr ,e , .SS,GNA. =D,S C , L
W DTH I I
I I I IF NAL APPROACH D STANCE
reeorate.wnentherlrst reference I_ REFERENCE [7 [7 [7 n nl_.pt_ POINT

point pulse is oeTecTeo after the aog I POINT PULSE --J I-I El I_J l,.J-Ig;_I, i
I Deceleration
disengages fromis made tocreep LS. I
deceleration _ ___ , ......
,r ' (_/IN_i RETURN-TO-
REFERENCE REFERENCE
POINT AREA
When the shde _oves by the _ T 4/__)

specified distanceafterreference _ __ISAND B!
point pulse is detected, it stops at I REFERENr'_ .............. _ : .---"_
i_"- ! _ t
the machine reference point. I POINT _
POSITION _ AREA A AREA B
(ZPX, ZPY. or ZPZ) is output.

Reference point return completion signal //
Fig. 3.3 Return-to-Reference Point Motion
When the JOG signal is turned on, the machine slide returns to the reference point
as follows:
(_) The slide starts to move towards the reference point at the feedrate for the selected mode
(JOG or RAPID). The motion direction is the one set by the parameter (#1403, #1603,
#1803).
(_) When the dog trips the deceleration LS, the speed is reduced to the approach feedrate,
which has been set by the parameter (#1504, #1704, #1904) in advance.
(_) When the dog movesaway from the deceleration LS, and the first reference point pulse
is detected, the slide further decelerates to the creep feedrate, which has been preset by
a parameter (#1505, #1705, #1905). 25

3.2 MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT (Cont'd)
(_) When the slide travels through the preset final approach distance, after detecting the
first reference point pulse, it stops, and the stop position is taken as the machine
reference point which is also taken as the system reference point. The final approach
distance has been set by a parameter (#1556, #1756, #1956) in advance.
(_) When the slide comes to rest at the reference point, a signal for indicating the return-to-
reference point (ZPX, ZPY or ZPZ) is output. The reference point area has been preset
by a parameter (#1125) in advance.
NOTE
1. The return-to-reference motion takes place in principle, regardless of the
position of the machine slide when the power supply is turned on again.
However, when the slide is in area B (see Fig. 3.3), it cannot return
correctly. In this case, as overrun may occur, it must be moved into
area A before starting the return motion.
2. The dog width must be at least long enough for the feedrate to decelerate
to the approach feedrate.
FEEDRATEV,
RAPID Required dog width (L) is calculated roughly as follows:
r_ FEEDRATE
APPROACHVa When Vr = rapid [eedrate
I
I I a = 1st accel/decel constant

1 Vr2
DOG
WIDTH Then, 1 ....
2 a
Fig. 3.4
3. For the return to the reference point in the memory operation mode, refer
to Par. 4.2.9 "AUTOMATIC RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT
(G28)"
3.3 FEEDRATE
3.3.1 RAPID TRAVERSE RATE
The rapid feedrates are used in positioning (G00) and manual rapid feed (RAPID). The
traverse rates differ among the three axes since they are determined by the machine. The
basic rapid traverse rates can be reduced by override setting to L, M or H.
Since the machine slides move at different speeds, the resultant motion of the three
slides is not a straight line. The upper limit of the rapid traverse rate is 24,000 mm/min.
26
3.3.2 INTERPOLATION FEEDRATE SETTING (F-FUNCTION)
(1) Five digits following F designate feedrates in mm/min.
(2) The feedrate in the following range can be programmed by an F-program.
Format Command Range
F5 F1 to F24000 mm/min
Note: A decimal point cannot be used to

enter F. If it is entered with a decimal point,
an alarm occurs.
(3) The upper limit of the feedrate may be restricted by the servo system and machine
system. In this case, the upper limit is set by parameter #1102, so that even when an
F-command specifies a value above this limit, the feedrate is fixed at the set upper
limit.
(4) The F-command for a linear or circular interpolation by two slides moving in
combination, gives feedrates in a tangential direction.
(Example 1)
G90 (absolute designation)
G01X1200Y900F500; . io
/I
_'_'_'°
With the above command : +Y _OOmm/min
F = 500 = _/4002+3002 j *00mm_,
(mm/min) / L-y-AXIS ELEMENT cc = +x

_-'- X-AXIS ELEMENT
Fig. 3.5
(Example 2)
Where, G03X ..- Y ... I ... F200 ;
CENTER
_\,, 200mm/min
F = 200 = _/fx2+ fy2
'mm/min '' \\ ,, A'/4
== -FX
Fig. 3.6
27
3.3.2 INTERPOLATION FEEDRATE SETTING (Cont'd)
(5) F-commands for linear interpolations involving motions in simultaneously controlled

three-axial directions specify feedrates also in the direction tangent to the motion path.
+Y
(Example)
Where, G01X...Y...Z...F400 ; / /i
/ ENDPOINT / I
F(mm/min)=
400 = Jfx 2 +fy2 +fz z . _
0/_ I _ 4OOmm/mln
STARTPOINT I
I
"_ -I-X
/
+z
Fig. 3.7
(6) The feedrates specified by an F-command can be executed at three levels: L (25%),
M (50%) or H (100%), selectively specified by external signals.
NOTE
1. When an interpolation command is programmed, a feedrate command
must also be programmed.
2. Do not program a minus F-commmand.
28
3.4 FEEDRATE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
For rapid traversing and interpolation feed motions, the system applies the respective
automatic acceleration and deceleration.
3.4.1 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION DURING RAPID TRAVERSE AND JOGGING
During the following operations, linear automatic acceleration and deceleration are applied.
• Positioning (G00)
• Rapid traverse (RAPID)
• Jogging (JOG)
• Step feeding (STEP)
The linear feedrate acceleration and deceleration may be specified in two different
rates as shown in Fig. 3.8. (different value for each axis).
FEEDRATE (mm/s)
/
RAPID TRAVERSE
CHANGE POINT -- --
FEEDRATE V_ 2ND LINEAR
I /ACCEL/DECEL CONSTANT
1ST LINEAR '_
'=,_..f_ ACC EL/DEC EL CONSTANT' _''_'A

TIME t (S)
Fig. 3.8
The rapid traverse feedrate and rapid traverse accel/dece] constants are present by
parameters (#1500 to #1503, #1700 to #1703, #1900 to #1903).
29
3.4.2. ACCELERATION/DECELERATION DURING INTERPOLATION FEED
The interpolation feedrates are automatically accelerated and decelerated in the exponential
mode, and handle mode.
With exponential deceleration, an interpolation feedrate bias is set and used to

shorten the time for complete stopping.
Exponential accel/decel time constants are set at 8-ms intervals, and interpolation
feedrate bias is set at 125-pps intervals by parameters (#1407, #1607, #1807, #1475, #1675,
#1875). v
]/!
,;7 ,NTERPOLAT'ON
tl_ FEEDRATEBIAS
I E \_ I
-1- .......... t-- t-- - I
,-i ''*'t
EXPONENTIAL
-- ACCEL/DECEL --
TIME CONSTANT
Fig. 3.9
NOTE
Set the parameters for automatic acceleration/deceleration constants at the
optimum values for the respective machines.
3.5 MEMORY OPERATION
In this mode, one program is selected among the stored programs and is started for
automatic operation by a start signal.
The following functions are executed by the respective external signals.
3.5.1 PROGRAM DESIGNATION AND STARTING
A stored program can be designated by the Control Station or a personal computer. In

addition, program Nos. (O01 to O99) can be specified by an external BCD 2-digit switch. To
execute a desired program, designate the program No., reset, and turn on the start signal
(STR). Whether to designate the program No. by an external switch (reset signal) or not
is determined by a parameter (#1002, D7).
PROGRAM NUMBER I READING PROGRAM

(EXTERNAL SIGNAL) I_ JNUMBER
RESET 'r-1
=
jr" STARTING OF
START (STR) >50ms iI ,E t DESIGNATED PROGRAM

100 ms
'_" _="_'5o_ ms
30 Fig. 3.10
3.5.2 TEMPORARY STOP
If temporary stop signal (STP) is turned on while the system is executing a program, the
machine stops after deceleration, and the program is restarted when this signal turned off.
For ON-OFF operation, use the maintained contact.
EXECUTION EXECUTION
PROGRAM EXECUTION TEMPO-
i
ii
i
STOP
i
iI
i
i
=
=
STOP
I=
gi
STOP (_r"P}
Fig. 3,11
3.5.3 SINGLE-BLOCK OPERATION
In this mode, the program is executed one block at a time. When a single-block signal
(SBK) is turned on and a start signal (STR) is turned on, the machine executes one block of
the program and stops. When'another start signal is turned on, the next block is executed.
When a single-block signal is turned on, while the system is operating continuously,
the current block is executed, and the system stops. When the single-block signal is turned
off, and subsequently, a start signal is input, the operation will be executed in the
continuous mode.
ON
SINGLE-BLOCK
(SBK) [ I OFF
START (STR) A A
i = i
J i =
I ', 'i
ONE BLOCK NEXT BLOCK CONTINUOUS OPERATION FROM

EXECUTION EXECUTION ONE BLOCK AFTER THE NEXT
BLOCK
Fig. 3.12
3.5.4 MACHINE LOCK OPERATION
When a machine lock signal (MLK) is turned on, and then, a start signal (STR) is turned
on, the current position display starts to change as if the machine were executing the
program, but the machine remains at a standstill. However, the M-functions, the
S-functions and the T-functions are executed. This mode is used, for example, when
presetting the display manually, or for checking the program. Note that while the machine
lock signal is on, the return-to-reference motion is not executed.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn on the machine lock signal only while the system remains
motionless after completely executing a block.
31
3.5.5. AXIS OMISSION
Program check, etc., can be made by releasing a specific axis from motion control and
performing idle operation.
If start signal (STR) is turned on when axis omission signal (NEG) is on in the
memory operation mode (MEM), only the specified axis is not controlled and the machine
does not move. The current value display does not change either.
3.5.6 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP FUNCTION
When an optional block skip signal (SK1-SK8) is turned on or off, the blocks which contain
"/n" (n = 1 to 8) are selectively omitted in the execution of the program.
For example, when an SK2 signal is ON, all the commands in the block containing
"/2" are omitted until the block ends.
This function is ineffective on the block under execution or blocks stored in the
advance reading buffer. During memory operation, it becomes effective from the block to be
read after the signal.
3.5.7 MANUAL INTERRUPTION OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION
When a manual operation (JOG mode, STEP mode, RAPID mode, or HANDLE mode)
intervenes during a memory or a DNC operation, the distance covered by the manual
operation has the effect of shifting the motion path. Therefore, when the memory opeation
mode is restored after the manual interruption and the automatic operation process is
restarted by a start signal, the machine follows the shifted path. A machine coordinate
system does not depend upon absolute programming (G90) and incremental programming
(G91).
ACTUAL PATH
REMAINING / MEMORY
PORTION / OPERATION
- t COMMAND
\_Y''_'_ G00OR
MANUAL _</ / _ Go1
INTERVENTtON /f / _ _/
j/'_" CIRCULAR "
O,,,/ /I INTERPOLATION "

MODE _
CHANGE _.
Fig. 3.13
3.5.8 BLOCK PREREAD
In normal operation, one-block data is preread and data processing is

performed to prepare for the next operation. The maximum capacity of one-block data is 128
characters (containing EOB).
32
3.6 DNC OPERATION
The motion module with the communication function (JEFMC-C027) enables DNC
operation, that is, concurrent processing in which a part program can be executed while it
is being received by using an RS-422 port of the host computer such as a personal computer.
This function is useful for execution of a large part program exceeding the
Motionpack-ll0 memory capacity (maximum of 64k bytes). The DNC mode is used for
operation. Program execution is the same as in memory operation, but program repetition
instruction cannot be executed.
For transmission protocol and parameter settings, see parameters #1000, #1003,
and #1009.
3.7 UNRESTRICTED LENGTH POSITIONING
The maximum programmable dimension in Motionpack-ll0 basically is restricted to

+99999999 pulses. The unrestricted length positioning function is used to program a
dimension exceeding the maximum value.
For example, the function is used to control the machine which repeats positioning
in the same direction infinitely.
Normally, unrestricted length feed can be made in manual operation (JOG, RAPID,
STEP, or HANDLE), but requires that an incremental movement command (G91) from
the current position is programmed in the memory operation.
However, since the function is of endless operation, the following functions cannot be
used: (Do not set parameters, etc.)
• Pitch error compensation

• Soft limit check function (available for axis used with restricted length.)
• Absolute command (G90)
The current value is displayed in the increment mode on the CRT control station
screen. In other modes, the current value exceeding --+99999.999 is not displayed correctly.
3.8 POSITION CANCEL
Only the current value display universal position in the manual operation mode (JOG,
STEP, RAPID, or HANDLE) can be canceled and set to 0 regardless of the currently
displayed value. However, it does not affect other current value displays (increment
position, axis position).
The function is equivalent to shifting the coordinates to 0 by using G function

reference coordinate system setting G92. Position cancel can be made for each of the X, Y,
and Z axes. See Par. 7.2.3 for operation.
33
3.9 POSITION MEMORY
The current value display (only axis position) on previous turning OFF of the power can
be retained in the offset area even after the power is turned OFF. Normally, the position
memory should be executed at the machine stop. To effect this function, set the system
parameter #1003 D1 to "1."
When the position memory signal (PMEM) is turned ON, current display axis
positions X, Y and Z are retained in the offset numbers H87, H88 and H89, respectively.
POWER SUPPLY OFF I ON ] OFF
" MEMORY STATUS I MEMORY

T
POSITION MEMORY h
(PMEM)
Fig. 3.14
Memory Position Store Location (offset No.)

X H87
Axis Position Y H88
Z H89
3.10 MECHANICAL HANDLE
When the servo subsystem power is off and the machine is moved with the mechanical
handle, the current value position display follows it.
However, generally when the servo subsystem power is off, alarm (No.51 SERVO
POWER NOT SUPPLY) occurs, thus the function should be used by turning On the alarm
clear signal (ACR) to prevent the alarm from occurring.
SERVO READY
(SVOR) I
i
ALARM CLEAR _
(ACR)
Fig. 3.15
3.11 SPINDLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Simple spindle control can be performed by using axis module D/A output. Operation for
the spindle is performed by setting the axis module axis setup number to 4. See Par. 10.3.
For the feedrate command, the rotation speed of the spindle (rpm) is programmed
in a numeric value of five digits following code S.
34
Normal rotation, reverse rotation, and stop of the spindle are controlled by using
input signals and parameters. For details of S -function, programming, input, and
parameters, see Pars. 4.5, 9.2.2, 5.3 and 5.8, respectively.
NOTE
1. The function does not contain acceleration/deceleration. Use a spindle
drive with the acceleration/deceleration function as required.
• 2. The D/A output of the standard axis module (Type JEFMC-B011) is

adjusted to a maximum +--5 V. To use a spindle drive with 10V input,
prepare the axis module (Type JEFMC-BOllB) that the D/A output is
adjusted to +- 10V, and --+15 VDC external power supply.
3.11.1 NORMAL ROTATION, REVERSE ROTATION, AND STOP OF SPINDLE
Normal rotation, reverse rotation, and stop of the spindle are controlled by setting axis
module D/A output to the positive side ( + ) , negative side ( - ) , and 0V, respectively,
using the spindle normal rotation signal (FRN), spindle reverse rotation signal (RRN),
spindle stop signal (SSTP), and parameter #2004 in combination when the spindle rotation
speed is programmed with S. A standard Servopack is used for spindle without adjustment.
When the drive unit only for the spindle is used, normal rotation signals should be
always input to Motionpack. The noral rotation, reverse rotation, and stop command of the
spindle that M-BCD output of M-signal (M03, M04, M05 etc.) in programming are decoded
can be controlled by input directly to the spindle drive unit.
3.11.2 SPINDLE GEAR CHANGE
The speed command voltage can be changed in accordance with spindle gear change. Gear
change can be made at three stages (L, M, and H) by using gear ratio selection signals
GR1 and GR2. The maximum rotation speed of the spindle for each of L, M, and H is set by
using parameters #2150, #2151, and #2152.
The speed command voltage on each gear is as follows:
S 5-digit Programmed Value (rpm) × Axis Module

Speed Command Voltage= Each Gear Parameter Setup Value (rpm) Max D/A output
The axis module maximum D/A output is as follows:

• +-hV: axis module type JEFMC-B011 (standard)
• +-10V: axis module type JEFMC-B011B
35
3.12 MDI OPERATION
Programs which are input from CRT operator's panel are operated automatically without
storing in the memory of Motion module. This mode is available for Motionpack-ll0 with
CRT control station, on and after type JEFMC-H012.
3.12.1 PROGRAM INPUT IN MDI MODE
(1) Select MDI mode.
(2) Depress _ key on CRT control station. COMMAND display appears.
(3) Depress _ key.

(4) Input programs by using address and data keys. Max. 32 characters can be entered at
one time. The input data are displayed on the bottom line of the CRT, from left to right.
NOTE
The plural block cannot be specified.
(5) Depress _ key. The key-_n data are registered. The latest display goes out and
is displayed again above the line.
NOTE
If wrong data are input, begin again from (3) , _ key need not be
depressed.
3.12.2 OPERATION IN MDI MODE
(1) Input block data are executed at cycle start (STR) ON in MDI mode.
(2) When the data execution is completed, the block display will go out.
3.13 ADDRESS SEARCH FUNCTION
Search continues until data (character string) held in the memory which coincide with the
data (character string) entered through the NC operator's panel is found. The contents of
the part program memory can be searched in MEM or EDIT mode.
(1) Operation
O Select MEM or EDIT mode.
_)Depress _ function key.
(_)Depress [] key.
In memory mode, the pointer returns to the top of the program number in MEM
mode.
@ Enter the data (string of not more than 10 characters headed by address) to be
Searched.
@ Depress _ key. Search starts.
36
(2) End of search
(_) The pointer of the part program memory points to the top of the data found (pointed
by the cursor). In all cases, only search will be performed but neither BUF display
nor advance reading will be performed•
MEMORY POINTER
\ /
DATA
t
FOUND
@ "NOT FOUND!" appears on the CRT if the desired data is not found. This message
will disappear when a key ( [] normally)of the control station is depressed.
(3) Remarks
• Do not omit leading zeros of the search data. • The data itself which has been entered
through the keyboard will be compared with those in the part program memory.
When searching a program number, leading zeros may be omitted.
• Commands encountered during search will be disregarded even if they are modal
commands•
• On Cycle Start after search, the data of a block which the cursor points to will be read
• and executed.
3.14 PARAMETER/PROGRAM PROTECT FUNCTION
This function ignores write-in parameter from CRT control station and editing of machining
program.
When protect signal (PRT)is turned ON, _ , _-_ and [] keys are
ineffective in EDIT mode. _] key in parameter display is also ineffective and
writing can not be changed•
NOTE
[] and [_] keys on a personal computer are not affected.
37
3.15 ALARM CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION
This function signals an alarm occurance and the alarm No. to the external I/O device
during alarm. The alarm No. is converted to binary number and output to the ports
between #45070 and #45077. If there is no alarm, 0 is output. If two or more alarms are
detected, the first alarm is given priority.
(Example)
- Code
1. EXTERNAL ERROR 049
2. SERVO ALARM (Z) 062
Port #4707
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 DI DO
0 0 l 1 0 0 0 1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
NOTE
When using this function, change or add the I/O allocation because these
outputs are not included in standard I/O allocation.
38
CONTENTS
D 4. PROGRAMMING 40
4.1 INPUTFORMAT 40
4.1.1 Input Format List 40
4.1.2 Address Characters 41
4.1.3 Decimal Point Programming 42
4.1.4 Decimal Point Movement 42
4.1.5 Program Number 44
4.1.6 Sequence Number 44

4.1.7 Optional Block Skip 44
4.2 G FUNCTION 45
D 4.2.1
4.2.2 List of Codes(GO0)
Positioning 45 47
4.2.3 Error-Detect-Off Positioning (G06) 47
4.2.4 Linear Interpoiation (G01) 48
4.2.5 Circular Interpolation (G02, G03) 48
4.2.6 Dwell (G04) 51

4.2.7 Offset Value Input (G10) 57
4.2.8 Plane Designation (G17, G18, G19) 53
4.2.9 Automatic Return-to-Reference Point (G28) 53
4.2.10 Skip Function (G31) 54
4.2.11 Position Offset in Z:Axes (G43, G44, G49) 55

4.2.12 Position Offset in X- and Y-Axes (G45 to G48) 57
4.2.13 Return-to-Machine Coordinate System (G53) 61
4.2.14 Notch Signal Commands A (G68, G69) 62
4.2.15 Notch Signal Commands B (G66, G67) 63
4.2.16 Combined Operation Commands (G80 to G99) 65

4.2.17 Absolute/Incremental Command Designation (G90, G91) 74
4.2.18 Programming of Absolute Zero Point (G92) 75
4.3 EXTERNAL OFFSET COMMAND (INDIRECT SPECIFICATION) 76
4.4 SIGNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS 77

4.4.1 T-Function 77
4.4.2 M-Function 78
4.4.3 M-Codes for Stop (MOO, M02, M30) 79
4.4.4 M-Codes for Internal Processing (M90 to M99) 80
4.4.5 Subprogram (M98, M99) 80
4.5 S FUNCTION 8!
39
4. PROGRAMMING
The Motionpack-ll0 system uses the NC program language. An example of programming

machine motion is shown below:
N0001 G01 X10 . 0 Y20 . 0 F100 M 0 ;
Motion I
delimiter,
also called I
end of J
block
(EOB)
Auxili.ary
operahon .
accompanying I
[roach ne motionJ
I Motion speed I
,, ITrave'
distence
]
,' mode
Operation ]
Iooton
]sequence
Fig. 4.1
As shown above, a program is written with alphabetical codes A through Z and digits. At
the end of a block, CR (;) appears, and a program consists of several blocks.
4.1 INPUT FORMAT
4.1.1 INPUT FORMAT LIST
The numerals in the table indicate the maximum number of digits permitted for entry in the
input data.
X + 5.3
5 integer digits
Sign (+, -)
I I--I T 3Axis
decimal
cods 'digits
Normally, decimal points are not written. If decimal points are written, different
treatment is required. Refer to Par. 4.1.3 "DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING".
4O
Table 4.1 In)ut Format list
Item Format
ProgramNo. 04
Sequence No. N4
G-function G2
Axis Word a+5.3 (Note)
Feedrateper Minute F5
T-function T2
M-function M2
S-function $5
Offset No. H2 or D2
DwellCommand P5.3
Program No. Designation P4
Number of Repeats L8
Note: In the above table, "a" represents an axis code (X, Y, Z, I, J, K, R, or Q).
With the digit codes following alphabetical codes, the leading zeroes and + are
omitted. Minus signs (-) cannot be omitted.
(Example) X00123 _ X123

X+123 _ X123
K-123 _ K-123
With the CRT control station, the end of block (EOB) code is represented by ";".
With a personal computer, it is represented by CR (ASCII code).
4.1.2 ADDRESS CHARACTERS
Table 4.2 shows the address codes and their meanings.

Table 4.2 Address Characters
Character Meaning
D Offset No.
F Interpolation feedrate
G G-function
H Offset No.
I X-coordinate of arc center
J Y-coordinate of arc center
K Z-coordinate of arc center
L Number of repeats
M M-function
N Sequence No.
0 Program No.
P Dwell time, Program No. with sub-routine programming
Q Cut depth and shift value of combined operation command
R Radius designation of circular arc
S S-function
T T-function
X X-function
Y Y-coordinate
Z Z-coordinate
41
4.1.3 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
For coordinate (distance), time and feedrate, numerals including a decimal point can be
used.
(1) A decimal point can be used with the following address characters:
Coordinate: X, Y, Z, I, J, K, R, Q
Time: P
(Example) Where 0.001 ram/p,

X15. means X-axis 15.000 mm.
Y20.5 means Y-axis 20.500 mm.
G04P1. means dwell time 1.000s.
(2) When numerals without a decimal point are programmed.

"1" is regarded as "0.001" (for 0.001 mm/p).
(Example)
X15 means X-axis 0.015 mm.
4.1.4 DECIMAL POINT MOVEMENT
The decimal point position on the current value display can be moved by setting
parameter #1005 D2-D0.
When the number of decimal places is two

X15.: X15.00 mm
y20.5:Y20.50 mm
X45:X0.45 mm
Y01:Y0.01 mm
(1) The decimal point movement range is as follows:
(_) The number of decimal places is three in standard setting (0.001 mm/command pulse
in handling the minimum setup units).
(_) The number of decimal places is two in standard setting (0.01 ram/command pulse in
handling the minimum setup units).
(_) The number of decimal places is one in standard setting (0.1 mm/command pulse in
handling the minimum setup units).
(_) There is no decimal point in standard setting (1 mm/command pulse in handling the
minimumsetup units).
(2) The decimal point is moved simply to facilitate display and input method. The units in
the control subsystem functioning in Motionpack do not change. In the User's Manual,
the number of decimal places is also three in standard setting. As a rule, in this
manual, one command pulse = 0.001 mm.
42
I
(3) If decimal point specification in (T) is not made, conversion between the specified value
and actual machine travel distance is required. This affects the following programmed
values and parameters:
Speed (feedrate) :
• Interpolation feedrate F specification in program

• Parameter #1101: Maximum manual handle feedrate setting
• Parameter #1102: Maximum interpolation feedrate setting
• Parameters #1104-#1106: Jog feedrate setting
• Parameters #1500, #1700, #1900: Rapid feedrate setting
• Parameters #1504, #1704, #1904: Reference point return approach speed
• Parameters #1505, #1705, #1905: Reference point return creep speed
Acceleration/deceleration:
• Parameters #1475, #1675, #1975: Interpolation feedrate bias setting

• Parameters #1501, #1701, #1901: First stage linear acceleration/deceleration constant
• Parameters #1502, #1702, #1902: Second stage linear acceleration/deceleration constant
Positions:
• Parameters #1122-#1124: Step feed

• Parameter #1125: Reference point position area setting
• Parameters #1550, #1750, #1950: Soft limit boundary value in positive direction
• Parameters #1551, #1751, #1951: Soft limit boundary value in negative direction
(Example) When decimal point movement is used by setting one command pulse
(0.01 mm) two decimal places in movement, all of the programmed values and
parameter setup values described above are affected: each becomes 10 times
the standard setup unit of one command pulse (0.001 mm)( 0.01 mm
0.001 mm =10).
That is, if F12 is programmed in F setting, movement is made at the rate of
120 mm/min.
• If parameter #1102 (maximum interpolation feedrate) is set to 2400, movement is made at

the rate of 24000 mm/min.
• The maximum programmable value _+99999.999 becomes _+999999.99.
For example, X15. is displayed as X15.00 mm;
Y20.5 is displayed as Y20.50 mm; and
Z45 is displayed as Z 0.45 mm.
(4) If memory operation is performed by programming numeric values.having a decimal

point different from the specified one, alarm (No.16: PROG ERROR) occurs.
(Example) When #1005 = 2 (-two decimal places) is set,

The command block G00 X10.00 Y12.34; is executed normally.
The command block G00 X10.000 Y12.340; results in an alarm.
43
4.1.5 PROGRAM NUMBER
Program Nos. are prefixed to the programs to identify them.

(1) Up to 4 digits can be used as program Nos. written after the character O (00001-09999).
Up to 99 programs can be stored in the memory of a motion module in range of
memory capacity. Two-digit numbers between 001 and 099 can be designated by
external input signals.
(2) Program start with program Nos., and end in M02, M30 (or M99). M02 and M30
indicate the end of main programs. For the explanation of M02, M30 and M99, refer to
Par. 4.4.2 "M-FUNCTION"
4.1.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER
Address N followed by up to 4 digits can be programmed at the leading end of a block

N0001-N9999).
These digits are used to identify the blocks, but do not have any effect on the
internal control or program execution sequence. Therefore, the digits may be selected in
sequence, but they can just as well be any numbers, such as numbers out of sequence,
duplicate numbers, or no numbers at all. Using sequential numbers are normally most
convenient to identify the blocks.
4.1.7 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP
Those blocks in which "/n" (n = 1 to 8) is written are skipped from the "/n" to the end of
the block when the external optional block skip switch of that "n" number is ON. The "/n"
can be written also at some position in the middle of blocks.
(Example)
/2 N1234 G01 X100 /3 Y200;
When switch SK2 is ON, this block is totally ignored and when switch SK3 is ON, this block
is executed only as if it is N1234 G00 X100;
NOTE
1. The optional block skip function is processed when the instruction is
read from the memory to the buffer. When it is already read into the
buffer, subsequent switching on of the switch will not be effective to
skip the block.
2. If n in "/n" is omitted, it means "/1"
44
4.2 G FUNCTION
4.2.1 LIST OF G CODES
Table 4.3 List of G Codes
Function Code Group Command Word Description
Positioning G00 "q G00X...Y-.- Z ... ; Simultaneous rapid traverse along 3 axes to
arrive at position X, Y, or Z.
Linear Interpolation G01 G0tX...Y-..Z...F--- ; Simultaneous feed motion along3axes
resulting in linear motion to position X, Y,
or Z at feedrate F.
Circular G02 01 G02X...Y... I .-. J ... Resultant circular motion to position X, Y

Interpolation G03 F-.. ; (or ZX, YZ) with the center at IJ (or KI,
G02G18Z...X.--K... I JK), or with a radius of R, at a tangential
•-.F... ; feedrate of F.
G02G19Y... Z ... J ... G02: Clockwise
K.-. F .-. ; G03: Counterclockwise
G02X...Y...R... ;
Dwell Command G04 G04P... " Waiting until the time duration specified by P
elapses before starting to execute next block.
Error Detect C-06 G06X-..Y... Z ... ; After the allocation of motion pulses to X, Y,
Off Positioning * Z, the subsequent block execution is started
immediately without waiting for complete
positioning.
Offset Value Input G10 G10H-- Q.-. ; Direct input of offset value in program.
Plane O17 "_ Designation of the plane on which to execute
Designation G18 circular interpolation
G19 02 -- G17: X-Y plane
G18: Z-X plane
G19: Y-Z plane
Return-to-Reference G28 G28X...Y... Z ... ; Return-to-reference point after moving to X,
Point Y, Z. However, when the power is first
turned on, it returns to the reference point
immediately.
Skip G31 * G31X.-.Y...Z...F... ; When skip signal is turned on or off during
linear interpolation at feedrate F toward X,
Y, Z, resulting from simultaneous motion
along 3 axes, the motion decelerates and
stops. Then the next block is executed.
Z-axis Offset + G43 G43Z..-H.. ; Motion distance in Z direction is increased or
Z-axis Offset - G44 decreased by offset memory value designated
by H.
05 G43: Plus
G44: Minus
Z-axis Offset G49 "_ G49; Cancelling contents of memory of offset value
Command Cancel designated by H.
X-Y Axes Offset G45 G45X-.-Y...D.. ; Motion distances in X-Y directions are
Command + increased or decreased by offset memory
X-Y A;_es Offset G46 value designated by D.
Command -
X-Y Axes Offset 047 G47X,..Y...D-. ; Motion distances in X-Y directions are
Command Double+ *
increased or decreased.by twice the offset
X-Y Axes Offset G48 memory value designated by D.
Command Double-
Machine Coordinate G53 G53X.-.Y-.. Z ... ; Returning to reference point (X, Y, Z) of

System Setting machine coordinate system.
Note: Mark _ indicates that the power is turned on and the marked function is automatically selected.
45
4.2.1 LIST OF G CODES (Cont'd)
Table 4.3 List of G Codes(Cont'd)
Function Code Group Command Word Description
Notch Signal B G66 G66X-.-M.- ; Signal output at the previously programmed

Output Command G67 G67X-..M.. ; position during positioning.
Notch Signal A G68 G68XH.. YH.. ; Signal output at the previously programmed
Output Command position during positioning.
Notch Signal A Output G69 G69; Notch signal output is reset.
Reset Command
Combined Operation Ga0" G80; Combined operation command is canceled.

Command Cancel
Combi ned Operation G81 G81X... Y ..- Z .-. R ... L Drilling operation.
Command Drilling .-.F-.. ;
Combined OPeration G82 G82X... Y .-- Z -.-R-.-P Dwell on hole bottom in drilling operation.
Command:Spot Eacing ...L.-. F... ;
Combined Operation G83 G83X..-Y-.- Z ... R ... Q Cut depth and shift distance can be specified.
Command Deep Hole ... L-.- F-.- ;
Drilling G83X...Y-.. Z .-.R.-. I
09 ... J ...K-.. L..- F.-. ;
Combined Operation G84 G84X...Y... Z -.-R... P Tapping operation.

Command Tapping -..L.-. F.-. ;
Combined Operation C-85 G85X...Y.-. Z -.-R..-L Boring operation.
Command Boring ...F..- ;
Combined Operation G86 G86X...Y..- Z --.R-.. L Spindle stops at Z point in boring.
Command Boring ...F-.. ;
Combined Operation G89 G89X.-.Y.-. Z ..-R... P Dwell at Z point in boring.
Command Boring ... L ... F ..- ;
Combined Operation G98 TM Return to initial point level after combined
Command Initial operation ends.
Point Return
10
Combined Operation G99 Return to R point level after combined
Command R Point operation ends.
Return
Absolute Command G90 TM G90; Designating motion data to be absolute.

O3
Incremental Command G91 G91; Designating motion data to be incremental.
Programming of G92 G92X...Y... Z -.- ; Designating position of "absolute zero point."
Absolute Zero Point [
Note: Mark _ indicates that the power is turned on and the marked function is automatically selected.
(1) The G functions marked by * are non-modal and effective only for the block in which
they are programmed.
(2) The G functions in groups 01 through 10 and modal, remaining effective until another G
function in the same group is programmed next.
(3) The G functions in the * group cannot be programmed in the same block in which
another G function is programmed. Any such G function must be programmed in a
separate block.
46
4.2.2 POSITIONING (G00)
(1)[GO0 X..-Y-" Z'"; I

With this command, the tool is sent to the specified position, with the slides in the 3
axial directions moving simultaneously. A slide for which no command is programmed
remains motionless.
(2) The rapid traverse rates for the three (Program example)
axesare independently set. G00 X4000 Y4000 Z4000; J
(3) Motions in the three axes are independent YAXIS

of each other, and, therefore, the resultant 14000
requires particular attention.
too ath sno neces r strai t. i .

(4) G00 is a modal
01 group.
G code belonging to the
/4000
t-
Z AXIS
'4ooo
RAPID TRAVERSE RATES
X-AXIS:; 8m/rain
Y-AXIS 8m/rain
Z-AXIS: 4m/rnin
X AXIS
Fig. 4.2
4.2.3 ERROR-DETECT-OFF POSITIONING (G06)
[0o6x...Y...z...;]
With this command, the same positioning motions take place as with G00 commands, with
the following differences:
(1) A G00 command is executed in the error-detect-on mode. The execution of a block is
started only when the servo-delay pulses are confirmed to have been reduced to within a
permissible range after the allocation of the motion pulses. With this mode, the corners
of motion paths are sharp.
With the error-detect-off mode of G06, the program advances as soon as the motion
pulses have been allocated.
(2) With G06, the program advances to the next block as soon as the positioning by a block
in the * group has been completed. Therefore, the motion path is rounded at the
corners. . G00 POSITION IN a
PATH
(3) G06 is a non-modal G function in the * group, SmONING

effective only in the programmed block.
_"\_ Gp
_TPO
Fig. 4.3
47
4.2.4. LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01)
(1)IG01 X---Y... Z... F.-.; I

With this command, the three slides move simultaneously, resulting in a linear motion.
Where commands are missing for some axes, those axes remain motionless.
(Program example)
G01 X4000 Y4000 Z4000 F100;
Y AXIS
_'4000
11_ ram/rain
RESULTANT FEEDRATE
XAXIS
4
Z AXIS
Fig. 4.4
(2) With G01, the program advances to the next block in the error-detect-on mode as soon as
the pulse distribution of a block has been completed.
(3) The feedrate is specified by the F code. The resultant speed of the motions of the moving
slides become the command feedrate.
F = 400= _F_+Fy 2+Fz 2

(mm/min)
(Fx, Fy, Fz denote feedrates in X, Y, or Z direction.)
(4) If no F code is programmed in the block of G01 or in the preceding block, the alarm
state [No.19: PROG ERROR (F)] is turned on.
4.2.5 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03)
There are the following two types of commands for circular motion:
• By approached and central coordinate points of circular motion path.
• By approached coordinate point and radius of circular motion path.
(1) Command by Approached and Central Coordinate Points
With the following commands, the machine slide motions are controlled to give
resultant circular motion on the XY, ZX, or YZ plane at a tangential feedrate specified
by F.
XY plane
G17 G03G02X... Y... I... J... F-..;
48
ZX plane
G18 G03G02
Z... X... K... I-.. F.-.;
YZ •plane
G19 G02 Y.-. Z-.. J... K... F.-.; 1
G03
The rotating direction of the resultant motion is specified as follows:

G02: Clockwise
G03: Counterclockwise
'AXIS X AXIS AXIS
\oo
: X AXIS _" Z AXIS _ Y AXIS
XY PLANE ZXPLANE YZ PLANE
(G17) (G18) (G19)
Fig. 4.5
When programming circular interpolations (G02, G03), make a preliminary

specification of the plane for interpolation with G17, G18, or G19, beforehand.
G17: XY plane.
G18: ZX plane
G19: YZ plane
Immediately after turning on the power, the XY plane (G17) is automatically

selected, if not otherwise programmed.
(Program examples)
G17 G90 G03 X1500 Y4000 1-3000 d-1000 F150; G17 G91 G03 X-4000 Y2000 1-3000 J-1000 F150;
Y AXIS Y AXIS
t -4000•
NDPOINT ENDPOINT
,ooo oOOooo
I I _ X AXIS _ _ -- X AXIS
1500 5500 1500 5500
Fig. 4.6 Absolute Programming (G90) Fig. 4.7 Incremental Programming (Ggl)
NOTE
Central coordinate point must be designated by viewing from start point
regardless of G90and G91. 49
4.2.5 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) (Cont'd)
(2) Radius Designation
In programming circular interpolation, the radius of the circular motion path may be
programmed by R, instead of designating the coordinate of the center by I, J or K. This
is called "radius R designation in circular interpolation command".
Note that
When R>0, the segment angle is less than 180 °.
When R<0, the segment angle is greater than 180 °.
NOTE
If the coordinate value of the end point of a circular interpolation motion is
not on the correct circular path due to errors in calculation, etc., corrections
are made as shown in Fig. 4.9.
When the end point is programmed in the hatched areas, alarmstate [No.21: PROG
ERROR (G02/G03) ] occurs.
One complete circle cannot be programmed, so when progamming a complete circle,

it must be divided into two commmands.
G17 GO2X...... Y...... R-- ...... F...... ; The "O" marks represent end commands.
Fig.4.8 Fig.4.9
(3) Complete Circle Designation
A completely closed circle can be programmed in one block.
(Program example) Y AXIS
G00 X0 Y0 ;
G02 X0 Y0 I1000 J0 F100 ;
I m X AXIS
2000
50
Fig. 4.10
4.2.6 DWELL (G04)
(1)[G04 P...; ]
With this command, the execution time of the next block is delayed as long as the time
specified by P.
" EXECUTED -- --- NEXTBLOCKEXECUTED
[ PREVOOSBLOCK
l TIMER
I ]
Fig. 4.11
(2) A dwell command is programmed as an independent block.
(3) The time of halt can be specified within the following range by P.
Format I Dwell Designation Range
P5.3 J 0.001 to 99999.999 s

Note: The values .a2:e not affected by metric or inch I/O units.
(Program example)
G04 P2500;
or Dwell time: 2.5 seconds
)
G04 P2.5;
4.2.7 OFFSET VALUE INPUT (G10)
Offset value data can be directly written in the program.
(1) Offset Value Absolute Command
The command block

IG10H.. Q:...; ]
causes the offset value data specified in Q .... to be written _nto the offset number
specified in H... The previously entered offset value data is updated.
Program example: GI0 H20 Q1.23;
G10 H21 Q-456;
This sets 1.23 in offset number H20 and -456 in offset number H21.
51
4.2.7 • OFFSET VALUE INPUT (G10) (Cont'd)
(2) External Input Signal Write Command
Offset value data are read from outside of Motion module by using the input from tt-PC
or the machine I/O input pin.
The command block
I G10 H"" U'"; I
causes offset value data (BCD signal) input from the input signal number specified in
U... (U4011-U4014) to be written into the offset number specified in H.... The previously
entered offset value data is updated.
However, this function cannot be executed if standard I/O allocations are made
_. because the designated area to the input signal numbers is #4011 to #4014. I/O real-
locations are required. The number of offset value data digits to be written can be set in
the range of two to eight by using parameter #1005 D7-D4.
# 1005 [_[_D6 I D5 D4 D3_ --D2

- D1
-- I DO
I Two-digit designation (1 byte or 8 bits)
Four-digit designation (2 bytes or 16 bits) .
Six-digit designation (3 bytes or 24 bits)
Eight-digit designation (4 bytes or 32 bits)
NOTE
1. Only numeric values with no decimal point can be designated.
2. To designate the sign (_ input, input simultaneously the external

offset data sign (_ data signal (EINV) and external offset data.
The sign (_) input is not needed. External offset data sign (_) signal is
required for the I/O allocation of I/O signal #40074.
Program example:
• When parameter #1005 contains
D7=0, D6=l, D5=0, D4=0
six digits (3 bytes or 24 bits) are specified for the number of data digits.
• When the input signal state is
the command block
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO
# 4011 7 8 # 4011 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
# 4012 5 6 # 4012 0 1 0 1 0 .1 1 0
or
# 4013 3 4 # 4013 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
# 4014 1 2 # 4014 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
(BCD Indication) (Bit Indication)
G10 H20 U4011;

sets 345678 in offset number H20.
52
4.2.8 PLANE DESIGNATION (G17, G18, G19) "
executing interpolation are designated by G17,

D (1) The planes for circular G18or G19.
G17: XY plane
G18: ZX plane
G19: YZ plane
(2) Motion commands for any single slide can be programi-ned without regard to the plane
designat'zon by G17, G18, G19.
For example, when "G17 Z...;" is programmed, the slide along the Z axis moves.
(3) Immediately after turning on the power, G17 (XY plane) is automatically turned on.
4.2.9 AUTOMATIC RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT (G28)
D (1)lG28 X..-Y-.. Z...; I

With this command, first, the machine is moved to X, Y, Z by quick feed (G00), and
then, to the reference point. However, immediately after the power is turned On, the
machine moves directly to the reference point without first moving to X, Y, Z.
(a) The machine moves along the three axes simultaneously, but any axis, not commanded,
does not move.
D (Program example)
G28 X20. Y10.;
Y AXIS
START POINT
O_ J POSITION|NG
X AXIS LS POSITION
__" / REFUGE POINT ""
_, _ (x.Y)
__
REFERENCE .f_ RETURN-TO-REFERENCE
POINT
_. / '] POINT ="--- X AXIS
Fig. 4.12
(2) High Speed Reference Point Return Specifications
(a) High speed reference point return specifications can be made in place of the automatic
reference point return described above by setting parameter #1001 D2.
(b) The high speed reference point return differs from the automatic reference point return
in that axis movement is always positioned in rapid positioning (GO0). Thus, axis
movement is not decelerated to approach or creep speed around the reference point,
enabling a return to the reference point in a short period of time.
53
4.2.9 AUTOMATIC RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT (G28) (Cont'd)
(c) However, the high speed reference point return is enabled after a manual return to the
reference point is made after power on or after completion of normal reference point
return Operation for all axes by using the G28 command. If G28 command is given
abruptly with the high speed reference point return specifications after power on,
• automatic reference ponlt return operation is performed only at the first time.
(d) When high speed reference point return specifications are made, a return can be made
to the reference point even if the starting position is beyond the area where reference
point return is enabled.
4.2.10 SKIP FUNCTION (G31)
(1)IG31 X---Y--. Z---F--.; I

With this command, a special linear interpolation is executed as follows:
When a skip signal (SKIP) is turned ON/OFF during this interpolation, the machine
decelerates and stops, the remaining motion is neglected and omitted, and the program
advances to •the next block. In other command except for G31, ON/OFF operation of
the skip signal is ignored.
!10m,_! .STARTED MACHINE

SKIP [_fDECELERATION AND STOP
STARTED MACHINE
DECELERATION AND STOP
SKIP
(2) G31 is a non-modal function and effective for block commanded.

(Program example)
N100 G90 G31 X100.0 Y50.0 F300;
N200 G01 X80.0 Y15.0;
SKIP SIGNAL
RECEIVED HERE.
_-_ : ACTUAL MOTION

Y
.... _ : MOTION WITHOUT SKIP SIGNAL
(50,20}
(80,15)
-- x
Fig. 4.13
54
(Operation example)
N001 G90 G31 Z-100. F100;
Z=0 • LS
N002G01 Zl00. F1000; _0G,_
When the skip signal is input (LS is ON/ D
OFF) during
machine execution
decelerates and ofstops.
N001, Then
the the _ -z: ,'
program advances to the next block N002.
If no skip signal is ON/OFF during the execution of a G31 block, the machine stops
at the end of the block, and an alarm (No.28: PROG ERROR G31) occurs.
(3) When parameter #1003 DO is set, after the execution of a G31 block without turing
ON/OFF a skip signal, the program is advanced automatically to the next block with
no alarm.
4.2.11 POSITION OFFSET IN Z-AXIS (643,644, 649)
This command is for adding or subtracting the contents of the offset memory to or from the
Z-axis command value for correcting the Z position. See Par. 7.4 "DISPLAYING AND
WRITING OFFSET DATA"
(1) G codes for Z Offset Functions and Offset Direction
The actual offset direction is determined by the offset value sign specified with the H
code and the G code. Generally, offset value should be processed as plus value for the
sake of clear understanding.
Tabel 4.4
Offset Value Sign

G Code Meaning
(+) (-)
G43 (+) direction (+) direction (-) direction
G44 (-) direction (-) direction (+) direction
G49 Cancelling -- --
(2) Once G43 or G44 is commanded, it remains effective until cancelled by G49. They are
modal.
(3) G49 command cancels Z offset commands.
(4) H00 command also cancels Z-axis offset commands. (H00 is a unrewritable value,
because its content is fixed to 0.)
55
4.2.11 POSITION OFFSET IN Z-AXIS (G43, G44, G49) (Cont'd)
(5) Z-axis offset commands are programmed as follows:
(a) (G01)
IG43 (G44) Z... H...; [
With this command, the offset memory content designated by H is added (or subtract-
ed) to or from the Z command position, and the movement is made to the corrected
position.
G43(G44)
(b)[(G01) Z...; H...;
With this command, the offset value designated by H only is covered by the Z motion.
(c) [G43(G44)
i
Z-.. H...;
[H...;
With this command, the H motion covers the difference between the offset prior to
command (2) and the new offset.
(6) When programming G43, G44, G49, the 01 group G code must be G00 or G01. When G02
or G03 is programmed, the alarm state occurs.
NOTE
If a G92 command involving Z-axis is commanded, while a Z-axis offset is
under execution, the offset is cancelled. In principle, specify G92 with an
offset cancelled state.
(Program example)
H10 OFFSET VALUE-3.0 P_OGRAMMEOI I

Hll OFFSET VALUE 4.0 POSITION--
ACTUAL
TOOL POSITION k, _ _ / _" _ -- 20.000

CRT DISPLAY WITH 23.000
(Z-AXIS ONLY)
z .000
N101 G92 Z0; OFFSET ADDED

0.000 _o ,.. -_.ooo
N102 G90 G00 X1.0 Y2.0; 0.000
N103G43Z-20. H10; -23.000 I [
N104 G01 Z-30. F1000; -33.000 P_OGRAMME0
POSITION --
N105 G00 Z0 H00; 0.000 ACTUAL

. TOOL POSITION . ." --30.000
""" --34.000
N202 G44 Z-30. Hll; -34.000

N203 G01 Z-40. F1000; -44.000 /
N201
N204G00 X-2.0 Y-2.0; __777-/'2_- - _0
.000
G00Z0H00; 0.000
"_ / . -- 44.000
Fig. 4.14
56
4.2.12 POSITION OFFSET IN'X- AND'Y-AXES (G45TO G48)
) ]G01 G45 X-" Y--" D--. F...; I
X, Y position offset is for extending or reducing the programmed moving distances by the
values in the offset memory, and is mainly used to compensate for tool radius in machining
rectangular workpieces.
(1) G Codes for X, Y Position Offset
Extension or reduction is determined by the sign of the offset value designated by the D
code and the G codes.
Generally, offset values should be processed as plus values for the sake of clear
understanding.
Table 4.5
Sign of Offset Value

G Code Group Meaning
(+) (-)
G45 * Extension Extension Reduction
G46 * Reduction Reduction Extension
G47 . * Double extension Double extension Double reduction
G48 * Double reduction Double reduction Double extension
(2) G45 to G48 extend or reduce the motions along the axis designated by these blocks. The
extension or reduction is effective only in the block in which G45 to G48 are programm-
ed, and the motions in other blocks are unaffected. Therefore, to restore the originally
programmed values, the opposite offset must be programmed.
(3) To clarify the above operation, programming these commands in the incremental mode
(Ggl) is helpful. In the absolute mode (G90), adding or reducing offset values may be
unwieldy.
(4) When programming G45 to G48, specify the offset memory No. by D. However, Since D
is modal, when the same D value is used before, it need not be programmed.
(Program example)
®
r I
G91 ; I E
I
(_]G00 G46 X.,.._.Y.-.D01; .............. REDUCTION @)l r
(_)G01 G47 Y ...... (D0!)F; ............... •DOUBLE EXTENSION II I®
I
(_) G47 X ...... (IX)l); ................. DOUBLE EXTENSION I ,
(_) G47 Y ...... (D01);' ................. DOUBLE EXTENSION _ I
(_) G47 X, ..... (D01); ................. DOUBLE EXTENSION v j
(_00 G46 X ...... Y-..(D01); ............ RE.DUCTION ®
PF_OGRAMMING
Fig. 4.15
57
4.2.12. POSITION OFFSET IN X- AND Y-AXES (G45 TO G48) (Cont'd)
(5) Length for Extension or Reduction
(a) One or two times the programmed offset length is added or subtracted, selectively.
See Fig. 4.16.
(b) When the motion has been extended or shortened by offsetting in the preceding block,
the starting point for the present block is offset. The overall move distance, however,
is the same as in the above case. See Fig. 4.17.
G91 G00 G47 X6000 D10; D10=2000 With the same command as above (a).
6000(COMMAND) (DOUBLE EXTENSION) 6000 (COMMAND) (DOUBLE EXTENSION)
START ENDPOINT
START POINT END POINT
4000 I_? 4000
(AXIS MOTION) OFFSET BY PREVIOUS BLOCK (AXIS MOTION)
Fig. 4.16 Fog. 4.17
NOTE
When the offset is larger than the motion G46 X1000 D10; D10=2000
• distance programmed in a block, the
1000 (COMMAND)
offset may result in reverse motion. _: 2_o -_

END POINT START POINT
{AXIS MOTION)
Fig. 4.18
(6) Application to Circular Interpolation
When I, J, K, R are programmed in the same block with G45 to G48, extension or
reduction is made respectively in the same direction as X, Y, Z. Therefore, radius
compensation is possible with 1/4 circle, or 3/4 circle only.
G91;
ACTUAL PATH
G45 G02 X5000 Y5000 I5000 D10; _,,,'"- I

D10 = 2000 PROGRAMMED PATH 11 _ .=-J_
_=__r -_... "Y EXTENSlO N : 2000
1/ _l 1 _X EXTENSION : 2000
START 5000 (I) "_L,. v

5000(X) =
X POINT _ I EXTENSION: 2000
Fig. 4.19
58
In practice, if an offset is applied in
the preceding block as given below, the /
k--
G91radius
correctlY.G01
of F an arc can be offset ACTUAL
<_PATH/_ =
G46 X ...... ...... ; DI0;

Y ...... /, // / --{x. YI
G45 Y ......;
] G45G02X...... Y...... I...... ; I CENTER
GO1 X ...... ;
_ ' =
N0 T E - --/"_"r"_T_J_Y
' " PROGRAMMED
PATH
To program a 1/2 circle, combine two //_
1/4 circle commands.
START POINT
Fig. 4.20
(7) When programming G45 to G48, only 01 group G codes (GO0, G0I, G02, G03) can be
programmed. G-code programming other G01 group causes the alarm state.
(8) In the incremental designation mode (G91), since only the motion for the offset is
required, program "0" for movement.
G91 G01 G45 X0 Y0 D10F ...;

The machine moves through the offset distance corresponding to D10 in both the X-
and Y-axes directions.
G91 G00 G46 X0 Dll;

The machine moves only in the X direction through the offset of Dll in the minus
direction.
Giving a sign to "0" is meaningless.
NOTE
1. When G45 to G48 are programmed to effect simultaneous motions on
two axes, the extension or redUction is effective along both axes. If this
is applied to a cutting tool, an overcut or undersize cut will result. This
requires careful attension. See Fig. 4.21.
2. This X, Y position offset can be programmed in addition to the Z-axis

position offset.
3. When G92 isprogrammed in the offset mode, the coordinate system

setting process is executed after the cancellation of the offset in the
designated axis. In principle, specify G92 after restoring the offset
position by programming a reverse offset.
4. Execute a return-to-reference point command after cancelling this

command.
59
4.2.12 POSITION OFFSET IN X- AND Y-AXES (G45 TO G48) (Cont'd)
OVE UNDERSIZECUT_1_ _"_
RCUT
//_ t titG45
G45 __G45_///'/
(a) (b)
Fig. 4.21
(Program example)
. = 30 30 , . 50 I 70
' I,©:1__1
_......................... _o_: Xo.
"k_POINT I J
T 4o ! 14o / +x
OG91 G01 Z-25. F150; _) G47 X70.;
_) G46 X40. Y40. D10 F300; (_ G47 Y-60.;
® G45 Y70.; _ G47 X0;
QG45 G02 X30. Y30. I30.; (_G46 G03 X-40. Y-40. J-40.;
QG45 G01 X30.; (_G46 G01 Y0;
(_) Y-50.; (_ G47 X-140.;
O G48 X50; @ G46 X-40. Y-40.;
® Y50.; _ Z25.;
60 Fig. 4.22
4.2.13 RETURN-TO-MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G53)
With Motionpack-ll0, there are two types of coordinate systems: machine coordinate system
(intrinsic coordinate system of the machine, tothe zero point of which automatic return is
easily made in accordance with Par. 3.2 "MANUAL RETURN-TO-REFERENCE
POINT"), and the absolute coordinate system (to be established by G92).
Command G53 is' programmed, as given below, to move the machine from the
current position designated in the absolute coordinate system temporarily to position X, Y,
or Z expressed in the machine coordinate system in that block only.
I (G90) G53 X..- Y... Z..-; I
NOTE
1. Program G53 only with O00 or G01 belonging to the 01 group.
2. When G53 command is given while a position offset is on, the offset is
temporarily cancelled. Generally, cancel any offset before giving a G53
command.
3. If the machine lock function is ON when a G53 command is given, the

command values that are only displayed while the machine lock
function is OFF are also displayed to the end. If the machine lock
function is switched on and off during a G53 block, correct positioning
cannot be obtained.
However, if the entire G53 block is executed in the machine lock OFF
state, correct positioning is possible even when a machine lock operation
intervenes prior to the execution.
4. Execute a G53 command by designating G90. Even if the G91 designation

is left unchanged, the values are treated as G90 values.
(Program example)
G90 G53 G00 X100. Y300. ; Y
.... .+ tl_
"" _'
% ABSOLUTE COORDINATE
REFERENCE POINT
h I x
_ MACHINE COORDINATE
ZERO POINT
Fig. 4.23
.61
4.2.14 NOTCH SIGNAL COMMANDSA (G68, G69)
The notch signal can be turned ON and output at the previously programmed position by the
time the positioning point is reached after positioning starts.
Whether or not the notch signal is used is specified by using parameter #1003 D4.
POSITIONING POSITIONING STORAGE

START POINT COMPLETION POINT LOCATION OF &X
DURING MOVEMENT
MOVEMENT t (e.g. G01 X...;)
= T H91
Hg0
OPERATION t
t
NOTCH SIGANL I OFF ON OFF H92

OOUTPUT 1 (Tli) I
_r H93
_ _ OFFSET _vv,_
NOTCH
SIGANL I AMOUNT H94
OOUTPUT
8 (T24)
_X8 H95
NOTCH SIGNAL NOTCH SIGNAL H96

COMMAND RESET
G68 G69 H97
Fig. 4.24 Notch Signal
(1) Command Method
The notch signal is commanded in G68 prior to a positioning command block; it is

output at the position where the offset value data indicated by offset value number H.. is
passed through from the positioning start point.
(_, The outpqt #ignal is reset by using the G69 command.

r'rogram example)
[ G68 XH-.YH--; ] ] ...Notch signal output command Block
: YH94;
G68 XH90 1 (When thebyX-axis
indicated H90, passes throughon;thewhen
Tll is turned position
the Y-axis
passes through the position indicated by H94, T22 is
turned on.)
G01 X100. Y200. F50; -..Positioning command Block
•-.Notch signal output reset command Block
(2) Output and Number of Output Points
T-BCD code output signal is used. Combinations of the offset value number H.. and
output signal are fixed as listed in Table 4.6. A maximum of eight pairs are available.
Table 4.6
Offset Number Output Signal Name

H90 Tll
H91 T12
H92 T14
H93 T18
H94 T21
H95 T22
H96 T24
H97 T28
62
(3) Offset Value Data Write-in
(a) Offset value data write-in from the CRT control station is the same as normal offset
value write-in. See Par. 7.4.
• (b) When offset value data is written in the program, offset value write-in command G10 is
used.
G10 H... Q...;
Where the offset value number is specified in H and offset value data is specified in Q.
(4) Notes on Use of the Command

(a) The output signals vary a maximum of 0.6 sec. Note that the command cannot be used
for applications requiring high precision.
(b) If the notch signal is used, the T function cannot be used.
4.2.15 NOTCH SIGNAL COMMANDS B (G66, G67)
The notch signal can be turned ON and output at the previously programmed position by the
time the positioning point is reached after positioning starts, the same as for notch signal
commands A.
Whether or not the notch signal is used is specified by using parameter #1003 D4.
Notch Signals A and B cannot be used at the same time. The usable output points
are one pont for high speed (G66) and one point for low speed (G67).
(1) Command Method
[G66 X... MS D; or G67 Y... M85; ]
The notch signal is commanded in G66 (high speed) or G67 (low-speed) prior to
positioning command block; it is output at the position where the setting value of X- Y- or Z-
axis occurs. Output signal designation is commanded at output command code M81 to M88.
To reset the output signal, turn on the MST completion signal (FIN). The mode
selection, reset operation and alarm occurrence are also reset.
63
4.2.15 NOTCH SIGNAL COMMANDS B (G66, G67).(Cont'd)
(Program example)
G00 X0. ;
Notch signal output designation block
G66
G67 X20.
X50. M81
M85 ;; (Turn
_Turn on on Tll
T22 at
at X20.
X50. passing.
passing. )
G00 X100 ; "" Positioning command block
0 20 50 100 150
t i ! , . I . i i l i i | i i i
i i
TCODE READING (TF) i !

, I I
I I i
I I t
I f o
NOTCH SIGNAL (T28) I l , /
OUTPUT I I }
I I
NOTCH SIGNAL
OUTPUT
(T22) '
i
I
iI
II
,
NOTCH SIGNAL
OUTPUT
(Tll) ____1 ' I
I
I
!r
I
MSTCOMPLETION (FIN)
,I
I
,i
I
I
_ I
I I ,
A • A
G66 G67 RESET
COMMAND COMMAND
Fig. 4.25
(2) Output Signal and Output Designation Code
T-BCD code output signal is used. Output designation code and output signal name are
fixed, as listed in Table 4.7. Both high and low speeds can be used at any given point.
Table 4.7
Output Designation Code Output Signal Name

M81 Tll
M82 T12
M83 T14
M84 T18
M85 T21
M86 T22
M87 T24
M88 T28
64
(3) Notes on Use of the Command
(a) If the notch signal is used, the T function or M81 to M88 in the M function cannot be
used.
(b) Only for G66 and G67, M-BCD code output signalsby the M code commanded in the
same block are not output.
(c) Output signal T28 is turned ON automatically if the two-point notch signals
(G66 and G67) are used simultaneously during one movement. For using two-point
notch singls, output designation code M88 cannot be commanded.
(d) If the G66 and G67 are commanded two times or more during one movement, the latest
commanded block is effected.
4.2.16 COMBINED OPERATION COMMANDS (G80 to G99)
A specific motion extending over blocks is simplified by using the combined operation
command in a block. Eight types of combined operation commands are available. G80 is
used to cancel these commands. Initial point level return and R point level return can be
specified in G98 and G99. Setting data a used with G83 is set by using parameter #1202.
(1) List of Combined Operaion Commands
Table 4.8 lists the combined operation command G codes and operations.
Table 4.8
G Code Plunging At hole bottom Retraction Application

G80 -- -- Cancel
G81 Cutting feed -- Rapid traverse Drilling

G82 Cutting feed Dwell Rapid traverse Spot facing
G83 Wood pecker feed -- Rapid traverse Deep hole drilling
Reverse running of Forward running of
G84 Cutting feed spindle after spindle after Tapping
dwell cutting feed
G85 Cutting feed -- Cutting feed Boring
G86 Cutting feed Spindle stop Rapid traverse --*

spindle start Boring
G89 Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring
65
4216 COMBINED OPERATION COMMANDS (G80 to G99) (Cont'd)
(2) Command Format
G Code of Combined Operation Command

C-... X-t-... y-F... Z-l-... R... p... Q... g... F... ;
TT
Cutting Feedrate
Number of Repeats
Drilling Pitch for G83
Dwell at Hole Bottom
Point R Coordinate Command
Point Z Coordinate Command
Drilling Position X, Y Coordinate Command
Operations (i) through (_) are executed in one "_:_-_--_ . INITIAL POSITION
cycle with the commands shown above. POINT
START _ )I ! @
O Positioning the drilling position (X, Y) ---4) II POSITION R

O Rapid traverse to R point I
® Drilling to Z point ® I
@ Return to R point or to initial point r I
__ ) , POSITION Z
Note: .... : Rapid traverse (HOLEBOTTOM
--:Interpolation traverse Fig. 4.26
Number of repeats is specified by the symbol L. Where L is not given, number of repeats ts
regarded as "1." If 0 is given for L, only positioning to (X, Y) is made. Z axis returing
position at the end of combined operation can be designated by the following G code.
G Code Meaning
G98 Initial level return
G99 Position R level return
If there are many drilling points in a short distance, R point level return can be used
to perform drilling in a short period of time as compared with initial point level return.
66
(3) List of Combined Operation Commands
Table 4.9 List of Combined Operation Commands
With G99 (Return to R Point) With G98 (Return to Initial Point)

GS0
Cancel GS0;
G81 GSl X ... Y .-. Z ... R ... L ... F ... ;
(x, Y) (x, Y) INITIAL
----? -"?--_- PO,NT

I
Drilling I
I
_-----_ R POINT ) I R POINT
I I
I I
I I
I 1
, L Z POINT ) 1 Z POINT
G82 OS2X ...Y...Z...R...P... L...F.-. :
} (X, Y) ___ (X, Y) INITIAL

--'-_ ----__ POINT
1
P I
Spot Facing )-----I_R POINT I R POINT
I
I I
I I
I I
I
I I
_k_ ' Z POINT _ Z POINT

DWELL(P) DWELL(P)
G83 G83 X ... Y ... Z ... R ... Q ... L ... F ... ;

(Fixed Pitch)
C_
-_- Ix,_, D__ Ix,
Y, ,N,T,AL
-----_
I =_
J I PO,NT
I • I
- I 1 I R I I
Deep Hole _ } I I I PO,NT R PO,NT
Drilling Q, a I ' I , I I a
]I' i,,
,
' !I "'''"' I
6: Setting data (# 1202) -4-----Z POINT 6: Setting data (# 1202) .-'------ Z POINT
67
4.2.16 COMBINED OPERATION COMMANDS (G80 to G99) (Cont'd)
Table 4.9 Combined Operation Commands (Cont'd)
With R With
G99 (Return to Point) G98 (Return to Initial Point)
G83 G83 X -.. Y ... Z ... R ... I ... J ... K ... L ..- F ... ;
Pitch)
(×.Y) (x,Y)
(Variable O INITIAL
l_.------_j) I: Initial value ----'_ POINT
I j: Reducing value I
I I
Deep
Drilling
I
,-I ,',,,,
T
2
!
, "=' 1", ,''''
K: Finelvalue
I I
I
I
II -#
-e
x-2j
I! _
I I
I
1 4
I
___ -
e
K
d: Setting data (#1202) Z POINT 6: Setting data (#1202) _ Z POINT
G84 G84 X ... Y...Z... R... P... L... F...;
_ Y) I__ (X, Y) INITIAL

SPINDLE -- _---? POINT
ORWARD /FORWARD
.SPINDLE
--" R POINT
Tapping. R POINT
\ M03 ) \ M03/
, Z POINT Z POINT
s_,.o._._v_s_
(_°.
/ _.,.o_v_._ .
G85 G85 X...Y...Z...R...L...F...;
© _. ----
__ ,._, _t.. -- "_-: _
I
POINT
I
I
R POINT ---_R POINT
Boring ' 1 Z POINT IZ POINT
68
Table 4.9 Combined Operation Commands (Cont'd)
to Initial
With G99(Return to R Point) With G98 (Return Point)
G86 G86 X ... Y ... Z ... R .-. L ... F ... ;

SPINDLE
_] (x,Y) [_ (x,,Y) _INITIALSTART
--'_ SPINDLE
-=? _
I
PO,NT
J START I
R POINT
Boring ) , [r R POINT
(M03) (M03)
i I
i I
I I
i I
I Z POINT _ I Z POINT
/ /
SPINDLE STOP (M05) SPINDLE STOP (M05)
G89 G89 X ... Y ... Z .-. R ... P ... L ... F... ;
__NTL
PONT
I
f
Boring R POINT _ R POINT
TZ POINT
.1 Z POINT
DWELL
(P)
/ DWELL
/
(P)
(Program example)
@ G98 G90 G81 X... Y... Z-7000 R-4000 F... ;

•-. Return to initial point, absolute
(_ G99 G91 G81 X-.. Y... Z-7000 R-4000 F.-. ;
•-- Rturn to point R, incremental
_-?, o-,.j,_._L ---7----

o__ I -4o
I
: --_ R POINT
-40 R POINT I '
IIIT'_ , '
I
i -70
-70 . Z POINT I
, Z POINT
-Z
Fig. 4.27 69
© N1 G92X0 Y0 Z0 ; Absolute
Position
N2 G98 G90 G81 X1000 Y1000 z = R =
Remarks
I
Combined operation
Z-5000 R-2000 F100; _ -5000 -2000 command
N3 G91 X2000 R-3000 ; _ -5000 -3000 Change in X, R
N4 Z_5000; _ -8000 -3000 Change in Z
N5 G99 Z-4000 R-5000 ; _ -9000 -5000 Change in R, Z

Combined operation
N6 G80 G00 Zh000 ; _- Tool moves to Z = 0 command cancel
Newly programmed addresses only are changed including the case where switching is made
from Gg0 to G91 such as N2-* N3 indicated in the above case. As for the non-programmed
addresses, the positions programmed in the earlier blocks are maintained.
NOTE I
Since symbols P, Q, I, J and K are modal in combined operation command
mode, if once commanded, they are effective until the combined operation
command is cancelled.
(4) Cautions of Combined Operation Command
(a) Variable pitch command (G83)

In the deep hole drilling cycles of G83, variable drilling pitch can be programmed with q
symbols I, J, K instead of symbol Q for programming a constant drilling pitch.
I: Initial value
J: Reducing value in 2nd and subsequent plunges l Command is given without

K: Final value J signs.
Hi-l l, , , , R POINT
I I Ii, ii f i ,,ll
fill I' I
I-2,
I-,_
__ ,!!!ill '__
l',l;!i!
I-(n-1 I r;I,l_ _
I II
K': Final plunge to point Z

K'<K
Fig. 4.28
The value of 6 is given by setting (#1202). I
70
NOTE
1. Q, I, J, If are modal during combined operation command modes and
are effective until the combined operation command is cancelled. Specify
them without signs.
2. Variable pitch can also be programmed by symbol Q instead of I.

Furthermore, when instructions Q, I, J, K are given simultaneously,
drilling cycle is executed with variable drilling pitch with Q as
the initial value.
Q0 must be commanded in the block including modal G code before
programming variable pitch with I, J, and K.
(Program Example)
G91 G83 X... Y... T-30. Z-5500 I1000 J100 K400 F...;
Drilling pitch
1st plunge .-- 10 mm <= I1000
2nd plunge .-- 9 mm
3rd plunge ..- 8 mm
4th plunge ... 7 mm
5th plunge ... 6 mm
6th plunge ... 5 mm ¢= K400
7th plunge .." 4 mm
8th plunge ... 4 mm
9th plunge ... 2 mm ¢= K'
Total 55.00 mm ¢= Z-5500
(b) When the combined operations are executed by turning on the SINGLE BLOCK switch,
a temporary stop is made in an intermediate position, and the temporary stop lamp
lights up.
(1) After positioning to (X, Y) point
(2) After positioning to R point
(3) After termination of each cycle, if L command has been given.
The single block stop after the completion of combined operation is normal, and
the FEED HOLD lamp does not light up.
(c) Be sure to designate the R point and Z point by programming R and Z before entering
the combined operation command mode. R point and Z point are cleared when
combined operation commands are cancelled.
(d) When executing combined operation commands with the symbol data changed, the
block requires any of the following symbol commands. The combined operation will not
be executed otherwise.
X,Y,Z
71
(e) When M, S or T code is given in the combined operation command, M, S, T signals are
sent at the first positioning in the block. In general, M, S, T should be commanded in
their own block.
(f) An input error is triggered when any one of the following G codes is programmed in the
combined operation command mode.
G codes of' group except for G04
When programming G92, G28 etc., make sure to cancel the combined operation
command in advance.
(g) During the combined operation command mode, only a dwell block (G04) can be
inserted. Correct dwell will be served.
(h) Start of spindle forward or reverse (M03 or M04) should be executed by automatic
operation commands before entering combined operations. Do not enter into combined
operations after manually switching the spindle between forward and reverse.
(i) Execution of subprogram (M98) in combined operation command mode. In a combined •

operation command mode, M98P... L...; can be programmed to call up subprogram
and the combined operation is continued in the subprogram. The address P (program
No. of the first block of subprogram) with M98 command destroys temporary the
contents of address P for designation of dwell time, but after the jumping to
subprogram, it resumes the contents.
• Programming consideration of M98 in the combined operation command mode

is the same as those of other than combined operation command modes. (e.g.
Restriction of execution to no more than four levels.)
(j) Changing of R point and Z point
When R is commanded instead of Z during the execution of combined operation in GPl

mode, Z becomes incremental value from the new R point. Care should be taken.
G92 X0 Y0 Z0
G91 X... Y... R-5.0
Point R Point Z
Z-10. OF... ; -5.0 -10.0
X..- R-7.0 ; -7.0 -12.0
X... Z-3.0 ; -7.0 -10.0
R-4.0 Z-11.0 ; -4.0 -15.0
72
(Program example) -. ..
+Y
• I
40 "1'--"_ _:)'- ..... _ ..... _ ..... "_
I ,ff 40 __ 40 __ 40 __
,_START 3,0 +X
POINT
Fig. 4.29
N_0 G92 X0 Y0 Z0;

Nll G90 G98 ; ... Return to initial point, Absolute
N12 G81 X3000 Y4000 R-2000 Z-3000 F-200 ; "" Drilling cycle
N13 M98 P400 ; "" Jump to subprogram
N14 G00 X0 Y0:
N15 T05 ; ... Tapper selection
N16 M06 ; ... Tool change
N17 G84 X3000 Y4000 R-2000 Z-3000 F2000 ; ... Tapping cycle
N18 M98 P400 ; "'" Jump to subprogram (Note)
N19 G00 X0 Y0;
0400 ;
N100 G91 X4000 L3 ;
N101 Y3000 ;
N102 X-4000 L3 ; Subprogram for drilling
N103 Y3000 ; position pattern.
N104 X4000 L3 ;
N105 G09 G80 ;
N106 M99 ;
73
4.2.17 ABSOLUTE/INCREMENTAL COMMAND DESIGNATION (G90, G91)
These G codes are for designating whether the movement data following the axis codes are
absolute values or incremental values.
(1) G90 ...... Absolute Designation (Fig. 4.29)
In all the blocks following a block containing G90, the movement data following X, Y, Z
are regarded as absolute values.
IG90 G00 X... Y--. Z..-;1 _ Absolute command
(2) G91 ...... Incremental Designation (Fig. 4.29)
In all the blocks subsequent to a block containing G91, motion data are treated as
incremental.
I G91 G01 X-.. Y... Z-.. F...; ] --_ Incremental command
(3) G90 and G91 are modal G codes in the same group and remain in absolute or
incremental command values unless command change (G91 for G90 or G90 for G91) is
programmed.
NOTE
When the power is turned on, G90 absolute is automatically selected.
- Y AXIS
Y_ Y'_ _ + X
L X_
_ x4 X2 xs x6 AXIS
X3
Fig. 4.30
74
4.2.18 PROGRAMMING OF ABSOLUTE ZERO POINT (G92)
Before programming movement commands, an absolute coordinate system may be

established, so that all the subsequent absolute movement commands will be effected on
this coordinate system.
(1)lG92 X..-Y... z...; I
With this command, the current machine position is entered as a point (X, Y, Z) in one
arbitrarily selected absolute coordinate system. That is, this command designates the
signed distances in the three coordinate directions from a desired coordinate zero
point (0, 0, 0), designating zero point in this way. See Fig. 4.30.
(2) G92 cannot be programmed with other G codes, F, M, or T codes in the same block.
NOTE
1. In principle, program G92 while all position offset commands are
cancelled.
2. When the power is turned on, the current position is set as coordinate
(0, 0, 0). Be sure to execute the return motion to the reference point
before starting operation.
(3) As a special example, coordinate shift equivalent to G92 can be made by position cancel
operation from the CRT control station.
(Program example)
G92 X50000 Y30000 Z40000;
+Y
.." • _U.."
(-_ .....
.
I
[50 .I-x
r ._
I /
1 ),,
+z
Fig. 4.31
75
4.3 EXTERNAL OFFSET COMMAND (INDIRECT SPECIFICATION)
In memory operation, movement can be made by assuming data stored in the programmed
offset number to be travel distance.
That is, different movements can be made in a single program by changing the
offset value rather than the program.
(1) The offset number is specified immediately following the coordinate word (X, Y, Z, I, J,
K, F, L, P, R, Q).
[_H[BD
- --_ OFFSET
COORDINATENUMBER
WORD
(Program example)
(_ Assuming that the program contains
I G01 XH10 YH20;]and
(_) the offset value contents are
H10 = 50.0 ram, H20 =5.0 mm
the program in (_) becomes equivalent to
G01 X50.0 Y5.0;
@) when the offset value contents are changed to
H10 = 65.0 ram, H20 = 3.5 mm
the program in (_) becomes equivalent to
G01 X65.0 Y3.5;
(_ When the sign Q is added immediately preceding the H, pluse and minus signs of
the offset value contents are converted.
Io01 1
(2) The offset value is changed by directly depressing the keys on the CRT control station
keyboard, writing a new offset value in a program, or reading the external value in I/O
for offset value write-in. For details, see Par. 4.2.7.
76
4.4 SIGNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS
These commands are for causing the machine (auxiliary machines, etc.) to perform
movements under programs. The commands are in two function types; T-function and
M-function.
4.4.1 T-FUNCTION
The T-function commands are used to designate tool Nos., etc.
(1) Command Format
Two digits following the code T designate T Nos. Leading zeros may be omitted.
TDD
[
) / T-designation number
(2) Output
Where a movement command and a T-command are programmed in the same block,
a BCD 2-digit T-code output signal (T,_ to T28) is output from the Motionpack to the
machine simultaneously with the movement command, and then, with a delay of t msec,
a T-code read signal (TF) is output. The delay time is set by a parameter #1100.
) (3) Completion Signal
The machine reads the T-BCD code output, and returns and MT completion signal
(FIN) to Motionpack. Then, the T-code read signal is cleared. It is also cleared by
a resetting operation or a mode change operation.
(4) Effective Range
However, the T-BCD code output signal (Tjl to T28 ) is not cleared when an MT com-
pletion signal is received, but is retained until a new T-command is received. This
means that T-code signals are modal, and remain effective after being used until a sub-
sequent T-command is given. Fig. 4.32 shows the time chart covering the above time
relationship.
(5) Related Signal (Travel Completion Signal, DEN)
Travel completion signal (DEN) is output after completing travel, when T code is
commanded in the same block as travel command. With T code only commanded, the
DEN is output With BCD code simultaneously. Selecting only the travel command does
not make any command.
The DEN is released by MST completion signal (FIN), resetting, or mode
changing.
77
4.4.1 T-FUNCTION (Conrd)
(6) Where several T codes are commanded in the same block, a final command among
commanded T codes is effective. Fig. 4.32 shows the time chart covering the above time
relationship.
MACHINE I I
MOVEMENT
T-BCDCODE OUTPUTSIGNAL |
(T,,. T,2, T., T,,)
( T=,, T=_, T2,, T=,)
T-CODEREAD SIGNAL(mE) I i 1
MST COMPLETIONSIGNAL(FIN) _ i
t i
TRAVEL COMPLETIONSiGNAL(DEN) F_[
Fig. 4.32
(7) Special Use of T Function Output Terminal
T function output terminal can be used for a notch signal output. Refer to Par. 4.2.15.
4.4.2 M-FUNCTION
(1) Command Format
M-functions are programmed by M and the two digits following it. Except for special
M-codes, the definitions of M03 to M89 are left to the user.
ME][:]
l M-designation number
(2) Output
Where a movement command and an M-command are programmed in the same block,
a BCD 2-digit M-code output Signal (M_ to M28) is output from the Motionpack to the
machine simultaneously with the movement command, and then, with a delay of t ms,
an M-code read signal (MF) is output. The.delay time is the same as that for T-code
read signal. It is set by parameter, #1100. M-code read signal (MF) is not output in
MOO,M02, M30 or internal processing M-code (M90 to M99).
(3) Completion Signal
The machine reads the M-BCD code outpout, and returns an MT completion signal
(FIN) to Motionpack. Then, the M-code read signal is cleared. It is also cleared by
a resetting operation or a mode change operation.
78
(4) Related Signal (Travel Completion Signal, DEN)
J Travel completion signal (DEN) is output after completing travel, When M code is
h
commanded in the same block as travel command. With M code only commanded, the
DEN is output with BCD code simultaneously. Selecting only the travel command does
not make any command.
The DEN is released by MST completion signal (FIN), resetting, or mode

changing.
(5) Where several M codes are commanded in the same block, the final command among
commanded M codes is effective. Fig. 4.33 shows the time chart covering the above time
relationship.
MACHINE l i
MOVEMENT J
i
M-BCD CODE OUTPUT SIGNAL | ,

(M,,, M==,
(Mz,, M,_, M2,,
M,,, M2,)
M,,) Jl._ IJI I
M-CODE READ SIGNAL(MF) ] ,]',

II II
I
MST COMPLEIION SIGNAL(FIN) L--_
TRAVEL COMPLETION SIGNAL(DEN)

I I
Fig. 4.33
4.4.3 M-CODES FOR STOP (MOO, M02, M30)
(1) MOO (Program stop)
MOO is to be programmed in a command when an automatic operation must be

interrupted at a certain position. When MOO is read, the system stops the execution of
the program after that block, and, at the same time, outputs an MOO signal. To restart
the program, a start signal (STR) is turned on.
(2) M02 (Program end)
M02 is programmed at the end of one program. When the system reads an M02, it stops
the automatic operation after that block, and, simultaneously, it outputs an M02 signal.
The system will not start again even when a start signal is input immediately afterward.
To restart the system, a reset signal must be turned on, followed by a start signal.
(3) M30 (End of program, wait at leading end)
M30 is programmed at the end of a program, when the system reads an M30 during
automatic operation, it stops the automatic operation after executing that block, and,
J simultaneously, outputs an M30 signal. Then, it returns to the leading end of the prog-
ram and waits. The program is restarted when a start signal is turned on. Simultane-
ously, M30 signal output is OFF.
(4) External output signal (BCD code output) is not output in MOO, M02, or M30. 79
4.4.4 M-CODES FOR INTERNAL PROCESSING (M90toM99)
M90 through M99 are used for internal processing, and they do not output any signals
(BCD). M98 and M99 are for initiating subprograms and for ending them.
4.4.5 SUBPROGRAM (M98, M99)
Numbered and stored subprograms can be called up as many times as desired for
execution.
(1) Initiating Subprograms (M98)
The subprogram designated by P is initiated, and executed L times. When no L is

programmed, the subprogram is executed only once.
M98 P .... L .... ; JJ
SUBPROGRAMS
L ___ NUMBER
SUBPROGRAM NO. OF
TO REPETITIONS
BE INITIATE OF
(2) Subprogram End (M99)
M99 is written at the end of a subprogram in a separate block. When M99 comes at the
end of the subprogram to which M98 designated, the program returns automatically to
the block next to the M98 block. - .........
(Program example)
The sequence in which the main program initiates a subprogram and the subprogram is
executed, are shown below.
MAIN PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM
N001 G00 ...... ;

INITIATING N001......... ;
SUBPROGRAM N002 M98 P200 L3;
(3 TIMES) N002 ......... ;
N003 ......... ;
INITIATING
SUBPROGRAM N004 M98 P200;
(1 TIME) N 050 M _;
N005 ......... ;
O100; _ O200;
1 TIME
TIM ND OF SUBPROGRAM
Fig. 4.34 "-
8O
(3) Nesting Program
Subprograms can be nested to a maximum of four levels.
MAIN PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM SUBPROGRAM SUBPROGRAM

0100; 0200; 0300;
M98 PlO0; M98 P200; M98 P300;
i I M99; M99;
NESTING ........................ (1) .............................. (2) .............................. (3)
Fig. 4.35
(4) Special Use of M99
When M99; is written in end of the main program in the separate block, the main pro-
gram returns to its leading end and will be re-executed endlessly.
NOTE
1. If the subprogram No. specified by P is not found, an alarm state occurs.
2. Attempt to next subprograms over 4 times causes analarm.
4.5 S FUNCTION
The S function is used to program the spindle rotation speed.
(1) Command Format
The spindle rotation speed (rpm) is directly specified in a 5-digit numeric value follow-
i ng code S. The leading zeros can be omitted.
SF1C]DN1½
I PROGRAMMED SPEED(rpm)
•-- 81
4.5 S FUNCTION (Cont'd)
(2) Output
When the S code is programmed in the block within which a movement command
appears, sPeed command analog voltage is output to the spindle drive unit from the
Motionpack (axis module for the spindle) simultaneously with the movement command.
In addition, S code read signal (SF) is output in a delay of t ms. The delay time is set
in parameter #1100 as with the T code read signal.
MOVEMENT I I
COMMAND ',
t
SPINDLE !
COMMAND
SPEED ,= _'
t ms
S-CODE READ
SIGNAL(SF) I !
MST
COMPLETION _'_
SIGNAL(FIN)
Fig. 4.36
NOTE
To operate the spindle, the spindle normal rotation signal (FRN), spindle
reverse rotation signal (RRN), and spindle stop signal (SSTP) are also
required. See Par. 9.2.2.
(3) Completion Signal
When t.h.e spindle reaches the speed indicated by the S signal on the spindle drive unit
and MST finish signal (FIN) is returned to the Motionpack, program execution shifts to
the next block. If the S code is programmed in the block within which the M or T code
appears, return the MST finish signal (FIN) after all conditions have been arranged in
addition to read of M code output signal, T code output signal.
(4) Effective Range
Once, the S command which is modal is programmed, it is effective until another S

command is given.
The S command value is held even if the spindle stop signal (SSTP) is returned,
the spindle stops, and output voltage from the Motionpack is disconnected.
Thus, if the spindle normal rotation signal (FRN) or spindle reverse rotation
signal (RRN) is input again, the spindle is started according to the previously given S
command value.
(5) To change the S command after the S axis starts, do not exceed the spindle speed range
for the selected spindle gear.
82
, CONTENTS
5. PARAMETERS 84 5.6 SERVO-RELATED PARAMETERS 99

5.6.1 Acceleration/Deceleration Constant
5.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 84 (#1407, #1607, #1807, #1501 to #1503,
#1701to #1703, #1901 to #1903) 99
5.2 VARIETIES OF PARAMETERS 84 5.6.2 Interpolation Feedrate Bias
(#1475, #1675, #1875) 101
5.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION 5.6.3 Feedrate Command Voltage Setting
PARAMETERS 86 (#1408, #1608, #1808) 102
5.3.1 Setting Axis for Use (#1000) 86 5.6.4 Position Loop Gain
5.3.2 Function Selection (#1474, #1674, #1874) 102
(#1001, #1002, #1003, #1005, #1006 #1009) 87 5.6.5 Servo Error Range
• 5.3.3 MF, SF, TF Signal Delay Time Setting (#1555, #1755, #1955) 103
(#1100) 90
5.6.6 Position Setting Range
5.4 SPECIAL PARAMETERS 90 (#1406, #1606, #1806) 103
5.4.1 Position Command Unit Setting 5.6.7 Drift Offset (#1401, #1601, #1801) Y03
(#1557, #1558, #1757, #1758, #1957, #1958) 90
5.7 RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT 104
5.5 MACHINE SPECIFICATION 5.7.1 Direction of Return-to-Reference point
PARAMETERS 94 (#1403, #1603, #1803) 104
5.5.1 Max. Feedrate Setting at Manual Feed 5.7.2 Return-to-Reference-Point Approach
(#1101) 94 Feedrate Setting (#1504, #1704, #1904) 105
5.5.2 Interpolation Max. Feedrate Setting 5.7.3 Return-to-Reference-Point Creep Feedrate
(#1102) 94 Setting (#1505, #1705, #1905) 105
5.5.3 Jogging Feedrate Setting 5.7.4 Return-to-Reference-Point Approach
(#1104 to #1118) 94 Distance (#1556, #1756, #1956) 105
5.5.4 Rapid Traverse Feedrate Setting 5.7.5 Reference Point Area (#1125) 105
(#1500, #1700, #!900) 95
5.5.5 Step Feed Displacement Distance Setting 5.8 SPINDLE PARAMETER SETTING 106
(#1122, #1123, #1124) 96 5.8.1 Spindle Mode Setting (#2004) 106
5.8.2 Maximum Rotation Speed on Each Gear
5.5.6 Software Limit Switch Function (#2150, #2151, #2152) 106
(#1402, #1602, #1802, #1550, #1551, #1750, #1950,
#1751, #1951) 96 5.9 NO-USING PARAMETER SETTING 106
5.5.7 Backlash Compensation Value Setting
(#1405, #1605, #1805) 97
5.5.8 Pitch Error Compensation
(#1552, #1752, #1952, #1553, #1753, #1953,
#1410 to #1473, #1610 to #1673, #1810 to #1873) 97
5.5.9 Combined Operation Command (G83)
Setting Data (#1202) 99
83
5. PARAMETERS
5.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
When composing a system by combining Motionpack-ll0 units, servo drives and

servomotors with a machine, various constants must be set to designate the control specifi-
cation of the Motionpack-ll0 to adapt the system performance to the requirement and to the
machine performance. These constants are given as parameters to Motionpack-110.
Examples of parameter constants include the number of axes to be controlled, the
feedrate range, and the range of position loop gains. The parameters must be determined
in the system design stage, and must be set prior to the start of operation.
Before shipment from the factory, Motionpack-ll0s are set to the standard parame-
ters. The preset parameters must be checked prior to starting operation.
5.2 VARIETIES OF PARAMETERS
The parameters are classified into six groups: system specifications, position command
units, machine specifications, servo specifications, return-to-reference point, and spindles,
as explained below.
Table 5.1 List of Parameters
Parameter No. Name Range Setting Unit
#1000 Function selection (setting axis to be used) "0" or "1" in a bit --
#1001 Function selection (expansion memory) "0" or "1" in a bit --
#1002 Function selection (program No. designation) "0" or "1" in a bit --
#1003 Function selection (notch signal) "0" or "1" in a bit --
#1004 !: Internally reserved Fixed by "0" --

#1005 Function selection (decimal point) "0" or "1" in a bit --
#1006 Axis omission designation "0" or "1" in a bit --
#1007 - #1008 Internally reserved Fixed by "0" --

Transmission setting in communication "0" or "1" in a bit --
#1009 function
#1100 IMF, SF, TF signal delay time setting 0 to 32767 8 ms
#1101 Max feedrate setting at manual feed 1 to 3200 7.5 mm/min
#1102 IInterpolation max feedrate setting 1 to 24000 1 mm/min
#1103 Internally reserved Fixed by "0" --
#1104 - #1118 Jogging feedrate setting 1 to 24000 1 mm/min
#1122 - #1124 Step feed displacement distance setting 1 to 32767 0.001 mm
#1125 Reference point area 0 to 32767 +_0.001mm

#1200 - #1201 Internal data area -- --
Combined operation command (G83) setting 0 to 32767 0.001 mm

#1202 data
#1203 - #1209 Internal data area -- --
#1400 #1600 #1800 Internally reserved Fixed by "0" --

Fixed by "1" ("0"
#1401 #1601 #1801 Dorift compensation under adjustment)
#1402 #1602 #1802 Soft LS checking "0" or "1" --
#1403 #1603 #1803 Direction of return-to-reference point "0" or "1" --

84
Parameter No. Name Range Setting Unit
#1405 #1605 #1805 Backlash compensation value setting 01o127 1 pulse
#1406 #1606 #1806 Position setting range 1 to 127 __1 pulse
#1407 #1607 #1807 Exponential accel/decel time constant 1 to 127 8 ms
#1408 #1608 #1808 Feedratecommand voltage setting 'Fixed by "7" --
#1409 #1609 #1809 Internally reserved i Fixed by "0" --

2:1410-=1473
=_610-=1e73
_:1810-=1873 Pitch error compensation setting i0 to ± 127 1 pulse
#1474 #1674 #1874 Position loop gain setting I1 to 127 --
#1475 #'1675 #1875 Interpolation feedratebias setting Ilto127 7.5mm/min

=1476-=1479
=1676-=1679
.'1876-=1879 Internally reserved Fixed by "0" --
#1500 #1700 #1900 Rapid traverse feedratesetting 1 to3200 7.5mm/min

#1501 #1701 #1901 ls_linearaccel/decelconstant 1 to 1536 15.625 mm/s 2
#1502 #1702 #1902 2nd linear accel/decel change point, feedrate 1 to 3200 7.5mm/min
#1503 #1703 #1903 2ndlinearaccel/decelconstant 1 to 1536 15.625 mm/s =
Return-to-reference-point approach feedrate 1 to 3200 7.5 mm/min

#1504 #1704 #1904 setting
Return-to-reference-point creep feedrate 1 to 3200 7.5 mm/min
#1505 #1705 #1905 setting
=1506-=1509
=1706-=1709
=1906-.':.1909 Internally reserved Fixed by "0" --
#1550 #1750 #1950 Move distance + limit value setting 100to99999999 0.001 mm
#1551 #1751 #1951 Move distance- limit value setting -100to-99999999 0.001 mm
#1552 #1752 #1952 iPitch error correction interval 500 to 99999999 0.001 mm
#1553 #1753 #1953 :Pitch error correction start point -2000000 to 2000000 --
#1555 #1755 #1955 Servoerror range 1 to 16777216 1 pulse
#1556 #1756 #1956 Return-to-reference-point

setting approach distance 1 to 90000000 1 pulse
#1557 #1757 #1957 Position command unit setting (B/A) 167772 to 1677721600 --
#1558 #1758 #1958 Position command unit setting (A/B) 167772 to 1677721600 --
#2004 " Spindle mode setting 1or 3 1: +_D/A output

3: +D/A. output,

#2150 Maxrotation speed of gear (L) 1 to 32767 1 rpm
#2151 Max rotation speed of gear (M) 1 to 32767 1 rpm
#2152 Max rotation speed of gear (H) 1 to 32767 1 rpm
85
5.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS
-5.3.1 SETTING AXIS FOR USE (#1000)
Motionpack-llO controls up to 4 axes (X, Y, Z, S), and the axes to be used are designated by
this parameter as follows:
#1000 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 I D2 D1 DO
0 0 I
t $ Axis 1 (X) designated?
/ Axis 2 (Y) designated ?
Axis 3 (Z) designated ?
Axis 4 (S) designeted ?
Micro PC module ?
Communication function (DNC) ?
Set "1" for use, and "0" for non-use.

Set "0" for no designation.
(Example)
Using one axis (X) #1000 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Using2axes_X
Z__1000
O7100o
0°_0
O4o
O3o
O21Ol1001
01
(1) Parameter #1000-D4 is set only when there is a micro PC module, type JEFMC-B110.
(2) Parameter #1000-D5 is set only when there is a motion module with the communication
function, type JEFMC -C027.
86
5.3.2 FUNCTION SELECTION (#1001, #1002, #1003, #1005, #1006, #1009)
This parameter is used to specify the availability of optional functions, or their use or
non-use. When the optional function is required, set the corresponding bit to 1; when not
required, set it to O. Set no-designation bit to O.
#1001 D7 D6
D50I 1 D41 D31 D2 DIID0
]1 1
A
] Linear interpolation (fixed to 1).

Circular interpolation (fixed to 1).
High speed reference point return (G28) used ?
M-BCD signal output (fixed to 1).
T-BCD signal output (fixed to 1).
S output (fixed to 1).
Extension memory (64 kB) available ?
(1) If #1001-D2 is set to 0, normal automatic reference point return operation (G28) is
performed. See Par. 4.2.9.
(2) Parameter #1001-D7 setting is valid only for motion modules, types JEFMC-C023 and
-C027.
#1002
{_i 3-Step
21-Stepfeedrate
feedrate override
override
{_i Simultaneous
Simultaneous 3-axis HANDLE
1-axis HANDLE operation
operation
Whether program No. designation by external
signal ?
(1) If #1002 D6 is set to 0," the simultaneous 1-axis handle operation function is selected, and
the axis is selected by changing the input signal (HX, HY, HZ). If #1002 D6 is set to 1,
the simultaneous 3-axis handle operation function is selected.
(2) If #1002 D7 is set to 1, the program number specified in external BCD switch input is
read at reset time, and there will be a delay for execution of program in memory
corresponding to the number. If it is set to 0, reset has no effect.
NOTE
In parameter #I002 setting, if the program No. designation by external
signal is required, reset operation in EDIT mode makes the designated-
program execution dwell. In this case, 0 No. at upper-right position on
program screen of CRT control station is changed for the specified No..
But the specified program does not appear on the screen, except in RUN
mode.
87
5.3.2 FUNCTION SELECTION (#1001, #1002, #1003i #1005, #1006, #1009)(Cont'd)
#1003 D7 D6 D5 D4 I D3 D2 D1 DO
0 0 0 1 0 1 0
]
l Is G31 (skip function) programmed, whether to

initiate alarm if skip signal is not input ?
Whether there is position memory.
S 5-digit D/A output (fixed to 1).
Whether notch signal is output.
(1) If #1003 DO is set to 1, no alarm is activated; if it is set to 0, an alarm is activated.
(2) If #1003 D1 is set to 1, the position memory is activated.
(3) If #1003 D4 is set to 1, the T function output pins (T, _-T28) are used for notch signal
output. See Par. 4.2.15.
(4) Parameters #1003-D5 and -D6 are set to specify transmission items in the communica-
tion function (DNC). If the communication function is not set, set the bits to 0.
#1004 D7 I D6
I
D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO
OlO IO IO o o o o
#1005 D7 D6 I D5 D4 D3 D2 I D1 DO
I I
A
[ Designation of 1 decimal place

Designation of 2 decimal place
Designation of 2 digits offset value input BCD
(1) If #1005-D0 to -D2 are all set to 0, decimal point representation is not made.
NOTE
Set only one of DO to D2 to 1.
(2) Offset value input from an external source is made by using input signal numbers #4011
to #4014. See Par. 4.2.7.
NOTE
Set only one of D4 to D7 to 1.
88
#1006 D7. D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO
0 0 0 0 0
TT, • Whether
Whether
Whether
X-axis omission is designated.
Y-axis omission is designated.
Z-axis omission is designated.
(1) The axis omission function is applied only to the specified axis by turning on the axis
omission signal (NEG).
_' T Transmission spee_ d_signation

1:2 1 Communication
\0: Communication
function
function
stop bits
stop bit
{_i Communication
Communication function
function data
data length-8
length-7 bits
bits
{_:: Communication function parity ON

OFF
1:
0: ODD
EVEN communication
communication function
function parity
parity
(1) #1009-D0 to -D7 are set to specify transmission items in the communication function
(DNC). If the communication function is not included, set all of DO to D7 to 0.
(2) #1009-D0 to -D3 are set to specify the transmission speed (baud rate) as listed below:
D3 D2 D1 DO Transmission Speed
0 0 0 1 300bps
0 0 1 0 600bps
0 0 1 1 1200
bps
0 1 0 0 2400
bps
0 1 0 1 4800
bps
0 1 1 0 9600
bps
89
5.3.3 ME, SF, TF SIGNAL DELAY TIME SETTING (#1100) 0__ SET VALUE <32767
When the M-code read signal (MF), T-code read signal (TF) or S-code read signal (SF) is
output after the M-BCD code output signal (M,, to M_8), T-BCD code output signal (T,, to
T_ ) or spindle speed command with a delay, the delay time is set by this parameter.
The delay can be set, with "1" representing 8 ms. For example, setting "2" means a
delay of 16 ms.
M-BCD CODE OUTPUT SIGNAL(Mll-M28)
T-BCD CODE OUTPUT SlGNAL(T11-T28)

SPINDLE SPEED COMMAND
M-CODE READ SIGNAL(ME) i" t ms_l

T-CODE READ SIGNAL(TE)
S-CODE READ SIGNAL(SF)
Fig. 5.1
5.4 SPECIAL PARAMETERS
5.4.1 POSITION COMMAND UNIT SETTING (#1557, #1558, #1757, #1758, #1957, #1958)
(1) Generally, the position detection unit (distance per pulse) is determined by the drive
system and the position detector.
Witn Motionpack-110, two coefficients, B/A and A/B, are used to match the
position command unit for the drive system with the position detection unit. Fig. 5.2
shows a block diagram.
B/A represents the number of output pulses per the minimum input unit (e. g.,
0.001 mm), and represents the feed distance of the machine per pulse of quadruple PG.
Prior to determining the parameters, B/A and A/B should be calculated frome
the specifications of the machine and the detector in advance, and
x 16777216(integer portion only) __ __ 100
A
B × 16777216(integer portion only) (1-_0- __-_A
B __100)
should be set as the parameter values.
Parameters for B/A for the X-, Y- and Z-axes are #1557, #1757 and #1957, and
those for A/B are #1558, #1758 and #1958, respectively.
9O
• NOTE
1. Using only the integer portions of B/A (or A/B) x 16777216 results in
rounding errors.
2. The value of A/B must be the reciprocal of B/A.
3. When B/A (or A/B) is 1, (that is when the position command unit and
the position detection unit are equal) set the parameters to 16777216.
X"_ i Servopack L
_=_=_ SERVOMOTOR , OAD ,
.
_TG
I
ULE p_A-f
CURRENT G PG
VALUE _ m -- - = .-.s_
I MULTIPLIER
I
_. VAL
Fig. 5.2
(2) Influence on Other Parameters
When [-BffA-] ¢ 1 ( _ _ 1), the parameters listed beloware set in the position
detection units. Thus, if the parameters are set based on the position detection units
(0.001 mm), each must be multiplied by A/B for conversion. Integer values are set in the
parameters. Discard the fractions resulting from conversion or count them as a whole
number, as required.
• Backlash offset amount setting (#1405, #1605, #1805)
• Position set area setting (#1406, #1606, #1806)
• Pitch error offset amount setting (#1410-#1473, #1610-#1673, #1810-#1873)
• Reference point return last running distance setting (#1556,.#1756, #1956)
• Servo error area setting (#1555, #!755, #1955)
(Conversion example)
When backlash offset amount is set, backlash distance [0.001 mm] × B/A is set as a
parameter.
91
5.4.1 POSITION COMMAND UNIT SETTING
(#1557, #1558, #1757, #1758, #1957, #1958)(Cont'd)
(3) Calculation Expression of B/A
NUMBER OF LOAD SHAFT
GEAR TEETH: N_ TABLE
_/WWV_-- ] BALL SCREW PITCH: P
PULSE GENERATOR
OUTPUT PULSE: fpc
GEAR TEETH: Nm
Fig. 5.3
"
Specifications:
• Ball screw pitch: P (mm/rev)
• Deceleration ratio: R (where R = N _/Nm)
• Minimum position command: U (mm/pulse)
• Pulse generator: fpG (pulses/rev)
In these specifications, B/A is as follows:
B = Number of pulses of command side

A Number of pulses of ball screw side
_ fpcx4
............... Expression (_)
P × 1
U R
(4) Examples of Position Command Unit Parameter Setting
(a) First, select a detector.

Select a pulse generator so that the motor shaft pulse generator generates a quarter
pulse or more when the machine moves by the minimum detection unit distance.
If pro er selection of ulse output and deceleration ratio er revolution results in B/A =
A/B _ need for an conversion.

(b) After detector determination, find B/A according to expression @. Find A/B by
calculating the reciprocal of B/A.
(c) Find the parameter setup value from the numeric values of B/A and A/B. Discard the
fractions and set the integer part in the parameter.
92
(Example 1) Table drive by using ball screw (X-axis direction)
Specifications:
• Ball screw pitch P = 6 (mm/rev)
• Deceleration ratio R - _ - 2
• Minimum position command unit U = 0.001 (ram/pulse)
• Pulse generator output: Undefined
Change expression (_) and calculate back pulse generator output so that B/A results in 1.00.
fp_- lx ___ x _ x A
B ............... Expression (_)
_ 4
1 x 0.001
6 x+ x 1.00
= 750 (pulses/rev)
Therefore, select a pulse generator conforming to the 750 pulses/rev specifications.

Then, set "16777216" in X-axis position command parameters B/A (#1557), A/B (#1558).
7
(Example 2) Assuming that deceleration ratio R = N _/Nm = --5- in example 1,
1 x 6 x 1
f_c = T 0.00-----T --_ x 1.00
5
= 1071.428 ... (pulses/rev)
Therefore, fPc results in an incomplete value. Select an already existing pulse generator
which generates greater than 1071.4 pulses/rev.
For example, if with 2000 pulses/rev, again B/A is calculated from expression (_),
B _ 2000×4 _ 28
A 6 x _ 15
0.001 7
A _ 15
B 28
If the last parameter (X-axis) is calculated,
B parameter - 28 x16777216 = I313174691.87
A 15 l
This value is set in parameter #1557.
A
T parameter- 15 x16777216
---_- = [ 8987794].286
This
t value is set in parameter #1558.
93
5.5 MACHINE SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS
5.5.1 MAX. FEEDRATE SETTING AT MANUAL FEED (#1101 1 <SET VALUE <3200
This parameter sets the maximum feedrate for manually moving the machine with the
manual pulse generator. The manual feedrate cannot exceed the value set by this
parameter.
The setting unit "1" represents 7.5 mm/min. For example, "10" means 75 ram/rain.
5.5.2 INTERPOLATION MAX. FEEDRATE SETTING (#1102) 1<SETVALUE _24000
This parameter is for setting the maximum feedrate for linear interpolation and circular
interpolation by two slides moving along the two axes simultaneously, and for linear
interpolation by 3 simultaneous movements along the 3 axes.
The setting unit "1" represents 1 mm/min. For example, "10000" means 10m/min.
5.5.3 JOGGING FEEDRATE SETTING (#1104 TO #1118) 1 <SET VALUE <24000
Parameters #1104 to #1118, respectively, set 16-level jogging or step feedrates. The
designated feedrates are selectively initiated by the combinations of the inputs of jog
feedrate setting signals JOV1, JOV2, JOV4, and JOV8. The feedrate is the same in each
axis (X, Y and Z).
Table 5.2 Combination of Jog Feedrate Signals for Jogging FeedrateSetting
Level JOVl JOV2 JOV4 JOV8 Parameter No.
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Override 0 %
1 ON OFF OFF OFF #1104
2 OFF ON OFF OFF #1105
3 ON ON OFF OFF #1106
4 OFF OFF ON OFF #1107
5 ON OFF ON OFF #1108
6 OFF ON ON OFF #1109
7 ON ON ON OFF #iii0
8 OFF OFF OFF ON #iiii
9 ON OFF OFF ON #1112
10 OFF ON OFF ON #1113
11 ON ON OFF ON #1114
12 OFF OFF ON ON #1115
13 ON OFF ON ON #1116
14 OFF ON ON ON #1117
15 ON ON ON ON #1118
Feedrates can be set, with "1" representing 1 ram/rain. For example, setting 12000
means 12m/rain.
94
NOTE
When both the jog feedrate selection signals JOV1, JOV2, JOV4, and
JOV8 are OFF, the jogging feedrate is 0, and the machine will not move
even when a jogging signal is input.
5.5.4 RAPID TRAVERSE FEEDRATE SETTING (#1500, #1700, #1900)

1 < SET VALUE _-<3200
Parameters #1500, #1700 and #1900 are for setting the rapid traverse feedrates for X-axis,
Y-axis and Z-axis, respectively. The set feedrates are executed selectively at 100% (high),
50% (middle) or 25% (low) by the combinations of the inputs of rapid traverse override
signals (ROV1, ROV2, and ROV3).
The combinations of the inputs of rapid traverse override signals and the feedrates
are given below:
Table 5.3
ROV1 ROY2 ROV3 Feedrate
High ON ON OFF Parameter setting
Middle OFF ON OFF 50 _ of high
Low ON OFF OFF 25 %of high
High -- -- ON Parameter setting
The rapid traverse feedrates can be set, with "1" representing 7.5 mm/min. For
example, setting "100" gives a high feedrate of 750 mm/min.
The actual setting must be an integer not exceeding the value calculated by:
Motor rated speed (rpm)7500 xPG (pulse/rev) x4 (X_)
Where the position command parameters (#1557, #1558, #1757, #1758, #1957, #1958)
are taken into consideration, the factor A/t? must be multiplied.
(Example)
When a Minertia RM Series motor (rated speed: 3000 rpm) is used with a 500 pulse/rev
feedback pulse generator, the rapid traverse feedrate can be calculated as follows:
3000x500×4 = 800
7500
The parameters ma)/be set to 800.
95
k
5.5.5 STEP FEED DISPLACEMENT DISTANCE SETTING (#1122, #1123, #1124)
1 < SET VALUE < 32767
These parameters set the displacement distance in step operation. Parameters #1122, #1123
and #1124 set respectively L1 (short), L2 (middle) and L3 (long) distances.
These three distances are selectively executed by the combinations of the two step
multiplier signals (MP1 and MP2) as follows. Speed under step feed operation is the same
as that of jog feed operation.
Table 5.4
MP1 MP2 Parameter No.

L1 (short) ON OFF #1122
L2 (middle) OFF ON #1123
L3(long) ON ON #1124
The setting unit "1" represents 0.001 mm. For example, "2000" means a displace-
ment distance of 2 mm for 1 step.
5.5.6 SOFTWARE LIMIT SWITCH FUNCTION

(#1402, #1602, #1802, #1550, #1551, #1750, #1751, #1950, #1551, #1751, #1951)
The software limit switch function is a function of storing motion limit positions in the
motion modules which have the same effect on the machine movement as actual limit
switches (LS) positioned along the movement path. Generally, the limit positions should be
set inside of LS.
Th%use or non-use of the software LS is designated by one parameter for each axis,
and the position (distance) of the software LS is designated by another parameter for each
axis.
(1) Software LS Use/Non-Use Parameter (#1402, #1602, #1802)
Parameters #1402, #1602 and #1802 are for selectively using or not using the software LS
function, respectively, along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.
For using the software LS function, set the parameter to "1", and when not using,
to "0" When the system is returned to the reference point after power application, this
function is automatically turned on.
NOTE
1. Do not set any digits other than "1" or "0".
2. Where using the software LS function in unrestricted length positioning,

set the parameter to "0".
96
(2) Move Distance + Limit Value Setting (#1550, #1750, #1950) 100 _ Set Value __ 99999999
Parameters #1550, #1750 and #1950 are for setting the software LS in the + direction
from the origin on the X-, Y- and Z-axes, respectively.
The setting unit "1" represents 0.001 mm. For example, "10000" means 10.000
mm, and When motion beyond this distance from the reference point is attempted, an
alarm occurs.
(3) Move Distance -- Limit Value (#1551, #1751, #1951) -99999999 __ Set Value __ -100
Parameters #1551, #1751 and #1951 are for designating the software LS position as
measured from the reference point along the X-, Y- and Z-axes, in the - direction. The
setting unit "1" represents 0.001 mm. For example, "-20000" means a movable rang e
from the reference point to -20.000 ram, and any attempt to move beyond the LS will
cause an alarm.
B
(4) Limit positions set value = Actual move distance x T
5.5.7 BACKLASH COMPENSATION VALUE SETTING (#1405, #1605, #1805)

0 __%SET VALUE __ 127
Parameters #1405, #1605 and #1805 are for setting the backlash compensation values for the
ball screws, etc. of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively. The set backlash compensation
values are automatically added to the movement command values. The setting unit "1"
represents 1 pulse. Where the compensation amount is _ (tim),
B
Backlash compensation value = _ x A
5.5.8 PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

(#1552, #1752, #1952, #1553, #1753, #1953, #1410 TO #1473, #1610 TO #1673, #1810 TO #1873)
For each axis, the ball screw pitch error for successive intervals, starting from the reference
zero point, may be stored as a parameter value for use for automatic compensation. This
function becomes effective after a return-to-reference point.
The compensation interval length, the compensation start point, and the compensa-
tion amount are set for X-, Y- and Z-axes as parameter values. Where the compensation
amount is _ (tt m),
Pitch error compensation B

set value = _ x "A
97
5.5.8 PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION
(#1552, #1752, #1952, #1553, #1753, #1953, #1410 TO #1473, #1610 TO #1673, #1810 TO #1873)
(Cont'd)
Table 5.5
Item Parameter Description
Compensation #1552 (X) Setting range: 500 to 99999999

Interval #1752 (Y) Setting unit "1" represents 0.001 mm
#1952 (Z)
Compensation #1553 (X) Compensation start point, from Which 64 points, including the start point,
Start Point #1753 (Y) are compensated in + direction.
#1953 (Z) Setting range: -2000000 to 2000000
The minus sign means setting start point in the negative direction from
zero point.
Compensation #1410 to #1473 (X) Setting range: 0to_+127

Amount at Each #1610 to #1673 (Y) Setting unit "1" is 1 pulse (feedback pulse after 4 multipliers). For #1410,
Point #1810 to #1873 (Z) #1610 and #1810, set the pitch error compensation amounts at each com-
pensation start point in incremental value, and thereafter, set the compen-
sation values for 64 points, #1411, #1412-.. #1611, #1612 ... #1811, #1812... in
the + direction in sequence.
Where the measured pitch error is positive, set the compensation
amount in negative, and vice versa.
MEASURED VALUE
DISTANCE _REFEREN(_E VALUE

f_
', I, MEASURED PITCH ERROR
S
Ii I ' COMMAND
Fig. 5.4
In Fig. 5.5 assuming

Compensation interval: 1.000 mm.
Compensation start point: -3
Compensation points: 14
the parameters are set as follows:
Compensation interval:1#1552I 1000 I
Compensation start point: I #1553 I -3 I
+
l START MACHINE COORDINATE _ . MEASURED

_HHUH PITCH
ERROR _
I _._.__ ZERO POINT JP.'_"Ir_ I _'_ _INTERVAL

--3 --2
°l I I i/o , 2 3 . s s . 8 . ,oCOMPENSAT,O.
--xAx's
--1 _ REFERENCE NO.
--2 _ POINT
t 1 0 1 0 0 --1 0 0 --1 0 0 0 0 --1 INCREMENTAL SETTING
Fig. 5.5 Example of Writing into X-axis
98
Table 5.6
Compensation Parameter Compensation

Point No. No. Amount
"7 Compensation amount for
-3 #1410 1 -_
start point No. -3.
-2 #1411 0
-1 #1412 1
0 #1413 0 "-._ Reference point on X-axis
I #1414 0
2 #1415 -1
3 #1416 0
4 #1417 -1
5 #1418 0
6 #1419 0
7 #1420 0
8 #1421 0
9 #1422 0
Compensation amount for
10 #1423 -1 _ compensation No. 10.
#1424 Set "0" for no-compensation

11 to 61 to 0 intervals.
#1473
5.5.9 COMBINED OPERATION COMMAND (G83) SETTING DATA (#1202)
Setting data (7 used in combined operation command, deep hole drilling (G83) is set. For
the setup units, "1" corresponds to 0.001 mm. For example, if "2000" is set, 2 mm is
actually set. for details, see Par. 4.2.15.
5.6 SERVe-RELATED PARAMETERS
5.6.1 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONSTANT

(#1407, #1607, #1807, #1501 TO #1503, #1701 TO #1703, #1901 TO #1903")
For rapid traverse, jogging and manual control feeding, linear acceleration/deceleration is
automatically applied, and for interpolation feedrate, exponential automatic acceleration/
deceleration is applied.
(1) Linear Acceleraton/Deceleration

Table 5.7
Parameter No. Description
1st Linear i#1501 (X) Setting range: 1 to 1536

Aceel/Decel/ #1701 (Y) Setting unit: "1" = 15625 mm/s 2
Constant #1901 (Z)
i
2nd Linear #1502 (X) Setting range: 1 to 3200

Accel/Decel #1702 (Y) Setting unit: "1" = 7.5 mm/min
Change point #1902 (z)
Feedrate
2nd Linear #1503 (X) Setting range: 1to 1536

Accel/Decel #1703 (Y) Setting unit: "1" = 15625 mm/s _
Constant #1903 (Z)
99
5.6.1 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONSTANT
(#1407, #1607, #1807, #1501 TO #1503, #1701 TO #1703, #1901 TO #1903) (Cont'd)
FEEDRATE (mrn/s)
RAPID TRAVERSE
CHANGE POINT -
FEEDRATE V= 2ND LINEAR
ACCEL/DECEL CONSTANT
] 1ST LINEAR
FEEDRATE V R L _,.__ ;_ /
_._ _r_.-""_ ACCEL DECEL CONSTANT _""_JA
_--_ TIME t (S)
Fig. 5.6
(Example) When rapid feedrate = 12 m/min, rising time = 0.5 s, and

unit system = 0.001 mm;
• 12 m/min is converted to the rate per second as follows:
12000 x _ = 200 mm/s
200
• Acceleration from 0 to 12 m/min is _ = 400 mm/s 2.
The value set in the acceleration/deceleration constant parameter is _ = 25.6.
Thus, "25" is set.
NOTE
1. When determining the acceleration/deceleration constant, measure the
acceleration/deceleration time of the machine system, and adopt an
acceleration/deceleration constant that does not give acceleration/
deceleration time shorter than the measured time.
2. When accelerating/decelerating in one step, set the 1st and the 2nd accel/
decel constant to the same value and the change point feedrate to 0.
3. When accelerating/decelerating in 2 steps, set the 1st accel/decel

constant larger than the 2nd accel/decel constant. Set the change point
feedrate lower than the rapid traverse feedrate. ( a _> a 2, VR>V_)
(2) Exponential Accel/Decel Time Constant (#1407, #1607, #1807)
These parameters are for setting the exponential acceleration/deceleration time con-
stant for interpolation motions.
Table 5.8

Exponential Accel/ #1407 (X) Setting range: 1 to 127
Decel Time Constants #1607 (Y) Setting unit: 1 = 8 ms
#1807 (Z)
1OO
FEEDRATE v (mm/s)
/i "
t
\ EX"O"EN'.ccELE._'_O_N.OECE'E.AT,O
TIME
_7"_N_
CONSTANT
= T'MEt
_s_
Fig. 53
For example, when the parameter is set to "3", the acceleration/deceleration time
constant is 24 ms.
NOTE
i. To secure correct interpolation, all the axes must be set to the same time
constant.
2. If the set value is "I", stepped speed command can be obtained.
5.6.2 INTERPOLATION FEEDRATE BIAS (#1475, #1675, #1875)
These parameters are for setting the exponential acceleration/deceleration feedrate bias for
interpolation.
Table 5.9

#1475 (X) Setting range: 1to 127
Interpolation
Bias Feedrate #1675 (Y) Setting unit: 1 = 7.Emm/min
#1875 (Z)
FEEDRATE v (mm/s)
/ L
.... -_<
_ INTERPOLATION
FEEDRATE
Fig. 5.8
BIAS
-- TIMEt (s)
NOTE
1. For correct interpolation, the feedrate bias of all the axes must be set
equal.
2. If using circular interpolation (G02, G03), set a small value (1-5).
101
5.6.3 FEEDRATE COMMAND VOLTAGE SETTING (#1408, #1608, #1808)
These parameters are for adjusting the upper limit of the feedrate command voltages in
combined use with Servopacks. Parameters #1408, #1608 and #1808 are for X-, Y- and
Z-axes, respectively. The setting range is 0 to 7. For Servopack, the setting is "7".
5.6.4 POSITION LOOP GAIN (#1474, #1674, #1874) 1 <SET VALUE_ 127
To these position loop gain adjustment parameters, the integer of the following value should
be set (omitting the decimal).
nKp- 2 Ls(=32768) •.............. Expression (_)
Parameters #1474, #1674 and #1874 are for X-, Y- and Z-axes, respectively.
e is the position lag pulses calculated by the formula below:
Maximum rapid traverse feedrate (pulses/s)

e= Kp
= 4× fpc ×---_ ×RPM,. = 4 "fpGRPM°x •.............. Expression (_)

Kp 60Kp
( Where fPc: Output per revolution of pulse generator (pulses/rev)_

k RPMox: Motor speed during rapid feed (rpm) )
Expression (_) is assigned to expression (_).
32768 x 60 x Kp ............... Expression ®

nKp- 4xfpcxRPMo,
K p Ls the position loop gain varying with the servomotor used_ The guideline values
are given below. For details, see Par. 12.1.3 "SERVO PERFORMANCE CHECK". Fine
adjustments of Kp aremade on the Servopack. For details, see Par. 11.2.2.
Table 5.10
Motor Type Kp Value (s-')
Hi-Cup Motor
Cup Motor
30
Minertia Motor J Series
Mineetia Motor RM Series
Print Motor 40
(Example)
When a Minertia motor RM Series (rated speed: 3000 rpm), a 600 pulse/rev feedback PG,
and a Servopack type CPCR-FR are used with K s set at 30s I, the value of n is as follows:
4×600×3000 = 4000 pulses

e = 60 × 30
2's( = 32768) = 8.192

n_p- 4000
Therefore, the parameter is set to "8".

102
5.6.5 SERVO ERROR RANGE (#1555, #1755, #1955) 1 _ SET VALUE=_ 16777216
For the purpose of checking for faulty servo system, these parameters are set to the position
lag values that are not likely to be exceeded when the servo system is in order. Parameters
#1555, #1755 and #1955 are for X-, Y- and Z-axes, respectively. The setting unit "1" is 1
pulse (feedback pulse after 4 multipliers).
When the position lag pulse exceeds the set value, an alarm [No.57, 58, 59: SERVO
ERROR] occurs. Normally, these parameters are set to twice the position deviation pulse
obtained from the position loop gain as follows:
(Example)
In the case of the example under Par. 5.6.4, since _ = 4000, double this value, 8000 is set as
the servo error range.
NOTE
The number of position lag pulses can be seen in the curren_ value display
POSITION ERROR on the CRT control station. See Par. 7.2.3.
5.6.6 POSITION SETTING RANGE (#1406, #1606, #1806) 1 G SET VALUE<_-: 127
These parameters are used to set the permissible range of position lag pulses for
positioning completion judgement. Where the movement command for positioning
completion hold, such as G00, is executed, after the assignment of motion pulses, it holds
until the position pulse lag caused by servo delay comes within this parameter setting value.
And then, next command (next block in MEM operation) is executed.
Near the goal posit_on, as the number of position lag pulses decreases, the moving
speed slows down and the final stopping will be late. To obtain a reasonably short stopping
time, the number of permissible position lag pulses should be set at the maximum value
permitted by the accuracy requirement.
The setting unit "1" represents 1 pulse (feedback pulse after 4 multipliers). When
the parameter is set to P, the position setting range is +_P (pulses). Parameters #1406, #1606
and #1806 are for X-, Y- and Z-axes.
B
Set value = Max. allowable error (_t m) × A
5.6.7 DRIFT OFFSET (#1401, #1601, #1801)
These parameters are used to make available the zero drift offset function of servo including
D/A output section in axis module. If "1" is set, the offset function is available. If "0" is
set, the offset function is not available.
Normally, set to "1." Only during zero-point adjustment of Servopack with axis
module, set to "0."
103
5.7 RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT
REFERENCE POINT
RETURN PARAMETER
CREEP SPEED (PARAMETERS '1505, #1705,#1905)
SPEED ! lAPP? OACH SPEED(PARAMETERS#1504,#1704,#1904) •
DECEL LS
_
II1 = DISTANCE
'1 _-- F,RSTPULSEAFTER DECELLS ON

ZERO
PO,NTPULSE__,L_L.JL.,L[ n
I
III
J_---- FINAL MOVE DISTANCE (NO. OF PULSES)
FERENCE POINT AREA (NO. OF PULSES)

(PARAMETER #1125)
RETURN-TO-REFERENCE
POINT OPERATION
Fig. 5.9
5.7.1 DIRECTION OF RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT (#1403, #1603, #1803)
These parameters are for setting the direction of returning to the reference point. To return
in the + direction, set it to "0", and to return in the - direction, set it to "1". Parameters
#1403, #1603, and #1803 are for the X-, Y- and Z-axes.
NOTE
Do not set values other than "0" and "1".
COORDINATES
C)_
SET
TO PLUS_
DIRECTION
oC cy k SET "1".
_TO MINUS
DIRECTION
_
Fig. 5.10
5.7.2 RETURN-TO-REFERENCE-POINT APPROACH FEEDRATE SETTING

(#1504, #1704, #1904) 1__ SET VALUE__ 3200
These parameters are for setting the return-to-reference-point approach feedrates. The
setting unit "1" represents 7.5 mm/min.
104
Parameters #1504, #1704 and #1904 are for X-, Y- and Z-axes, respectively.
NOTE
The setting range covers up to 3200, but, actually, set values below the rapid
traverse feedrate set by #1500, #1700 and #1900.
5.7.3 RETURN-TO-REFERENCE-POINT CREEP FEEDRATE SETTING

(#1505, #1705, #1905) 1__ SET VALUE__ 3200
These parameters are for setting the creep feedrate for returning to the reference point. The
setting unit "1" represents 7.5 mm/min. Parameters #1505, #1705 and #1905 are for the X-,
Y- and Z-axes, respectively.
NOTE
The creep feedrate should be set below approach feedrates set by parameters
#1504, #1704 and #1904.
5.7.4 RETURN-TO-REFERENCE-POINT APPROACH DISTANCE

(#1556, #1756, #1956) I__SET VALUE <90000000
These parameters are for setting the final distance from the detection of the first reference
point pulse, after the dog trips the slowing LS, during the reference-return process.
The setting unit "1" represents 1 pulse (feedback pulse after 4 multipliers).
Parameters #1556, #1756 and #1956 are for the X-, Y- and Z-axes, respectively.
B
Set value = Approach distance (tt m) x A
NOTE
The approach distance must be set longer than the distance required to
decelerate from the approach feedrate to the creep feedrate. The final
. approach
Where, distance L is roughly
V, : approach feedrate calculated by the following formula:
a : acceleration/deceleration constant
L= V°2
2a
5.7.5 REFERENCE POINT AREA (#1125) 0<SET VALUE <32767
This parameter sets the area in which the reference point signals (ZPX, ZPY, ZPZ) can be
turned on.
The setting unit "1" represents 0.001 mm. Setting the parameter top (mm) means
a reference point area of _P (mm).
105
5.8 SPINDLE PARAMETER SETTING
5.8.1 SPINDLE MODE SETTING (#2004)
When the axis module is used as an analog speed command voltage output device for the
spindle, the spindle mode is set.
Table 5.11
Set Value Contents (Mode)

Bipolar command voltage DURINGFORWARD
• Positive voltage is output during ROTATIQN
"1" forward rotation command. 0+ V/////,_ DURING,.R_.T.A.TIO.t_.REVERSE
• Negative voltage is output during - _.__JJJJ.,,/_
reverse rotation command.
Unipolar command voltage DURINGFORWARD/REVERSE

• Positive voltage is output during ROTATION
"3" forward rotation com mand. 0+ "_////////_'_
• Negative voltage is output during
reverse rotation command.
Note: Be sure to set "1" or "3".
5.8.2 MAXIMUM ROTATION SPEED ON EACH GEAR (#2150, #2151, #2152)
The maximum rotation speed of the spindle on each gear (L, M, H) is set. A gear selection
depends on a combination of spindle gear selection signals (GR1, GR2). For the setup units,
"1"corresponds
to 1rpm. q
Table 5.12
Gear Ratio GRI GR2 Parameter No.
Lo OFF OFF Stop

L ON OFF #2150
M OFF ON #2151
H ON ON #2152
The speed command voltage on each gear is as follows:
S five-digit programmed value (rpm) . Axis module max

Speed command voltage = Each gear parameter setup value (rpm) XD/A output
5.9 NO-USING PARAMETER SETTING
For parameters not used (not listed in Table 5.1), be sure to set "0".
1 06
CONTENTS
6. I/O ALLOCATIONS 108
6.1 I/O SIGNAL TYPES AND ALLOCATION AREA 108
6.2 I/O SIGNAL FORMAT 112
6.3 CAUTIONS ON ALLOCATION 112
6.4 I/O SIGNAL DETERMINATION (PREPARATION FOR ALLOCATION) 113
6.5 ALLOCATION METHOD 114

6.5.1 Allocation Operation (Use of Personal Computer) 115
6.5.2 Explanation of Allocation Commands 115
6.6 STANDARD ALLOCATION 117
6.7 I/O ALLOCATION ADDRESS LIST 122
107
6. I/0 ALLOCATIONS
The standard motion module I/O (input/output) is provided with 64 general and eight
designated input points and 32 general and eight designated output points. Addition of a
micro PC module also enables an additional 64 input and 64 output points. (See Fig. 6.1.)
Motionpack-ll0 adopts I/O allocation system which enables the signals to be

combined for use as desired. Thus, before using them, the input/output signals must be
logically allocated to the signal addresses (simple addresses) in Motionpack-ll0.
Prior to shipping from the factory, they are allocated as listed in Tables 6.1 and 6.2.
Generally, they can be used as is. However, if the motion module is used with difference
functions from the standard allocation or micro PC module is used, new I/O allocation must
be made.
6.! I/OSIGNAL TYPES AND ALLOCATION AREA
The input/output signals are specified with the addresses according to the application, as
shown in Fig. 6.1. The relation between input and output mentioned here is based on the
allocation area: Signals entering the allocation area are called input signals; those
exiting from the area are called output signals.
Thus, note that the relation between input and output is reversed from the motion
module control or micro PC module to the allocation area.
I/0 Signal Types

Input Adress Output Address
• General/special I/O signals of motion module #3000-#3008 #3500-#3504
• Fixed I/O signals for motion module control #4500-#4509 #4000-#4019
• [/0 signals between motion and micro PC modules #5100-#5107 #5000-#5007
• Motion module communication command I/O signals #6000-#6007 #6500-#6507
The I/O signals are explained below according to the application:
108
MOTION MODULE
CONTROL I/O OF
I/0 ALLOCATION MOTION MODULE
GENERAL/SPECIAL INPUT AREA SIGNAL FIXED)
#3000 [
_[ #4000
#3007 I
I TO _
_2_) ,', r INPUT SIGNAL _ TO
_, #3008 - ' PROCESSING
_II SECTION
_'--
"I- GENERAL/SPECIAL OUTPUT _ iI #4019
< #3500 J
TO @ i- .......... _-1,2SE CTION
- ' OFMOTION
#3503 - I #4500 MODULE
[ /t"_ CONTROL
#3504 _ _ I OUTPUTSIGNAL
I I SECTION
PROCESSING _ TO
I
COMMUNICATION INPUT I #4509
I/ #6000
TO I _ I
I
_; COMMUNICATIONOUTPUT
._
z
O
n"
L
,
l,,,°°I TO
#6507
#6007
:@ '
I
I CONNECTED WITH
.,c oPCMODU. .[__

I
I q
I CONTROL [ INTERNAL DOUBLE
PRECISION
KEEP /
INPUT I 1 INPUT RELAY REGISTER MEMORY I
TO LOGIC _ TO TO TO TO
_
z
w "/ __._ EXPANSION
#5200H
#5207 PROGRAM ,_i I[ #5100
#5107 _ ' _ I #5400
#5415 I #5600
#5030 1#58001
#5863
S EXPANSION JEXECUTINGI CONTROL INTERNAL
OUTPUT IISECTION I OUTPUT REGISTER TIMER
#5303 I #5007 #5531 #5739

= _ I #53°°
TO l= I,I H
I #5000
TO 'l _ 1#55001
TO #5700
TO 1
Fig. 6.1 I/O Address and Allocation Area
109
6.1 I/O SIGNAL TYPES AND ALLOCATION AREA (Cont'd)
(1) #3000- #3007 (64 Points) (Table 6.3)
These are motion module general input addresses directly connected to external
connector (1CN, 2CN). In standard allocation, the machine input contacts are read in.
• Input contact signal example:

EDIT, +JX, ZRN, etc.
(2) #3008 (8 Points) (Table 6.3)
This is a motion module designated input address directly connected to external

connector (5CN). In standard allocation, the machine input contacts are read in.
• Input contact signal example:

STR, STP, SVOK, etc.
(3) #3500- #3503 (32 Points) (Table 6.4)
These are motion module general output addresses directly connected to external
connector (2CN). In standard allocation, the output contacts are output to the machine.
• Output contact signal example:

M30, ZPX, RST, etc.
(4) #3504 (8 Points) (Table 6.4)
This is a motion module designated output address directly connected to external

connector (2CN). In standard allocation, the output contacts are output to the machine.
• Output contact signal example:

ALM, MCRD, etc.
(5) #4000- #4019 (160 Points) (Table 6.5)
These are fixed addresses for motion module control. The addresses are fixed to the
signal names in one-to-one correspondence. The operation commands issued to the
motion module are directly controlled as the signal names. Thus, the area becomes the
allocated side for general input and the micro PC module.
In standard allocation, general/designated input (#3000- #3008) is allocated to

#4000 - #4019.
110
(6) #4500 - #4509 (80 Points) (Table 6.6)
These are fixed output.addresses for motion module control. The addresses are fixed to
the signal names in one-to-one correspondence. Motion module control output is sent as
the signal names. Thus, the area becomes the allocating side for general output and the
micro PC module.
In standard allocation, #4500 - #4509 are allocated to general/designated output

(#3500- #3504).
(7) #5000-#5007 (64 Points) (Table 6.7)
These are input addresses to read signal output from the motion module into the micro
PC module program execution block.
The micro PC module analyzes, the sequence ladder by using the read signals.
NOTE
Refer to Micro PC Module Manual for micro PC module output
(addresses #5300 - #5303 directly connected to external connecor).
(8) #5100-#5107 (64 Points) (Table 6.8)
These are addresses to output the sequence ladder analysis results made by the micro
PC module program execution block to the motion module.
Protocols for the signals used in the micro PC module are defined as desired. In
addition to motion module control signals, any signals defined on logic control, register
output, and timer output can be sent to the motion module.
NOTE
Refer to the Micro PC Module Manual for micro PC module input
(addresses #5200- #5207 directly connected to external connector).
(9) #6000- #6007 (64 Points) (Table 6.9)
These are input addresses to read communication commands from the communication
control block to the motion module control block in the motion module with the
communication function (type JAFMC-C027).
(10) #6500- #6507 (64 Points) (Table 6.10)
These are output addresses to return command response from the motion module
control block to the communication control block in the motion module with the
communication function (type JEFMC-C027).
111
I
6.2 I/OSIGNAL FORMAT
The address designation format of an input/output signal is shown below:
I II II II II I
T 1-DIGIT BIT NO.(0-7)

4-DIGIT _/O NO.
The address is represented by five digits consisting of the I/O number and bit
number. One I/O number represents I/O of eight points (bits). One I/O point corresponds to
one bit.
An example of signal addressing for each point is given below:
D7 D6 D1 Do E
_ BIT NO.
tt4ooo EDIT MEM Jo(; RAPID L,-.- SIGNAL NAME

!
-?- I/0 NO.
#4000-D7 (EDIT) is addressed by "#40007".
NOTE
Sometimes, the 4-digit I/O number is also called an address.
6.3 CAUTIONS ON ALLOCATION
(1) ALLOCATION FORMAT
Set one input allocation address to the left and one output allocation address to the right,
as shown below:
I I I I I I I I I I I I ) I I I I I I I
t__._ INPUT ALLOCATION 1 OUTPUT ALLOCATION

ADDRESS ADDRESS
112
(2) ALLOCATION DIRECTION AND COMBINATION
Allocation can be made only from the input side to the output side in the I/O direction
based on the allocation area shown in Fig. 6.1 as reference. That is, allocation can be
made only in correct arrow direction combinations, as shown below:
I/O ALLbCATION AREA I/0 ALLOCATION AREA

r
, r ]
--i_,
................ = --m-.. ---i =
I I I
___J
• I ................. 4
----1
_
.-- ---.1 4
L .......... L .......... ]
Combination Enable Combination Disable
(3) MULTIPLE ALLOCATION
A single input signal can be allocated to more than one output signal, but more than one
input signal cannot be allocated to a single output signal. If erroneous specification is
made, the last allocation becomes valid.
l INPUT _ OUTPUT INPUT I -I OUTPUT J
Allocation Enable Allocation Disable
6.4 I/O SIGNAL DETERMINATION

(PREPARATION FOR ALLOCATION)
To prepare allocation, the signal allocation destinations are determined conforming to the
machine specifications. The necessary input signal names, output signal names, and
external connector pin numbers should be listed to preclude setting errors such as omission
and duplicate registration. Allocation examples are given below:
Example 1: Contact signal input to general input address #30033 (1CN-27) is used as +JX
(+X-axis start signal). +JX is contained in the fixed address for motion
module control, #40030. Thus, allocation becomes "#30033 --> #40030".
Example 2: ZPY (Y-axis reference point position signal) is output to the output address for
micro PC module control, #50007, and sequence processing is performed in the
micro PC module. ZPY is contained in the fixed address for motion module
control, #45031. Thus, allocation becomes "#45031----#50007".
113
6.4 I/OSIGNAL DETERMINATION
(PREPARATION FOR ALLOCATION) (Cont'd)
(Allocation Table Example)
• Input Allocation . Output Allocation !

_ Signal .Name
ConnectorPin No. Inputsignal
Address0uiputsignelAddressConnectorPin No. I
#40000 / RAPID
.....(i_i_-N;ii
.....T....... T.......
_666i ....... //_666i
........
_ "J6_.......
:............................
...............................................................
i/_666_ .....................................
HA_DC_ ...........................
Example (I CN-27) #30033 #40030 _';[JX["i'+X[axiss[arii ........
I-' ...................................................................................................
....... ....... I ............................

I............................ I .......................
.
.............................................................................
:,i;"(7:_/_i_"R_'&:g'_e"
.....
Example 2-_ _ .......
_.4...50.3.1
"...............
_.5..0...0.D.7
".......
I ...........
_ ...........
.i....Z...
_.......
_.q.i_.Lpg-s--i.tJg._r_.
........
6.5 ALLOCATION METHOD i
After completion of preparation for allocation in Par. 6.4, allocation data is created on a
personal computer (e.g. PC8201 manufactured by NEC or another personal computer having
equivalent a0mmunication function to PC8201).
• Commands That Can be Used:

• CIO (data all clear)
• DIO (data batch change) from personal computer to motion module
• UIO (data save) from motion module to personal computer
• WIO (partial change of data)
• RIO (data check)
114
6.5.1 ALLOCATION OPERATION (Use of Personal Computer)
• Operation Procedure:
(_) Set the system switch (2SW) on the motion module panel front to 9.
(_) Connect the personal computer to motion module connector 3CN.
(_) Set the personal computer communication function:
9600 BAUD For using the PC8201, set the communication

EVEN PARITY function as follows:
8-BIT
1-STOP BIT STAT--8E81XS
XON/OFF CONTROLL
After setting, open the communication port by placing PC8201 in terminal mode.
(_) Turn on Motionpack-110.
(_) Enter commands through the personal computer.
For the commands, see Par. 6.5.2.
® After completion of command entry, turn off Motionpack-ll0.
(_) Disconnect the personal computer (when the CRT control station is included).
(_) Connect the CRT control station (when it is included).
® Restore the motion module system switch (2SW) to 0.
(J_ Turn on Motionpack-110.
(_ Check input/output on the DIAGNOSIS screen of the CRT control station.
6.5.2 EXPLANATION OF ALLOCATION COMMANDS
(1) CIO (Data All Clear)
Enter only the command.
(2) DIO (Data Batch Change)
Create data in the format shown below by using the personal computer prior to
entering the command. After the command is entered, the data is transferred.
DIO [CR]
% [ CR)
#30006 $I:40005 [CR)
#30046 #40020 [CR)
= Create on personal'computer.
#45004 #35015 [CR)
#45012 #35031 [CR)
% [CR)
NOTE
Execute the CIO command before DIO command execution. 115

6.5.2 EXPLANATION OF ALLOCATION COMMANDS (Cont'd)
(3) UlO(DataSave)
Beforehand, make the personal computer ready to receive. Next, transfer the command.
After the command is analyzed in the motion module, data is transferred in the same
format as the DIO command from the motion module.
(4) WlO (Partial Change of Data)
First, enter the command. Next, enter new allocation data in the format of "#input
data, #output data[CR]." Enter as many data pieces as necessary in the format for
change. Finally, enter "%[CR]."
WIO [CR_
#45031 #35000 (CR_
#30011 #40011 [CR_
% [CR_
(5) RIO (Data Check)
First, enter the command. Next, enter the allocation data to be checked in the format
of "#input (output) data [CR_. " After it is entered, the allocated data is sent from the
motion module. Check as many data pieces as necessary in the format. Finally, enter
"% [CR]."
RIO [CR)
#45031 [CR_
#45031
#30011 --,
-_ #40001
#40011 [CR]
[CRI (LFI
[LF] } (From motion module to personal computer)
% [CR_
116
6.6 STANDARD ALLOCATION
The motion module I/O (general/special) has been standardizedly factory-allocated before
shipping as listed in Tables 6.1 and 6.2. If other allocation is needed, the motion module
requires I/O reallocation.
Table 6.1 Motion Module Input Standard Allocation
Allocation Side AllocatedSide (Signal Fixed)
ConnectorPin No. Input Signal Address Control Input Signal Address [ Signal Name
1CN-2 # 30000 # 40000 RAPID
1CN-34 # 30001 # 40001 JOG
ICN-3 # 30002 # 40002 HANDLE
1CN-19 # 30003 # 40003 STEP
# 40004
ICN-4 # 30005 # 40005 DNC
1CN-20 # 30006 # 40006 MEM
1CN-36 # 30007 # 40007 EDIT
1CN-5 # 30010 # 40010 OV1
1CN-21 # 30011 # 40011 OV2
1CN-37 # 30012 # 40012 OV4
1CN-6 # 30013 # 40013 OV8
1CN-22 # 30014 # 40014 OV16
1CN-38 # 30015 # 40015 ROV1
1CN-7 # 30016 # 40016 ROV2
• 1CN-23 # 30017 #.40017 ROV3
1CN-39 # 30020 # 40020 JOV1
1CN-8 # 30021 # 40021 JOV2
1CN-24 # 30022 # 40022 JOV4
1CN-40 # 30023 # 40023 JOV8
# 40024
# 40025
# 40026
# 40027
1CN-26 # 30030 # 40030 +JX
1CN-42 # 30031 # 40031 +JY
1CN-11 # 30032 # 40032 +JZ
# 40033
# 40034
# 40035
# 40036
# 40037
1CN-43 # 30034 # 40040 -JX
1CN-12 # 30035 # 40041 -JY
1CN-28 # 30036 # 40042 -JZ
# 40043
# 40044
.............................................................................. I ...........................................................
# 40045
# 40046
# 40047
1CN-13 # 30040 # 40050 HX
1CN-29 # 30041 # 40051 HY
1CN-45 # 30042 # 40052 HZ
# 40053
# 40054
# 40055
# 40056
# 40057
5CN-1 # 30080 # 40060 STR
5CN-2 # 30081 # 40061 STP
5CN-4 # 30083 # 40062 SKIP *
• Requires positively an allocation.
117
6.6 STANDARD ALLOCATION (Cont'd)
Table 6.1 Motion Module Input Standard Allocation (Cont'd)
AllocationSide AllocatedSide(SignalFixed)
ConnectorPin No. Input SignalAddress ControlInput Signal Address Signal Name
1CN-17 # 30054 # 40063 ZRN
1CN-14 # 30043 # 40064 MP1
1CN-30 # 30044 # 40065 MP2
# 40066
# 40067 •
1CN-47 # 30050 # 40070 SBK
1CN-9 # 30024 # 40071 PMEM
1CN-32 # 30052 # 40072 ACR
1CN-48 # 30053 # 40073 NEG
# 40074 EINV
1CN-32 # 30052 # 40075 ABSO_ZPOINT
1CN-18 # 30056 # 40076 MLK
1CN-27 # 30033 # 40077 PRT
2CN-5 # 30070 # 40080 SK1
2CN-21 # 30071 # 40081 SK2
2CN-37 # 30072 # 40082 SK3
2CN-6 # 30073 # 40083 SK4
2CN-22 # 30074 # 40084 SK5
2CN-38 # 30075 # 40085 SK6
2CN-7 # 30076 # 40086 SK7
2CN-23 # 30077 # 40087 SK8
1CN-25 # 30025 # 40090 RRN
1CN-41 # 30026 # 40091 FRN
1CN-10 # 30027 # 40092 SSTP
# 40093
1CN-44 # 30037 # 40107 TBXON
1CN-46 # 30045 # 40095 GR1
1CN-15 # 30046 # 40096 GR2
1CN-31 # 30047
5CN-6 # 30085 # 40100 MRDY
# 40101
# 40102 I --
5CN-3 # 30082 # 40103 [ RESET
# 40104
# 40105
1CN-49 # 30055 # 40106 FIN
# 40107
# 40110 Ell
# 40111 El2
# 40112 El4
# 40113 El8
# 40114 E21
# 40115 E22 ".
# 40116 E24
# 40117 E28
# 40120 E31
# 40121 E32
# 40122 E34
# 40123 E38
--I
# 40124 E41
# 40125 E42
# 40126 E44
# 40127 E48
# 40130 E51
# 40131 E52
# 40132 E54
# 40133 E58
118
• Table 6.1 Motion Module Input Standard Allocation (Cont'd)
Allocation Side Allocated Side (Signal Fixed)

Connector Pin No. InputSignal Address ControllnputSignal Address Signal Name
# 40134 E61
# 40135 E62
# 40136 E64
# 40137 E68
# 40140 E71
# 40141 E72
# 40142 E74
# 40143 E78
# 40144 E81
# 40145 E82
# 40146 E84
# 40147 E88
5CN-5 # 30084 # 40150 SVOK
# 40151
# 30086 # 40152 _--V'-A-'L-M*
:i # 30087 # 40153 BATALM*

1CN-16 # 30051 # 40154 ER
1CN-50 .' # 30057 # 40155 ESP
# 40156
# 40157
2CN-2 # 30060 # 40160 Wll
2CN-34 # 30061 # 40161 W12
2CN-3 # 30062 # 40162 W14
2CN-19 # 30063 # 40163 W18
2CN-35 # 30064 # 40164 W21
2CN-4 I # 30065 # 40165 W22
2CN-20 [t # 30066 # 40166 W24
2CN-36 # 30067 # 40167 W28
# 40170
# 40171
# 40172
# 40173
# 40174
# 40175
# 40176
# 40177
# 40180
# 40181
# 40182
# 40183
# 40184 -- o
i # 40185 --
# 40186
# 40187
# 40190
# 40191
! # 40192 --
# 40193
# 40194
# 40195
# 40196
I # 40197 --
*Requires positively an allocation.
119
6.6 STANDARD ALLOCATION (Cont'd)
Table 6.2 Motion Module Output Standard Allocation
Allocation Side(Signal Fixed) AllocatedSide

Signal Name Control Output SignalAddress Output Signal Address ConnectorPin No.
STL # 45000 # 35000 / 2CN-39
SPL # 45001 # 35001 1 2CN-8
OP # 45002 # 35002 2CN-24
DEN # 45003 # 35003 2CN-40
MOO # 45004 # 35004 2CN-9
-- # 45005
M02 # 45006 # 35006 2CN-41
M30 # 45007 # 35007 2CN-10
ALM # 45010 # 35040 5CN-14
RST # 45011 # 35013 2CN-27
-- # 45012
MCRD* # 45013 # 35043 5CN-17
SVON* # 45014 # 35044 5CN-18
-- # 45015
-- # 45016
-- # 45017
MF # 45020 # 35010 2CN-26
SF # 45021 # 35012 2CN-11
TF # 45022 # 35011 2CN-42
-- # 45023
-- # 45024
-- # 45025
-- # 45026
-- # 45027
ZPX # 45030 # 35014 2CN-43
ZPY # 45031 # 35015 2CN-12
ZPZ # 45032 # 35016 2CN-28
# 35017 2CN-44
-- # 45034
-- # 45035
-- # 45036
-- # 45037
-- # 45040
-- # 45041
-- # 45042
-- # 45043
-- # 45044
-- # 45045
-- # 45046
-- # 45047
Mll # 45050 # 35020 2CN-13
M12 # 45051 # 35021 2CN-29
M14 # 45052 # 35022 2CN-45
M18 # 45053 # 35023 2CN-14
M21 # 45054 # 35024 2CN-30
M22 # 45055 # 35025 2CN-46
M24 # 45056 # 35026 2CN-15
M28 # 45057 # 35027 2CN-31
Tll # 45060 # 35030 2CN-47
T12 # 45061 # 35031 2CN-16
T14 # 45062 # 35032 2CN-32
T18 # 45063 # 35033 2CN-48
T21 # 45064 # 35034 2CN-17
T22 # 45065 # 35035 2CN-40
T24 # 45066 # 35036 2CN-18
T28 # 45067 # 35037 2CN-50
All # 45070
A12 # 45071
* Requires positively an allocation.

120
Table 6.2 Motion Module Output Standard Allocation (Cont'd)
Allocation Side(Signal Fixed) Allocated Side

Signal Name Control Output Signal Address Output Signal Address Connector Pin No.
A14 # 45072
A18 # 45073
A21 # 45074
A22 # 45075
A24 # 45076
A28 # 45077
Sll # 45080
S12 # 45081
S14 # 45082
S18 # 45083
$21 # 45084
$22 # 45085
$24 # 45086
$28 # 45087
-- # 45090
-- # 45091
-- # 45092
-- # 45093
-- # 45094
................
- .................................
#..4_o9_
.............................................................................................
-- # 45096
-- # 45097
121
6.7 I/O ALLOCATION ADDRESS LIST
Tables 6.3 to 6.10 show addresses for each application.
Table 6.3 Motion Module Input Allocation Address
-""'----,_it s D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO Remarks
Address _ i
1CN-36 1CN-20. 1CN-4 1CN:35 1CN-19 1CN-3 1CN-34 1CN-2
3000 " i *-- Set by user.

1CN-23 1CN-7 1CN-38 1CN-22 1CN-6 1CN-37 1CH-21 1CN-5 i.
3001 .... 4--Setbyuser.
3002 1CN-10 1CN-41 1CN-25 1CN-9 1CN-40 1CN-24 1CN-8 1CN-39 ,--- Set by user.
1CN-44 1CN-28 1CN-12 1CN-43 1CN-27 1CN-11 1CN-42,1CN-26
3003 ......................... *--Setby user.
1CN-31 1CN-15 1CN-46 1CN:30 1CN-14 1CN-45 1CN-29 1CN-13

3004 _ Set by user.
1CN-50 1CN-18 1CN-49i.lCN-17 1CN-48 1CN-32ilCN-16 1CN-47

# 3005 I *- Set by user.
2CN-36 2CN-20 2CN-4 2CN-3512CN-19 2CN-3 2CN-34 2CN-2
:_3006 *--Setbyuser.
2CN-23!2CN-7 2CN-38 2CN-22 2CN-6 2CN-37 2CN-21 2CN-5 i
# 3007 -- Set by user.
!
5CN-6 5CN-5 5CN-4 5CN-3 5CN-2 5CN-1
3008 *BA_ *SV-ALM *"SKiP _-- Set by user.
Note: Signal with * cannot be allocated for other application, because they are fixed.
Table 6.4 Motion Module Output Allocation Address
D7 D6 D5 . D4 D3 D2 D1 DO Remarks
_3500 2CN-101.2CN-41_[_2CN-25'2CN-9
2CN-40 2CN-24 2CN-8 2CN-39
] *---Set by user.
3501 ......
2CN-44 2CN-28 2CN-12 2CN-43 2CN-27 2CN-11 2CN-42 2CN-26 -,- Set by user.
2CN-31 2CN-15 2CN-46 2CN-30 2CN-14 2CN-45 2CN-29 2CN-13
#3502 ' •-- Set by user.
3503 2CN-50 2CN-18 2CN-49 2CN-17 2CN-48 2CN-32 .......

2CN-1612CN-47 ,-- Set by user.
[ 5CN-18 5CN-17 15CN-14

3504 ....... * SVON * MCRD ............... ;AL'_i'"
Note: Signal with*cannot be allocated for_ other application, because they are fixed.
1 22
Table 6.5 Motion Module Control Input Address (Signal Fixed)
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO Remarks
_4ooo __-_______.
EDIT MEM DNC STEP HANDLE JOG RAPID
ROV 3 ROV 2 ROV 1 OV 16 OV8 OV4 OV 2 OV 1
_4oo2 _______/ JOV 8 JOV 4 JOV 2 JOV 1
_4oo3 _______/ +JZ +JY +JX
._oo, _______/ --JZ --JY --JX
_4oo_ ___._____ HZ HY HX
_4oo________/MP 2 MP 1 ZRN SKIP STP STR
#,007 _ __-_____
PRT MLK EINV NEG ACR PMEM S_
#,oo_ ___
SK8 SK7 SK6
...--.___
SK5 SK4 SK3
_.__
SK2 SKI
#,oo9 _____.__.f_
GR2 GR1 SSTP FRN RRN
_,,o,o _TBXON_'__-_____
""FIN.... RESET MRDY
.4o,1 __
E28 E24
______J
E22 E2, El8 E,4 E,2 E,,
E48 E44 E42 E41 E38 E34 E32 E31
E68 E64 E62 E61 E58 E54 E52 E5,
E88 E84 E82 E81 E78 E74 E72 E71
#_o,_________
ESP ER BATAL_,i SVALM SVOK
W28 W24 W22 W21 W'8 W14 W12 W 11
._0,7 ________
.40,_ __ _____.i_
_40,9 _______ _
123
6.7 I/O ALLOCATION ADDRESS LIST (Cont'd)
Table 6.6 Motion Module Control Output Address (Signal Fixed)
D2 D1 DO Remarks
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3
_45oo___ -..-.S_ __.._ _

M30 M02 MOO DEN OP SPL STL
SVON MCRD RST ALM
TF SF MF
ZPS ZPZ ZPY ZPX
M28 M24 M22 M21 M18 M14 M12 Mll
T28 T24 T22 T21 T18 TI4 T12 TII
_4_o_ ________
A28 A24 A22 A2I A18 A14 A12 All
_4_o_ ________
$28 $24 $22 $21 S18 S14 S12 Sll
Table 6.7 Micro PC Module Control Output Address
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO Remarks
"*- Set by user (

_oo, __ _____._ *-- Set by user
__oo_.______.___J
'.-'- Set by user
_,oo3 ________ ..--- Set by user
-,- Set by user
*-- Set by user
*- Set by user
_ Set by user,
124
Table 6.8 Micro PC Module Control Input Address
D.7 D6 D5 D4
D3 D2 D1 DO Remarks
5,00 _______/J
,--- Set by user.
_51Ol /_ __ ___.J_
Set byuser.
51o2 ________--"_!
!_ Set by user.
#5103 ________ _ Setbyuser.

_5104 ________1
__ - Setbyuser
_5106 ____ _ _ •,---
Setbyuser.
5107 _ _ _ _ _ _ _i _','- ,-- Setbyuser.

Set by user.
Table 6.9 Motion Module Communication Input Address
D7 D6 D5
D4 D3 D2 D1 DO Remarks
_6ooo________
Set by user.
_6oo1 _______._
•-- Set by user.
_6002 _______/
Set by user.
_6oo3 _______-_'_
•-- Set by user.
,,---Set by user.
_6oo5________
_Set by user.
_oo6 ________
---Set by user.
# 6007
_""'__-_______
/1 *- Set by user.
Table 6.10 Motion Module Communication Output Address
D7 D6 Remarks
D5 D4 D3 D2 I)1 l)0
6_oo_______/ ,-Set by user.
65Ol________
Set by user.
Set by user.
Set by user.
g6504 ________.____._._/ _Set by user.

_65o5 ______
uy
us°
_ Set by user.
I _Set by user.
CONTENTS
7. OPERATION OF CRT CONTROL STATION f28
7.1 CHARACTER DISPLAY AND KEYS f28

7.1.1 CRT Character Display 128
7.1.2 Function Keys 129
7.1.3 Address Keys 129
7.1.4 Data Keys f30
7.1.5 Next Key 130

7.1.6 Page Keys 13f
7.1.7 Cursor Key s 73f
7.1.8 Edit Keys 131
7.1.9 Memory Data Keys 132
7.1.10 Reset Key f32
7.2 DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION 133

7.2.1 General Display 133
7.2.2 Command Data Display 135
7.2.3 Display of Current Position Values 135
7.2.4 Display of Alarm Codes 137
7.2.5 Displaying State of I/O Signals 138

7.2.6 Display of Registered Program Number 139
7.3 DISPLAYING AND WRITING PARAMETERS I39
7.4 DISPLAYING AND WRITING OFFSET DATA f4f
7.5 EDITING PROGRAMS 143

7.5.1 Program Register and Call I43
7.5.2 Insertion of Programs 144
7.5.3 Altering Programs 144
7.5.4 Program Erase 145
7.5.5 Search Functions 145
1 27
7. OPERATION OF CRT CONTROL STATION
This chapter explains the CRT control station as the visible face of Motionpack-110.
7.1 CHARACTER DISPLAY AND KEYS
Fig. 7.1 shows an overall view of the CRT control station. The names and functions of
operator components are as follows.
585-186
_ Fig. 7.1 CRT Control Station
7.1.1 CRT CHARACTER DISPLAY
According to each operation, this display indicates alpha-numerical data in regular size
(1×1) or exp4nded size (3×3).
CRT size: 9 i3ches _ 32CHARACTERS

(ll lillllllllll ]
/li ill!llltll'
Maximum nuh_ber of characters: /fl Itlifl!i! '
/il ii!!!!lL_'
32 characters × 16 lines = 512 characters _II II1_1_t'
(at regular size)
Numerals (0 through 9, -,.1

Indicating characters:
Alphabetic characters [A through Z _ ..
Special characters [ ; (EOB),/(slash) _ _
Fig. 7.2
128
7.1.2 FUNCTION KEYS
These are the selection keys for displaying and writing-in. Depressing a key provides a
corre_sponding function and the key light.
II 585-192
Fig. 7.3
(1) _ (Alarm) key: This key is for displaying an alarm code. This function is
automatically selected when the power is turued on.
(2) [_ (Diagnosis) key: This key is for displaying input/output signal status.
(3) [_ (Parameter) key: This key is for displaying and writing-in parameters.
(4) _ (Auxiliary) key: This is an auxiliary key.
(5) _ (Command) key: This key is displaying command data for automatic operation.
(6) _ (Program) key: This key is for displaying or writing-in programs.
(7) [_ (Position) key: This key is for displaying various current positions.
(8) _ (Offset Data) key: This key is for displaying or writing-in offset data.
ALM DGM PRM AUXL COM PROG POS AUX2
7.1.3 ADDRESS KEYS
These keys are for designating address characters when writing-in various data.
585-192
Fig. 7.4
129
7.1.4 DATA KEYS
These keys consist of 15 keys in total, such as @ through [_ , [-_, [_], [_], 1
, and _] and can be used for writing-in of such numeral values as offset values,
parameter data, numeral values of programs and so on.
Fi 9. 7.5
(1) _] to _] , [_ (Minus) keys: For input of numeral data.
(2) [_] (Decimal Point) key: For input of decimal point.
(3) [_] (Cancellation) key: For cancellation of the numeric value or address data
erroneouslykeyed.
(4) _ (Write) key: For storing address data (=words) keyed by address keys and data
keys into buffer storage.
(5) _-_ (Shift) key: This is an auxiliary key.
7.1.5 NEXT KEY
key is used at position cancel. See Par. 7.2.3.
585-i92
Fig. 7.6
130
7.1.6 PAGE KEYS
The page is used to display the next page or previous page when CRT screen is regarded as
a page.
For example, use this key for displaying the next group of parameter data when
[_ (parameter) has been selected and a group of parameter data are being displayed.
This is just like turning the pages of a book.
(1) Depressing ]_] key displays the next page.
(2) Depressing I_] key displays the previous page.
(3) Keeping the PAGE key depressed makes the page step automatically forward or
backward, as selected.
7.1.7 CURSOR KEYS
The cursor control key is used to move the cursor forward or backward on CRT screen.
For example, if [_ (parameter) has been selected and a group of parameter data
is being displayed, this key can be used to move the cursor to the position of parameter
number to be designated.
backward.
(1) Depressing _ key moves the cursor
(2) Depressing _--_ key moves the cursor forward.
(3) Keeping the cursor control key depressed makes the

cursor move automatically backward or forward, as
selected, i58_-192
Fig. 7.7
7.1.8 EDIT KEYS
These keys are for editing a program stored in the memory.
(1) _ (Erase) key:

For erasing data in the memory.
(2) _ (Insert) key:

For inserting data in the memory.
(3) _-_ (Alter) key:

For altering data in the memory. _ 585-192
Fig. 7.8
131
7.1.9 MEMORY DATA KEYS
These keys are used to start the operation related to the memory except in the automatic
operation. They are effective only in edit mode.
(1) [_] (Out) key:

This key is to output various data from the memory to personal computers or the like
through data input/output interface.
(2) [_] (In)key:

This key is to store various data from personal computers or the like into the memory
through data input/output interface.
(3) r_ (Verify) key:

This key is to examine and compare data in the memory with data in files of personal
computers.
7.1.10 RESET KEY
This key is to reset the internal status.
585-]92
Fig. 7.9
(1) The following operations can be executed by depressing [] key:
(a) Move command cancel

(b) Buffer_clear
(c) Alarm code release, if the cause has been eliminated
(d) Offset cancel
(e) Auxiliary function cancel
(f) Memory rewind
(g) Sequence number reset
(2) The following will not be affected by operating the RESET key.
(a) Current position of each axis

(b) F-commands
(c) T-commands
(d) Offset values and parameter data
NOTE
Depressing the RESET key or remote reset pushbutton (RESET input) is
defined as "reset operation " in this manual.
1 32
7.2 DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION
7.2.1 GENERAL DISPLAY
The following display is made at both the top and bottom of the screen of CRT, irrespective
of the FUNCTION key currently selected.
1) FUNCTION MESSAGE
ALARM
COMMAND PROGRAM NUMBER
DIAGNOSIS SEQUENCE NUMBER
PROGRAM
(10) SIMPLE ERROR ALARM

DISPLAY (BLINKING)
INPUT ERROR
ALREADY IN ]
(9) READY STATE

585-205 DISPLAYED WHEN
SYSTEM IS READY {RDYt
x_7) [BUF)
(4) (5) I/O OR _ (8) ALARM DISPLAY
fNDATA EDITDISPLAY_ ALARM
ORBATTERY
FAILURE
ISrALM
1
(BLINKING) _NER _ DISPLAYED (BLINKING) [BAT
OUT \ A/B
AS (6) MT-F!N WAIT,
ALT DWELL, FEED DISPLAY
! [M, T, DWELL)
D Fig.7.10
(1) Function Message
Any one of the following seven function messages corresponding to the applicable
function key is displayed at the top of the CRT screen.
ALARM COMMAND
DIAGNOSIS PROGRAM
PARAMETER POSITION
OFFSET
(2) Program Number
Program number under execution is always displayed with "0" and four subsequent
digits on the top line of the CRT screen, irrespective of the function key selected.
(3) Sequence Number
Sequence number under execution is always displayed with "N" and four subsequent
digits on the top line of the CRT screen, irrespective of the function key selected.
(4) Display of Keying Data
Keyed-in data are displayed. Up to ten characters can be shown. Data are processed
the contents.
by using [] key, _ or _ key, depending on
133
7.2.1 GENERAL DISPLAY (Cont'd)
(5) IN/OUT and Editing Display
The following messages are displayed during input/output of various data, address
search, or editing.
"IN "- .............. Inputting data

"VER " •........ Verifying data
"OUT " •........ Outputting data
"AS ". ........... Address searching
"ALT " •........ Altering data in EDIT mode
"INS " • ........... Insering data in EDIT mode
"ERS " •........ Erasing data EDIT mode
(6) Display of M, S, T-FIN Signal Waiting and Dwelling
"M " •........... Waitting FIN signal of M-command

"S " •.............. Waitting FIN signal of S-command
"T " •.............. Waitting FIN signal of T-command
"DWELL " ..- Dwelling
M, S, and T are displayed independently of each other.
(7) Display of the State of Buffer Full
"BUF " •........ Displayed upon completion of advanced reading.
(8) Display of Alarm
Alarm is continuously displayed until the cause is removed and reset operation is made.
"ALM " •..... Indicates an alame state.
"BAT " •..... Indicates battery alarm.
"A/B " •..... Indicates both the alarm and battery alarm.
(9) Display of Ready State
"RDY " •..... Indicates that the system is normal and operable.
(10) Display of Simple Errors
Error displays shown below are for minor errors that may occur during keying or
searching operation different from the alarm display. If an error display of this kind
occurs, it can be erased by depressing some key (normally [] key).
"INPUT ERROR!"- ........ Format error during inputting keyed-in data.

"ALREADY IN!" • ........ A program of the same number is already stored.
"MEMORY OVER!" • ..... Memory capacity is exceeded when storing a program.
"PROGRAM OVER!" ... Namber of registered programs exceed 99.
"NOT FOUND!" • ........... Desired data has not been found by searching.
1 34
7.2.2 COMMAND DATA DISPLAY
Command data (COMMAND) are displayed. This shows the block data under execution in
an automatic mode other than EDIT mode. Conditions of data to be displayed are as
follows.
(1) Contents of active register are

displayed during automatic
operation or feed hold. 0UTPUT
COMMAND
OUTPUT
(2) Contents of the buffer register are COMMAND
displayed while the control is ;ETREPEATS
NO. OF VALUES
stopped at a block end. If the OFSUBPROGRAM
buffer register is blank (BUF is 585-206
not displayed), the contents of the
DISPLAY OF NON-MODAL G CODE
previously executed block are
displayed. --DISPLAY OF G CODE UNDER EXECUTION
Fig. 7.11 Example of Display of Command Data
7.2.3 DISPLAY OF CURRENT POSITION VALUES[_
Current position values can be displayed at any time irrespective of the mode. The following
operation is accomplighed. When [_ key is depressed, one of the following displays can
be made.
• POSITION (INCREMENT)
• POSITION (UNIVERSAL)
• POSITION (AXIS)
• POSITION (ERROR)
(1) POSITION (INCREMENT)
Display in this case is:
(a) Continuous travel distance up to the end

point of the block in memory run mode.
(b) Travel distance up to the point of start of

manual operation in manual mode. Display
of manual increment values can be canceled
by setting the mode to memory run, then
inputting start signals.
585-207
Fig. 7.12 Current Position Display

(INCREMENT) Example
135
(Cont'd)
7.2.3 DISPLAY OF CURRENT POSITION VALUES[_
(2) POSITION
(UNIVERSAL) 9
(a) The position in the coordinate system set up by G92 is displayed.
(b) Universal display of the axis for which position cancel is made in manual operation
mode is Canceled and set to 0 regardless of the value displayed up to this time.
Operate the keys as follows:
Depress [_] , _] successively. X 0.000 is displayed.
Depress _-_ , _ successively. Y 0.000 is displayed.
Depress [-_ , [_ successively. Z 0.000 is displayed.
585_208
Fig. 7.13 Current Position Display(UNIVERSAL)Example
(3) POSITION(AXIS)
Each moved distance of actual axes after returning to reference point is displayed. Even
if G29 is commanded, the display is not affected by the command.
585-209
Fig. 7.14 Current Position Display (AXiS)Example
1 36
(4) POSITION (ERROR)
Display in this case is:
(a) Contents of position error register are displayed.
(b) Use this position error function when adjusting a servo system of a machine. Do not
use this function in other cases.
X 2. 488
1. 243
1.
D BUF RDY
585-210
Fig. 7.15 Current Position Display (ERROR)Example
7.2.4 DISPLAY OF ALARM CODES [_
D If an alarm
alarm
state
and battery
occurs,
alarm)
"ALM "
is displayed
(for alarm),
" "BAT
on the lowest line of the CRT screen,
" (for battery
regardless
alarm) or "A/B " (for
of
mode or function. In this case, the detail of the alarm can be displayed by the following
operation.
Depress [_ key. Alarm code and alarm message are displayed. By removing
the cause of alarm and then depressing B key, the alarm state and alarm display can
be released. For the details of alarm codes, refer to Par. 13.1 "ALARM CODE LIST"
585-21l
Fig. 7.16 Alarm Display
1 37
7.2.5 DISPLAYING STATE OF I/O SIGNALS
When F-_ function key is depressed, ON/OFF state of the input/output signals is displayed
on CRT_screen. The display of the state of input/output signals is always possible including
during automatic operation.
585-222
HEXADECIMAL DISPLAY
Fig. 7.17 Example of DGN Display
For the purpose of maintenance, etc., only the display of the state of input/output
signals is made in 16-place digits at the right of screen.
(1) Operating Method for Input/Output Signal Display
1. Depress [_ key.
The state of input/output signals on the page including the designated diagnosis
number is displayed in a 16-place digit, consisting of "1" or "0".
2. Enter the diagnosis number to be displayed and then depress _ or _ key.

Then, the display is switched to the page including the diagnosis number.
3. Depress _J key.
The cursor moves to the position of diagnosis number plus one. When this key is
depressed in succession, the cursor moves downward. When the cursor comes to the
lowest line, the display is switched to the next page.
4. Depress _'_ key.

The cursor moves to the position of diagnosis number minus one. When this key is
depressed in succession, the cursor moves upward. When the cursor comes to the
highest line, the display is switched to the previous page.
5. Depress _J key.
The next page is displayed.
6. Depress _--] key.

The previous page is displayed.
1 38
7.2.6 DISPLAY OF REGISTERED PROGRAM NUMBER U
All the program numbers registered are displayed.
(1) Select the alarm display and depress _ key.
(2) All the numbers of programs already registered are displayed. Page of the table can be
turned by depressing _keyor _key.
DIRECTORY 00782 N0000
00003 000?? 00258 00625
000il 00149 00362 00789 .

00020 00152 00369 00852
08838 0015? 00451 08963
00033 00159 00456 00969
RDY
585-225
Fig. 7.18 Reg!stered Program Number Display
NOTE
This display is used only for looking at the registered programs. Registration
of program numbers can be made in EDIT mode. Registration up to 99
programs is possible.
7.3 DISPLAYING AND WRITING PARAMETERS
In this system, various parameters are stored in the internal memory, and the operating
conditions of the system, such as quick feed rate, are determined by the contents of the
parameters. For details, refer to Section 5. "PARAMETERS". Display of parameters
can be made, at any time, including the time of automatic operation, irrespective of the
display of parameters.
(1) Depress key. The parameter number and the contents are displayed.
(2) Kinds of Parameters
There are two kinds of parameters: bit display type and ordinary decimal digit display
type.
139
7.3 DISPLAY AND WRITING PARAMETERS [_ (Cant'd)
Parameter numbers of bit display type are #I000 through #1009. Parameters
larger than #Ii00 are of decimal digit display type.
PARAMETER 00000 N0000

PARAMETER
_1550 1410065407
? ;:1551
• E1001 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 159 _1552 4096
_1002 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 128
W1553 0
;:1003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 _1554 0
;:1004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ;:1555 65536
;:1005 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ;:1556 5000
;:1006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ;:1557 167772160
;:1007 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ;:1558 1677721
;:1008 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ;:1559 0
_1009 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
RDY RDY
585-219 585-220
iFig. 7.19 Example of Parameters Fig. 7.20 Example of Parameters
(Bit Display Type) (Ordinary Digit Display Type)
(3) Display of Parameters
(a) Key in the parameter number and depress key or key. However, keying
of "'#" is not required. A maximum of ten sets of parameter numbers and the
contents can be displayed simultaneously.
,..
(b) Designation
ClOT screen
of parameter
can be updated
number
by
can be updated
key or _
by
key.
N key or key, and the
(4) Writing Parameters
Set the optimum values of parameters suited to the performance and purpose of the
machine.
(a) F_r bit display type
1. Designate the parameter number to be written.
2. Depress _ key.
Cursor will move from parameter number to bit display, and the bit position of D7
is first designated.
3. Depress _ key.
The cursor will be shifted by 1 bit toward the bit position of DO evey time the key is
depressed. Thus, move the cursor to the bit position to be altered.
4. Depress _ key.
The designated bit data will be inverted in this way: "0" __"1". If the key is
depressed again, the data will be inverted again.
140
!
5. Data writing by keying decimal numbers is possible only when the cursor is adjusted
to the position of decimal digit display at the right end.
D (Example): Writing decimal number of bit display
Keyed in Data 17 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[_ [_ [_ _-_ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255
Ioooooooo o
6. To shift the cursor from bit display area to parameter number area, depress []
key.
7. Repeat steps 2 and 5 and write desired parameter data. If g or _ key is kept
depressed, the cursor on the screen automatically and continuously.
D 8. To change the display from bit display type to ordinary digit display type, depress
(b) For oridinary digit display type
1. Designate the paramter number to be written.
D numberin the
2. Key shown by the and
numerals cursor is performed.
depress _] key, then the writing to the parameter
3. The parameter number designation or screen can be updated by ,-----,_ or _--_ key
or _Jor _--_ key.

NOTE
When parameters are changed, be sure to turn off the power once and then
turn it on again. Otherwise, the system might fail to operate properly.
7.4 DISPLAYING AND WRITING OFFSET DATA
Offset data have been stored in the internal memory of Motionpack-ll0. Displaying and
writing these offset data can be made, at any time, including the time of memory operation
regardless of mode.
(1) Display of Offset Data
1. Select _ function key.
2. Key_in the numbers by using keys such as [_ and _[] and then depress
or I[_-J] key. Then, ten sets of offset numbers and offset data, including the offset
number of keyed-in numerals, will be displayed. At the same time, the cursor is
displayed below the designated offset number.
141
7.4 DISPLAYING AND WRITING OFFSET DATA U (Cont'd)
be
3. By depressing _ or _-_ key, the next or previous offset number can
esignated. If the_operation *'_°_'ls
made beyond the offset number shown on the screen, 10
new sets of offset numbers and offset data will be displayed automatically.
4. By depressing _J or _ key, the next or previous screen can be displayed.

In this case, the cursor will show the first number of the displayed offset numbers.
5. Offset data are displayed in units of 0.001 ram, and the maximum value is
99999.999 mm.
" OFFSET
H(D)10 0. 000
H(D) 11 21. 000
HCD)12 32,'7. 000
H(D) 13 120. 000
H(D)14 0. 150
H(D)15 0. 000
H(D)16 0. 000
H(D)17 0. 000
H(D)IB 0. 000
H(D)19 0. 000
RDY
585-221
Fig. 7.21
(2) Writing Offset Data
To write offset data in the internal memory, use increment values. That is,
arithmetically add the increments to the offset data already stored in the memory.
1. Use cursor to designate the offset number to be written.
2. Enter the increment to be added to the offset data.(For subtract, add sign (_)
precides the increment.)
3. Depress _] key.
Then, the increment of offset data just entered is written.
NOTE
1. Offset data are stored in the internal memory and held even if the power
is turned off.
2. Offset data changed during automatic operation become effective when

the system starts to read commands for a new block. Previous offset
data remain effective for the current block as well as the blocks whose
data are already read into the buffer for advance reading.
142
7.5 EDITING PROGRAMS
7.5.1 PROGRAM REGISTER AND CALL
Programs stored in the memory can be displayed on CRT screen and their contents can be
checked by the operator.
(1) Program No. Register
1. Select EDIT mode.
2. Depress _ and _ keys.
_7r-7r-7r-TF-7 _
3. Key-in the program number L_L_
........
J L_.JL_ J L_.J "
4. Depress [_ key to change 0 number displayed at the top of the CRT for the keyed-in
program number.
By the above procedure, the program number is registered completely. Next, edit
r-7r-7£-Tr-7
the program by keying-in _L_JL_.JL_.JL_J'

" " " '_'_]", then depressing _ key.
NOTE
If the registering operation is executed for an already registered program
number again, "ALREDY IN!" is displayed at the bottom of the CRT. This
display can be deleted by depressing [_} key on the CRT control station.
(2) Registered Program Call
2. Depress _ and _ keys.
3. Input the program number L_L- ........

_-_Tr-7r--JL- JL-JL-
7 r-7 F-7 J
" and depress _$7
The specified program number will be searched and ten lines of data from the
beginning of the program will be displayed on the CRT. If the program number
is not found by searching, "NOT FOUND!" will blink at the bottom of the CRT.
Depress the [] to reset the display.
038:
NOO2F3000;
NOO3GOOXlOO. Y100. ZlO0. ;
NOOSGOO×200. Y250. Z300. :

N006XSO. Z50.:
NOOTY500.;
NOOSGO2X300. Y300.1150. J150.;
RDY
L 585-196
Fig. 7.22 1 43
7.5.1 PROGRAM REGISTER AND CALL (Cont'd)
(3) Operation
of [] and _ keys i
(a) By depressing _I_] or _ key, the previous or next page can be displayed on the
CRT.
(b) By depressing _--_ or _ key, the position of cursor can be moved by one character
forward or backward.
7.5.2 INSERTION OF PROGRAMS [_
Editing new a program or altering a registered program is made entirely in edit mode by
function. Designate the word before the words to be added using cursor, key in the data to
be added, and depress the [] key. Then,' the new data will be inserted immediately after
the word designatedby the cursor, i

I
The above insertion can be made for multiple words entered (less than 32
characters) astone group.
Y-25OO. RDY
" L---
585-201 585-202
--KEY IN
(a) Before Insertion (b) After Insertion
Fig. 7.23 Program Insertion
7.5.3 ALTER'ING PROGRAMS _-_ i
Alteration of program (new or registered program) can be performed entirely in edit mode
by the _ fuhction. Set the cursor to the head of the character string to be altered,
enter the contents to be altered, and depress the key. Number of the characters to be altered
is the same as that of characters entered.
585-199 5&5-200
KEY IN
(a) Before Alteration (b) After Alteration
Fig. 7.24 Program Alteration

1 44
7.5.4 PROGRAM ERASE [_
Program erase (new or registered program) is all performed in edit mode by

function. The program can be erased in unit of character, program or whole programs.
(1) Erasing Characters
Set the cursor to a character to be erased and depress the _ key. Only that character
will be erased.
(2) Erasing Program Numbers
...... jL_J
Enter the program number " [_r-Tr-Tr-Tr-7
L_ JL_-IL_ " and depress the [] key.
The program number just entered and its program will be erased.
D (3) Erasing All Program Numbers

Depress the [_ [_ @ [9] _] and [-_ keys and depress the _ key.
All the programs registered will be erased.
7.5.5 SEARCH FUNCTIONS
Data (character string) entered by the keys on the NC operator's station with CRT are
collated with data (character string ) in the memory and displayed on the CRT.
(1) Method of Operation
2. Depress _ function key.
3. Depress [_ key.
The beginning of program number will be set.
4. Enter the data to be searched (a character string of not more than 10 alpha-numerical
characters).
5. Depress _ key.
Search is started and "AS" is displayed at the bottom of the CRT during search.
(2) Completion of Search
1. When the search is completed, "AS" disappears, the head of the data searched is
specified (indicated by cursor) and the searching operation stops.
2. If the desired data cannot be found, "AS"disappears and, at the same time, "NOT
FOUND!" is displayed on the CRT. This display can be erased by depressing
[_key on CRT control station.
145
7.5.5 SEARCH FUNCTIONS (Cont'd)
NOTE
Leading zero may not be omitted for the data to be searched.
Data entered by keys will be collated with the data in the memory.
(3) Searching Program Numbers
The search function also can find a program (finding the head of the program) which
was stored in the program memory.
1. Select the memory operation or edit mode.
2. Depress [] function key.
3. Depress [] key.
4. Enter the program number " ' .......

-'lF--lr-Tr-_
L_JL_JL_JL-J "
5. Depress the _ key.
The desired program number can be searched. Results of the search can be
obtained as stated in C2}above. Therefore, in the case of memory operation mode,
turn the start signal (STR) to ON immediately after completing the search. Then •
the automatic operation can be performed from the beginning of the program. I
NOTE
Leading zero may be omitted for the program to be searched.
1 46
I
CONTENTS
8.1 INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-ll0 148

I 8. PERSONAL COMPUTER 148
J
8.2 OPERATING METHOD WHEN USING PC-8201 151

8.3,1 Input of Program from Personal Computer 156
8.3.2 Output of Program to Personal Computer 156
8.3.3 Collation of Program with File in Personal Computer 157
8.3.4 Input of Parameters from Personal Computer 157
8.3.5 Output of Parameters to Personal Computer 158

8.3.6 Input of Offset Data from Personal Computer 158
8.3.7 Output of Offset Data to Personal Computer 159
8.4 DIRECT TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE

8.4.1 Interface between Motion Module and Personal Computer 160
8.4.2 Commands 160
8.5 CREATING PROGRAMS 161

8.5.1 Input of Programs from CRT'Control Station 161
8.5.2 Input of Programs from Personal Computer 161
8.5.3 Examples of Programs 161
1 47
8. PERSONAL COMPUTER
In the Motionpack-ll0 system, the input/output of various data can be made by means of an a
external personal computer. The personal computer can be connected to motion modules
through the CRT control station or can be directly connected to motion modules. However,
the setting and the operation will be slightly different between the former and the latter.
Refer to Fig. 2.1.
8.1 INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-110
Interface between Motionpack-110 and personal computer conforms to RS-422 (RS-232C is

also possible).
(l) Transmission Method
Asynchronous method (start-stop synchronism) is employed.

Word
length:8-bit length (personal computer _ _ motion module) I
7-bit length (personal computer , _ operator's station with CRT)
Parity: Even parity --
Stop bit: 1 stop bit
Transmission control: X ON/X OFF
(2) Baud Rate
Baud rate shows the number of transmission bits per second in bps (bit/s). Baud rate i
of Motionpack-110 is 9,600 (bps).
(3) Transmission Character Code
ASCII code
(4) Connection Method i

(a) If a personal computer is provided with RS-422 interface port, the computer can be
directly connected to the motion module or the CRT control station.
MOTION MODULE/
PERSONAL COMPUTER CRT CONTROL STATION
EQUIVALENT _,_ SN75174
(RS-422) ._" (RS-422)

SN75174 OR
SN75175 OR EQUIVALENT
_ /l' I
SN75174 OR K '
EQUIVALENT I _'-,% _ SN75175
(RS-422) _ (RS-422)
Fig.8.1 i
148
PERSONAL . MOTION MODULE (3CN)/.
COMPUTER CRTCONTOLSTATION(CNB)
Signal Name f" ...

I ov , t I 1Ha
Pin ovName
Signal
I
ov I 2 ov
o,, 3
DSR r 18 ov
DSR
+5V
DSR 3 E 4
12 +5V
DSR
RTS
CTS _ E 10
11 RTS
CTS
RTS
CTS 7 E 16
17 RTS
CTS
RXD ' I 8 "i'xo

I
RXD ] I 14 TXD
I I
TXD I t 9 RXD
TXD I I 15 RXD
I I
t.T) I =
FG ' 20 FG
Fig. 8.2
(b) If the personal computer is provided with RS-232C interface port, the computer can be
directly connected to the motion module or the CRT contro] station by changing the
wiring as follows.
5v MOTION MODULE/
PERSONAL COMPUTER CRT CONTROL STATION
SN75189AN OR EOUIV_I]EN'_ SN75174

--ROUT_ "_ h R IN_ " ,,_ O_J
(RS-232C) _ ', (RS-422)
I _ • RIN
|DOUT SN75188 OR EQUIVALENT , _ OV
'°q--3. oo,,
oI ,.2vL "D'" _RS-232C7 .'r q/_RS-,,22)
_ 10 V _
I Fig.8.3
PERSONAL
COMPUTER MOTION
MODULE
(3CN
I/
O-SUBCONNECTOR) CRT CONTROLSTATION(CNB)
Signal Name Pin No. tF.... I. Pin Xa Signal Name
RTS 4 "] "1 2 OV

0V
CTS 75 ,J i _ I
18 0V
DSR
E 3
15 0V
RXD
E 4
12 +5V
DSR
E 10
11 RTS
CTS
E 16
17 RTS
CTS
R'_- i 3 I I 8 TXD
I I
s_ 2 I I 9 RXD
FC
F 1 '
'' "'r 20 FG
Fig. 8.4 149

i
8.1 INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-110 (Cont'd)
Where a model PC8201 is used as the personal computer, connection shown in Fig. 8.5 is
required.
PERSONAL COMPUTER (PC8201) MOTION MODULE (3CN)/

D-SUB CONNECTOR) CRTCONTROLSTATION(CNB
Signal Name Pin No, f-x Pin No. SignalName

0v 7 i 1 ov
RTS
CTS 4
5 3 E 2
18 0V
DSR
_ 3
15 OV
RXD
4 +5V
12 DSR
1o
II RTS
CTS
16
17 RTS
CTS
4.7kfl
18 - ! 8 TXD
I
TXD 2 | 9 RXD
i ]
FG 1 "_" 20 FG
Fig. 8.5
When the personal computer contains an RS-232C interface port, the motion module
and personal computer differ in signal level (RS-422, RS-232C) , but can be connected to
each other by wiring as shown above. However, the connection cable length should be within
1 m because of lower noise interference.
If the cable length exceeds 1 m, it is recommended to use RS-422 or RS-232C con-

verters available on the market.
150
8.2 OPERATING METHOD WHEN USING PC-8201
(1) Setting to "TELCOM" .Mode
Set the PC-8201 in "TELCOM" mode (terminal function) in order to use the PC-8201 as a
terminal of Motionpack-110. Setting to "TELCOM" mode can be made as follows.
1. Turn the power switch to ON.
2. Display on the screen is made in the MENU mode as shown below.
1986/01/05 14"26"37 (C)Microsoft# 1
_._fI'_ TEXT TELCOM
Load Save Name List 12239
D Fig.8.6
3. Shift the cursor by using the _ key to the position above "TELCOM" and depress
the _ key, then "TELCOM" mode can be obtained.
D 1986/01/05 14"26"37 (C)Microsoft# 1

f-'_'ff77JTJi_ JJT..._
BAS I C TEXT "_. ELCOM_

_ "f//.//j/, ffJ//19
Load Save Name List 12239
Fig. 8.7
151
8.2 OPERATING METHOD WHEN USING PC-8201 (Cont'd)
4. The screen is cleared, the parameter of transmission method currently set is shown on
the first line, TELCOM mode is shown on the second line, and input-waiting state
begins.
8 [ 71XS
Telcom : • ,
Stat Term
Fig. 8.8
The value of parameter of transmission method should be selected depending on the

interface to be connected.
• For personal computer, • motion module: "SES1XS"

• For personal computer, • through operator's station: "8E71XS"
5. If the parameter of transmission method shown on the screen is not correct, depress
the _ key (Stat), enter a correct value of parameter and go to Step 6.
6. If theparameter of transmission method shown on the screen is correct, then depress

the _ key (Term). Then, the terminal mode begins and transmission to the
personal computer becomes possible.
8 I 71XS
Telcom " Stat 8 E81XS
Telcom " Term
Fig. 8.9
When the above operation has been completed, transmission between the personal
computer and motion module can be made.
1 52
(2) Creating and Editing Files
Use "TEXT" mode when creating a new file in the RAM of the personal computer and
editing an existing file in the RAM.
Editing Method for New Files
1. Select "TEXT" mode on the MENU screen.
2. Screen is cleared and "File To Edit?" is asked.
3. Input the file name. File name
4. When the screen is cleared, input the program.
5. Complete the program by usirig edit commands (such as addition, modification or

deletion).
6. Upon completion of edit, the MENU screen can be obtained by depressing the
key (or _'_ + _ keys) or depressing the [] key twice in succession.
Editing Method for Existing Files
1. Shift the cursor to the existing file name on the MENU screen and depress the _ key.
2. Then the file contents are displayed on the screen and "TEXT" mode begins.
3. Correct and complete the program by using edit commands.
4. Upon completion of edit, execute Step 6, above.
(3) Transmitting Files in RAM of Personal Computer to Motion Module

(UPLOAD _ Command)
UPLOAD [F_ command should be used when transmitting a file stored in the RAM
of personal computer to the motion module. UPLOAD _ command should be as
follows.
1. When _ key is depressed, "File to Upload? " is asked, and the system waits for
the input of file name to be transmitted.
8 E81XS
Telcom " Term
File to Upload?m
Prey Full Up Down

)
Fig. 8.10 153

8.2 OPERATING METHOD WHEN USING PC-8201 (Cont'd)
2. If the file name which is not present in the RAM is input, an error display will be
made. In this case , depress the _ key again.
3. If the file name is normally accepted, the transmission is started immediately after
depressing the _-] key. "UP" becomes a reversed display during UPLOAD, thereby
indicating that the file in the RAM is being transmitted.
4. To stop the transmission halfway, depress the _ key.
(4) Receiving File from Motion Module and Storing It into RAM of Personal Computer
(DOWNLOAD _-_ Command)
The DOWNLOAD _ command should be used when receiving a file transmitted

from the motion module and storing it into the RAM in accordance with the command
from personal computer. DOWNLOAD _ command should be as follows.
I. When the _ key is depressed, "File to Download?" is asked, and the system
waits for the input of file name.
8 E81XS
Telcom " Term
File to Download?==
Prey Full Up Down
Fig. 8.11
2. Input the file name and depress the _-] key, then a new file with this file name is
created. If the same file name already exists, the contents of the old file are erased
and replaced with the contents of the new file.
3. After the input of file name, all the data received by the personal computer are stored
into the RAM. "DOWN" becomes a reversed display during DOWNLOAD, thereby
indicating the state of receiving data into the RAM.
4. The state of DOWNLOAD continues until the _ key is depressed again. When
the required data are all placed in the file, depress the _ key again in order to
terminate the DOWNLOAD.
154
D AND PERSONAL COMPUTER

The method of using a personal computer described in this part is the operation method via
the CRT control station, as shown in Fig. 8.12. Thus, set the status (Stat) to 8E71XS and
perform the operations listed below. Various data (programs, parameters, offset data) are
input/output and collated with each other.
: i................................ .......... 585-193
PERSONAL COMPUTER
REAR OF CRT 585491
CONTROL STATION
D
MICRO PC,
MOTION MODULE,
AND AXIS MODULES
585-188
CRY CONTROL STATION
D 588-308
Fig. 8.12
155
8.3.1 INPUT OF PROGRAM FROM PERSONAL COMPUTER
Procedures for input operation for programs from personal computer are as follows.
1. Select the edit mode.
3. Depress the [] key.
4. Depress the E_] key.

5. The program is transmitted from the personal computer. For the setting during trans-
mission, refer to Par. 8.1 "INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-110". (For PC 8201,
use the UPLOAD command of terminal mode.)
6. Start the reading of program. The characters following "%" at the head of a program
are deemed as data. Program number ......

" [_][-7L-JL-JL-JL-J
r-Tr-Tr-7 "
is first read and newly
registered.
7. When the last % is received from the personal computer, the display of IN is erased,
thereby terminating the reading. However, whether the program number is duplicated
or not must be checked in advance. If duplicated, "ALREADY IN!" is displayed.
In this case, erase the relevant program number already registered and then repeat Steps
3to7.
8.3.2 OUTPUT OF PROGRAM TO PERSONAL COMPUTER
Procedures for output operation for programs to personal computer are as follows.
1. Depress the [_ key.
3. Depress the _ function key.
4. Make preparations for receiving and accepting at the personal computer side. For setting
the personal computer, refer to Par. 8.1 "INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-110". (For
PC 8201, use the DOWNLOAD command of terminal mode.)
5. Key-in the program number " , .......

_-7 r-7r-Tr-Tr-7
L.ZJ L_JL_JL_JL_J
" Leading 0 can be omitted.

Program with the program number just entered is output to the personal computer. The
operation automatically stops when the output of the program is completed. "OUT " is
always displayed during the output of data.
7. Depress the [] key if it is desired to halt the output. But any subsequent operation is
not possible. The output operation must be started from the first step at any time the
output is halted by the _.
156
8.3.3 COLLATION OF PROGRAM WITH FILE IN PERSONAL COMPUTER
Procedures for the collation of a program with a file in the personal computer are as
follows.
2. Depress the _ function key.
3. Depress the B key.
4. Key-in the program number " [_r-Tr-Tr-_r-_,L__jL_jL_JL_j,,

" " , " Leading 0 can be omitted.
6. Transmit the file to be checked from the personal computer side. For setting the com-
puter in this case, refer to Par. 8.1 "INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-ll0 " (For
PC 8201, use the UPLOAD command of terminal mode.) Collate the contents of the
program with those of the file in the computer. "VER " is displayed at the bottom of
the CRT during collation. If no coinciding is found after collation, "INPUT ERROR"
is displayed. If all the contents coincide and the collation is completed, the display of
"VER " is erased.
8.3.4 INPUT OF PARAMETERS FROM PERSONAL COMPUTER
Parameters are input from the NC operator's station but can be also input as data in the
memory of personal computer. Parameters can be input as a file. The format is as shown
in Fig. 8.13.
PM 1000 7•
PM 1001 159 •
PM 1002 128 •
O//O °
Fig. 8.13
1 57
8.3.4 INPUT OF PARAMETERS FROM PERSONAL COMPUTER (Cont'd)
Procedures for parameter input operation from personal computer are as follows. I
2. Depress the [] key.
4. Depress the [_] key. Make preparations for reading. "IN" will be displayed at the
bottom of the CRT screen.
5. Transmit the data from the personal computer. For the setting of personal computer,
refer to Par. 8.1 "INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-ll0". (For PC 8201, use the
UPLOAD command of terminal mode.)
6. When "%" is read, "IN" displayed on the CRT screen is erased. Upon completion of
input, turn the power off and then turn it on again. I
8.3.5 OUTPUlT OF PARAMETERS TO PERSONAL COMPUTER
Procedures for parameter output operation to personal computer are as follows.
2. Depress the. [] key.
3. Depressthe[_ key.
4. Make preparations for receiving and accepting at the personal computer side.
For the setting of personal computer, refer to Par. 8.1 "INTERFACE WITH
Motionpack-ll0". (For PC 8201, use the DOWNLOAD command of terminal mode.)
5. Depress the [_] kye.
6. For halting the output, depress the _ key. However, any subsequent operation is not
possible after halting. The output operation must be started from the first step any
time it is halted by the RESET.
8.3.6 INPUT OF OFFSET DATA FROM PERSONAL COMPUTER
Offset data are normally input from NC operator's station but can also be input as one
group from the personal computer. Input format for offset data is as indicated in Fig. 8.14.
%;
H01 1.o00 ;
H02 2.000 ;
D03 - 10.089 ;
%:
Note: Either H or D symbol may be used.
1 58 Fig. 8.14
Procedures for offset data input from personal computer are as follows.
2. Depressthe [] key. .
3.
Depress the _ key.
4. Depress the _] key.

Make preparations for reading. The display of "IN" is made at the bottom of the CRT.
5. Transmit data from personal computer. For the setting of the personal computer, refer
to Par. 8.1 "INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-110". (For PC 8201, use the UPLOAD
command of terminal mode.)
6. When "%" is read, the display of "IN" on the CRT is erased. The input operation is
now completed.
8.3.7 OUTPUT OF OFFSET DATA TO PERSONAL COMPUTER
Offset data set in the current system can be output to the files in personal computer. Proce-
dures for offset data output to personal computer are as follows.

3.
Depress the _ key.
4. Make preparations for receiving and accepting at the personal computer. For the setting
of personal computer, refer to Par. 8.1 "INTERFACE WITH Motionpack-ll0". (For
PC 8201, use DOWNLOAD command Of terminal mode.)
5. Depress the [_] key.

Offset data are output. The system will automatically stop after outputting all the
contents of the offset data memory.
6. For halting the output, depress the _ key. However, any subsequent operation is not
possible. The operation must be started from the first step at any time it is halted by
the RESET.
159
8.4 DIRECT TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND
PERSONAL COMPUTER
The Motionpack-110, if connected directly to a personal computer as shown in Fig. 8.15, can
transmit or receive data directly. If PC 8201 is used as personal computer, it may be used as
it. But an application program must be provided if another kind of personal computer is to
be employed.
8.4.1 INTERFACE BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND PERSONAL COMPUTER
The connectfng method between a motion module and a personal computers is shown in
Fig 8.15.
TO CONNECTOR
,,-:f 585-195 _ 588-308
PERSONAL COMPUTER MOTION MODULE

MODEL PC-8201 AND AXIS MODULES
Fig. 8.15
8.4.2 COMMANDS
The commands which can be sent from the personal computer to motion module are as
listed below. These commands are effective only for predetermined modes (shown by "0"
in Table 8.1). Table 8. List of Command
e Memory Step Jog Feed Contents

_,,,_od Quick
3ommand_ Edit Operation Operation Operation Operation
(_DWL O Batch input of file (program)
(_UPL O Batch output of UPLOAD file (program)
(_)DEL O Erase of UPLOAD file (program)
(g)CLR O Erase of all files
(_DIR O Display of registered program No.

(_)WRT O O O O O Input of parameters
(_)RED O O O O O Output of parameters
(_)PDW O O O O O Batch input of parameter file
(_PUP 0 0 0 0 0 Batch output of parameter file
_PUN O O O O Display of current position (Axis)
(_)PER O O O O Display of position lag pulse

_)OST O Finding the head of program No.
_)ORD O O Display of finding the head of program Nt

_)ONN O O O O O Display of program and sequence No.
_)HWT 0 0 0 0 0 Input of offset data
_)HRD 0 0 0 0 0 Output of offset data
_HDW 0 0 0 0 0 Batch input of offset data file

_HUP 0 0 0 0 0 Batch output of offset data file
160 Note: Please consult your Yaskawa representative tor additional information for the commands.
8.5 CREATING PROGRAMS
8.5.1 INPUT OF PROGRAMS FROM CRT CONTROL STATION
Input the program No. first and then the program. Refer to Par. 7.5.
(Example) 0 123 4 •
PRO(3RAM
Fig. 8.16
8.5.2 INPUT OF PROGRAMS FROM PERSONAL COMPUTER
Input the program No. after "%" and then the program.
(Example) 0 1234 •
PRO'GRAM
t Fig. 8.17
When storing a program from the personal computer into the memory of motion
module, the program is stored from %to %. Therefore, the omission of first % and last %
is not permitted.
8.5.3 EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS
) HEAD OF PROGRAM
%; _or personal
(Required computer.
when creating a program)
! .END OF BLOCK
.IO NO 1 3 4 : G92
01 X0 YO Z0: S ( [CR} is used for personal computer.)
PROGRAMNO. NO 0 2 C00 XI00.0 Y200.0 Z2300.0:
(Always necessarY') SPACE CODE
NO O3 TI3; 'Space code can be entered by
personal computer, but is ignored
by Motionpack-lOO. Internally,
one character Of memory
SEQUENCE NO. - pN 0 t 0 X 0 Y0 Z 0 ; is used.

M30 ;
(%;) _'-EFFECTIVE RANGE

END OF PROGRAM FOR PROGRAM
_'Required when creating a program_
_or personat computer. ,)
Fig. 8.18 Program ExampleA
161
8.5.3 EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS (Cont'd)
(Programmed by G90 Absolute)
+¥
I ® I SECOND
DWELL 02345;
c ® , (_ N1 G90 G01 X30. Y30. F200;
6o = )D (__ N2 X40. Y60. ;
® N3 G04 P1.; ...Stopped for 1 second at point C(Dwell)
® N4 X60. F100;
® ® (_) N5 X30. Y30. F150;
N6 M30;
3O B l
Ad
k,. 30 40 6o + X
Fig. 8.19 Program Example B
(Programmed by G91 Incremental)
+Y
03456;
4_ O G91 G01 X30. Y40. F100
_,= (_ X90.;
®_ |"_ (_) G17 G03 X40. Y40. J40.;
® G03 X--40. Y40. 1--40. ;
-- (_ G01 X--20. ;
_) X40. ;
j (_ Y--120.;
' (_ X--30, Y--40. ;
M30;
Ad
'_lr
i _-x
® x-7o.;
_ 30 70 20
Fig. 8.20 Program ExampleC
162
CONTENTS
9. INTERFACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT 164
9.1 ITEMS RELATED TO POWER SUPPLY 165

9.1.1 Power-on Sequence 165
9.1.2 Control Power Units 165
9.2 INPUT/OUTPUT AT MACHINE SIDE 168

9.2.1 l_ules for Input/Output Signals 168
9.2.2 Detail of Input Signals 171
9.2.3 Detail of Output Signals 187
9.3 CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE

AND CRT CONTROL STATION AND PERSONAL COMPUTER 185
9.3.1 Connection between CRT Control Station and Motion Module 185
9.3.2 Connection between Personal
p Computer and MotionModule 186
9.3.3 Connection between DNC Personal Computer and Motion Module 188
9.4 CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND AXIS MODULES 789
9.5 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND

Servopack, TG AND PG 190
9.5.1 Connection between Axis Modules and Servopack 190
9.5.2 Connection between Axis Modules and TG and PG 19!
9.6 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND SPINDLE DRIVES 193
9.7 CONNECTION BETWEEN MICRO PC MODULE

AND MOTION MODULE/PERSONAL COMPUTER 194
9.7.1 Connection between Micro PC Module and Motion Module 194
9.7.2 Connection between Micro PC Module and Personal Computer 195
9.8 CONNECTION BETWEEN MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

AND MOTION MODULE 196
9.9 CONNECTOR TERMINAL NUMBER AND SIGNAL NAMES 197

9.9.1 Motion Module, Type JEFMC-C02D 197
9.9.2 Axis Module, Type JEFMC-B011 199
9.9.3 CRT Control Station, Type JEFMC-H011 199
9.9.4 Micro PC Module, Type JEFMC-Bll0 200
9.10 SIGNAL CABLES 202

9.10.1 List of Cables 202
9.10.2 Cable Specifications 203
9.10.3 Connector 204
9.11 WIRING PRECAUTIONS 205

9.11.1 Prevention of Interference between Wires 205
9.11.2 Insertion of Surge Suppressors into Coils 206
9.11.3 Use of Insulating Transformers and Line Filters 206
9.11.4 Grounding Method 206
9.11.5 Power Supply of 5 VDC 207 163
9. INTERFACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT
The connecting diagram for equipment, such as motion modules, axis modules, micro PC I
modules, Servopacks and motors combined to form a system is shown in Fig. 9.1.
200/220 VAC
50160 Hz
_))MCCB
r 7
(_ i ServopackX-AXIS
.tl
NOISEFILTER
I MC2 ' " --
':=
. F;0;,_o;
]
"....
,, q_ ,L t',,_ M°T°'
! $EOUENCE i I
t __.J I
:MCI I1=1 I
,------e-NO)._. _ -,_1T
l CNBL_-'_'J(_'IJ ' MOOuLEAXIS
--
PER,ONA_
L(:_I,i
'w--'_'_l
•COMPUTER
I_
MODULE
MOTION
| " I JEFMC .SOUJeFMO
11 _ ((_)j_ i TG
_ II
I (Pc='' r I -co2D __'%_'_I_........ ,__j_
)5 1 _AL_'L _ 7CN 'or
, ...... ,-o. r _ "f "1 _ OECEL LS

S3 PERSONAL l_8CN
COMPUTER _ ] I _ RuIIOVlERTRAVEL
fllfO
ONC F 7" I L--Q_D,vs,u, ov.... VeL
I/O AT [CN AXIS

MACHINE MODULE AME AS
SIDE JEFMC
X-AXIS
2CN *4 1
,., ((_)@1
_ov 4CN " l
aCN -- AXIS
MODULE I SAME AS :MR Type Connector(20P)
JEFMC .5 X-AXIS
-B011 I
] MODuLEMICRO
JEFMC PC ,4-5v
'0v 2c._[_(_)(_)) :MR Type Connector(50P)
#
_g10 1 I B
"_ : Screw Terminal Connection

I
EXPANSION -- ICN
ZCN I :Flat Cable Connector(20P)

SPINDLE I
AXIS I NALII _ :Cable Symbol
MODULEI
j v JEFMC
II
1 .SS11B D/A I
• I
I
L .; -- J
r---_-:- 1
L' I/O +,?AV X'.
-rL.,-___._l
PO*ER 0_J"
i
•l Cable(_)is attached to the motion module as a *5 For 12 V optional encoder, cable(_ is used.
standard. *6 HANDLE function is available only for use of
•2 Cable (_)is attached to the micro PC module the motion module, type JEFMC-C023 and
as a standard. -C027.
•3 DNC function is available only for use of the
motion module, type JEF'MC-C027. Note: Each module is provided with a solder
•4 For AC servo drive, cable (_)is used. type connector as a standard. Cables except thoes
of@and @should be provided by customer.
164 Fig. 9.1 Connection Diagram of Motionpack-110 Control System

9.1 ITEMS RELATED TO POWER SUPPLY
D 9.1.1 POWER-ON SEQUENCE
Make a power-on sequence that will first turn on the AC power supply, then the control
power supply (5VDC), I/O power supply (24VDC) and CRT control station power supply
(100 VAC). Approximately one second later the servo power supply will be turned on. For
an example of the connecting power-on circuit, refer to Fig. 12.3.
When the power supply of Motionpack-ll0 is turned off, a no control status may
occur temporarily. This status may send out an unnecessary output signal instantaneously.
In this case, make a power-off sequence that will first turn off I/O power supply, then
the control power supply.
9.1.2 CONTROL POWER UNITS
D Power units for motion modules, axis modules, input/output signals and PG (optical
encoder) are not furnished and must be prepared by the user. These power units must have
enough power capacity for the system (see par. 2. 4.), providing the required functions
within the working temperature range (0 to 55°C) of the Motionpack-ll0. Examples of
models of these power units are explained below for your reference.
9.1.2.1 Power Units for Motion Modules, Axis Modules and Micro PC Modules
D A 5 VDC power unit is necessary as control power unit for motion modules, axis modules
and micro PC modules. This unit must meet the specifications shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1 Specifications for 5 VDC Power Unit
Item Specifications
Input Voltage 100/1 lO VAC, 50/60 Hz
D Rated Current
Rated Voltage 55 A
V
Output Stability Less than -+5 %
Ripple Noise Less than 300 mVp-p

Leak Current Less than 0.5 mA
Overcurrent Protection Provided
Working Temperature 0 to +55°C
Storing Temperature -20°C to +85°C

Relative Humidity 30 to 90 % (non-condesing)
Input _ Frame
Withstand voltage: 1500 VAC, 1 minute
Insulation Input--'--'* Output Resistance: Greater than 100 M fl at 500 VDC
Onput _ Frame
1"65
9.1.2.1 Power Units for Motion Modules, Axis Modules and Micro PC Modules Cont'd)
Example of model:
(1) Type:EY05005
Manufacturer: Shindengen Kogyo KK
Input: 85 to 132 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
Output: 5V, 5A
(2) Type: BY05011
Output: 5 V, 11 A
Where axis module is used for spindle, _+10 V output is applied. In this case,
--+15 VDC power unit is required. Table 9.2 shows the specifications for --+15 VDC power
unit.
Table 9.2 Specifications for+ 15 VDC Power Unit
Item Specifications
InputVoltage 100/110VAC, 50/60Hz
RatedVoltage _+15V
RatedCurrent _+20mA
OutlSutStability Less than +5 %
RippleNoise Less than 300mVp-p
Leak Current Lessthan0.5mA
OvercurrentProtection Provided
WorkingTemperature 0 to +55°C
StoringTemperature -20"C to +85"C
RelatiyeHumidity 30 to 90 % (non-condensing)
Input---* Frame
Withstand voltage: 1,500 VAC, 1 minute
Insulation Input _ Output
Resistance: Greater than 100 MEI at 500 VDC
0u_ut *----- Frame
• Example of model:
(1) Type: BYG 800/01
Output: +5V, 10A
+5 to +15V, 1A
-5 to -15V, 1A
Working Temperature:
• Natural air cooled - 0 to 50°C
• Forced air cooled - 0 to 60°C
(2) Type: BYG 430/01

Manufacturer: Shindengen kogyo KK
Output: +5 V, 5.5 A
+5 to +15 V, 0.5 A
1 66 -5 to -15 V, 0.5 A
9.1.2.2 Power Supply for PG
A 12 VDC power unit is necessary for feedback unit TFUE-[_DZC7 or TFUE-[B[NSAB.

A power unit meeting the specifications shown in Table 9.3 should be provided.
Table 9.3 Specifications for 12 VDC Power Unit
Item Specifications
Input Voltage 100/110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated Voltage 12 V
Rated Current 200 mA (per 1 unit of PG)
Output Stability Less than + 5 %
Ripple Noise Less than 300 mVp-p

Relative Humidity 30 to 90% (non-condensing)

Frame
Insulation t Input
Input _ Output Withstand voltage: 1,500 VAC, 1 minute
Resistance: Greater than 100 MfI at 500 VDC
I Output0 ' Frame
Example of model:
Type: AYS 1201
Input: 90 to 110 VAC, 47 TO 500 Hz
Output: 12 V, 1 A
As a compound power unit for both 5 V and 12 V, the following model is recommended.
Type: CYG 500/01

Input: 85to 132VAC,47to 63Hz
Output: 5V, 5A; 12 V, 2.5 A; -12 V, 0.4 A
167
9.1.2.3 Power Supply for Input/Output Signals
A 24 VDC power unit is necessary for input/output signals. A power unit meeting the speci-
fications of Table 9.4 should be provided.
Table 9.4 Specifications for 24 VDC Power Supply
Item Specifications
Input Voltage 100/110 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated Voltage 24 V
Rated Current 2 A (3-axis system)
Output Stability Less than -+10 %

Ripple Noise Less than 300mVp-p
Relative Humidity 30 to 90% (non-condensing)
Input, , Frame
Withstand voltage: 1,500 VAC, 1 minute
Insulation Input ------Output Resistance: More than 100 MD at 500 VDC
Output, , Frame
,din
Example ofmodel: •
Type: BY242R5
OutPut! 24 V, 2.5 A
9.2 INPUT/OUTPUT AT MACHINE SIDE
9.2,1 RULES FOR INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS
9.2.1.1 Rules for Input Signals
Input signals referred to herein are those sent from the machine side to Motionpack-ll0.
For connection, 0V common method (True-Low method) shown in Fig. 9.3 is applied.
Effective condition of the input voltage is as follows.
(1) ON or OFF input signals with a duration longer than 50 ms are effective.
ON
I I J I
50 msORMORE 50 msORMORE ,
Fig. 9.2
168
(2) Input contact capacity should be about 5 mA to 5 A with a rated voltage of 24 VDC.
Chattering time of the contact should be less than 5 ms.
MAC H I N E SI DE Motionpack-llO
I I
L.... J i r4----h
+24 V
/'FOR OPEN '_ _; _l:E::3
\COLLECTOR/ / ' '
D f
1 l J +24V 24V
02_V +24 V [I
Fig. 9.3
9.2.1.2 Rules for Output Signals
Signals sent from.Motionpack-ll0 to machine side must have the output capacity and protec-
tive measures as explained below.
(1) Output capacity is less than 24 VDC and 80 mA.
(2) Non-contact output.
(3) The following measures are necessary to protect non-contact output.
• When connecting an inductive load such as a relay coil, be sure to connect a spark
suppressor in parallel to the load at a distance of 20 cm from the load.
• The spark suppressor must be connected with correct polarity. Otherwise, non-contact
output circuit of Motionpack-ll0 might be destroyed.
M_otionpach-llO MACHINE SIDE __
--I ] +24,;
I I
/ ' ISUaGESUPPR.E-SSOR"
_ Example::lS2462 (VRM=220V IO:100mA )"

7.21_. 3_. I ._l,_ " . '
1 .l_ z'v .
Fig. 9.4
169
9.2.1.2 Rules for Output Signals (Cont'd)
• In the case of lamp load, connect a preheating resistor so as to use the lamp below the
rated capacity including rush current.
Motionpack - 110 MACHINE SIDE +24 V
__ 24
t R R= (0.2 to 0.3)x I
024V I: Rated current of lamp
Fig. 9.5
• Reduce the current through the lamp to 20 to 30% of the rating of the lamp by connect-
ing the preheating resistor.
170
9.2.2 DETAIL OF INPUT SIGNALS
Motionpack- 110
MACHINE SIDE MOTION MODULE
1
i
' "( 5CN-3

__ ; RESET'; [ ;_
RESET , o o ,, SKIP , ', 5CN-4
SKIP, S--_ ', [ ', _ •
SERVO READY COMPLETED ' _ i SVOK i i _50N-5 +24V
MACHINE READY COMPLETED _ _ i MRDY ,I ,1 [,.,.5CN-6
i i i
I EDIT [ ! ICN-36
EDIT MODE _o : MEM I i ICN-20
MEMORY
OPERATIONMODE o ! MDI I , ICN- 3,5
o I " ! ICN-_
JOGOPERATIONMODE o i JoG i I f'
STEP l ] (ICN-19
STEPOPERAT[ONMODE, RAPID ] 1 4 r ICN-2

RAPID FEED OPERATION
HANDLE OPERATION MODE
MODE \,.o HANDLE It ! .( i ICN-3
DNCOPERATIONMODE _ DNC i ' J f 1CN-4
+X AXIS - o o , +JX 'l I, _ fICN-26
-XAXIS oo [ -Jx. ; [ _,_CN-43
+JY 1. ICN-42
+YAXIS i , I _CN 12
-YAXIS I -JY ! ] ,( -
+z
AXIS +,z I I ,CN-,,
' -JZ I i j_ ICN-28
-Z AXIS,-- o i HX ' [ ICN-13
HANDLEOPERATION
X-AXIS i
" H-Y : I 1CN-29
HANDLE OPERATION Y-AXIS , I [ ICN-45
HANDLE OPERATION Z-AXIS "e i HZ [ [ J
RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT ---'-_ i Z_RN , 1CN- 17
-- ' SBK [ I 1CN-47
SINGLEBLOCK--__o ! MLK ICN- 18
MACHINE LOCK -- o [
' PRT ICN- 27
PARAMETER PROTECT -- o !
FIN ; ICN-49
MST COMPLETED -- o l
ER 1CN.16
EXTERNAL ERROR --
, Z FOINrrOR ACR 1CN-32
REE POSITIONMEMORYOR ALARM CLEAR -- ,, NEG : [ . ICN-48
AXIS OMISSION-----_ [ l [
' OVl ICN-5
FEED OVERRIDE ( 1) --
l "" OV2 ICN-21.
FEEDOVERRIDE
(2) -- 3
-- ov_ i ; 41¢N-3_. '
FEED
FEED OVERRIDE
OVERRIDE (4)
(8) -- •I ' .OV8
OW6 i, [ ._ ICN-6
1(_N-22 .....
I
FEED OVERRIDE (16) -- " .IROVI ! ' J_ICN-38 ' :

.... ! I "_ ,CN-7
RAPIDF
RAPIDFEEDOVERRIDE(1)
EED
OVERRIDE(2) - _ 1, " ROV2 I ' r "
RAPID FEED OVERRIDE CANCEL ' o"'S i. . .ROy3 : I " ION-Z3
JOG FEEDRATE SELECTION (1) _ ].. JOVl ! "_
. , . , [ ;,_c_L3_
JOG FEEDRATESELECTION (2) - 5-_ I JOV2. I ', ...$ ,ICN-8. ..
JOG FEEDRATE SELECTION (4) _-_ [ ...... JOY4 • .! i .,¢"'cN'24

JOG FEEDRATE SELECTION (8) ,- o"_ [ JoY8 I i _ ' ICN-40
STEP MULTIPLIER (1)- _ [. MPI [ [.... 1CN.I4.
STEP MULTIPLIER (2) K'_ ! • MP2 i I" 3_ ICN._30
' ' ,1CN-9
POSITION MEMORY _ ; PMEM ,[ [ _ ,'ICN=41,'

SPINDLE FORWARD RUN( E'-6 i ..FhN . ', [.
SPINDLE REVERSE RUN : _ i " RRN.. i . i _ ,ICN-25 ..
FBOX ON, TBXON I[ , iCN-44
SPINDLE GEAR SELECT ( 1) _ _ l GRl iI II _.l.1CN-46 " " "

SPINDLE GEAR SELECT (2) 6--6 [ GR2 l' 1' ' .ICN-15 " . " .
O--O i """" _!.'CN-31. . .. : "

! '!
171
Fig. 9.6 Connection of Input signal
9.2.2 DETAIL OF INPUT SIGNALS (Cont'd)
[ iI I
i SK 1 2CN-5
#
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ( 1) - 8-8 !

SK2 ] _
i ' ,2CN-21
OPTIONALBLOCKSKIP (2) _
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (3) -----o
-o I o
SK3
, _ ...
l l 2CN-37
OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (4) _ SK4 ,i [ 2CN-6
OPTIONALBLOCKSKIP (5) ------o-"_ ', SK5 [ [ . 2CN-22

SK6 ! ! 2CN-38
OPTIONALBLOCKSKIP (6) ----o o
SK7 [ I 2CN-7
OPTIONALBLOCKSKIP (7) ------0"-_ SK8 i' _' ) 2CN-23

OPTIONAL BLOCKSKIP (8) _ i ,'
2CN-2
-- Wll ] I ._
UNIT
F_ 4 W12 i I
I _--
,2CN-34
I ' 2CN-19
DIGITI ! 5.-6 wt4
WI8 , It _2CN-3
PROGRAM
NO.INPUT w2t l ,, _5
W22 [ ! "_r,2CN-4
w24 i ' 2CN-20
W28 i ' !CN-36
i i
t
I
i
i
' ICN-33
i [ ,5CN-7
,
l t ICN-1
1 i i
i
1
I '
............... .J
Note: Terminal numbers of motion module indicate

those in standard I/O allocation.
II
Fig. 9.6 Connection of Input Signal
1 72
Signal • Name Signal Symbol Function, Operation and Timing
k Start Table STR
9.5 Function,
Start Operation
signal in and Timingoperation
memory of Input mode.
Signals (8-1)
When this signal is turned on after designating a program number,
the automatic operation of the designated program is started.
MEMORY OPERATION MODE _1

(MEM) I START OF
I PROGRAM EXECUT ON
I
i ',
,
I
START (STR) ]_ ; I _ l
50ms MIN SOres MIN
'Stop "STP Stop signal in memory operation mode and manual operation mode
(Temporary) (JOG, RAPID, STEP, HANDLE).
When the stop signal is turned on during the execution of a program
or manual operation, the system is decelerated and s.tops. When it is
turned off, the program continues execution.
OPERATION
IN EXECUTION EXECUTION
OR MANUAL COMMAND
PROGRAM EXECUTION
t I
STOP, F----t
Reset RESET When this signal is turned on, an alarm output signal (ALM) is
reset. When the reset signal is turned on and off, the external reset
signal (RST) is turned on and off at the same time. This signal has
the same functions as_key of CRT control station. For
details, refer to Par. 7.1.10.
(RESET)
RESET ..
t
ALARM OUTPUT •
(ALM)
EXTERNAL RESETOUTPUT(RsT) }'-'m--__"
1. Use the external, reset signal (RST)as reset signal at machine

side.
2. When the I;eset signal is turned on during memory Operation, the
system decelerates, stops and returns to the head of the program
number.
Skip SKIP When this signal is turned on or off during operation, the system
decelerates, stops, halts the remainder of mo_;ing command and
advances to the next block: See Par. 4.2.10.
>--10ms STARTEDMACHINE
SKiP .-4.[_'(
.DECELERATIONAND STOP
STARTED MACHINE
DECELERATION AND sTOP
SKIP ," ""
Servo Ready SVOK This signal is the interlock signal]between Servo controller and
Completion Motionpack-ll0. This signal is turned on when the power is applied
to the servo controller. . ..
D SERVO READY COMPLETION " "SEivo

' ' CON'RO'LLER POWER ON
(SVOK}
!73
Table 9.5 Function, Operation and Timing of Input Signals (8-2)

Signal Name Signal Symbol Function, Operation and Timing
Machine Ready MRDY This is an interlock signal between machine and Motionpack-llO.
Completion When the preparations are completed at the machine side (if needed),
this signal is turned on.
MACHINE READY COMPLETION

f
/
MACHINE READY COMPLETION J

(MRDY)
Edit Mode EDIT When this signal is turned on, edit mode begins. Then, editing opera-
tion such as writing programs or parameters from CRT control
station or personal computer can be made.
Memory Operation MEM When this signal is turned on, the memory operation mode begins.
Mode Automatic operation by programs can be made.
Jog Operation JOG When this signal is turned on, the jog operation mode begins. ,all
Mode Continuous feed can be made manually. •

Step Operation STEP When this signal is turned on, the step operation mode begins. Step V
Mode operation can be made manually.
Rapid Feed RAPID When this signal is turned on, the rapid feed operation mode begins.
Operation Mode Rapid feed operation can be made manually.
Manual Operation HANDLE When this signal is turned on, the manual operation mode begins.
Mode Manual operation by manual pulse generator is possible.
DNC Operation DNC When this signal is turned on, the DNC operation mode is entered.
Mode DNC operation can be performed while movement data from the host
computer is being received. ,d
+X-Axis +JX This is the start signal in +X-axis direction in manual system (jog, •
"I
step, and rapid feed operations). In jog operation mode or rapid op-
eration mode, the system moves while the signal is on and decelerates
and stops when the signal is off. In step opera_ion mode, the system
moves by one step when the signal rises from OFF to ON.
MODE]
JOGOPERATtON(JOG) _s
+ x.Ax,s(+Jx) J 1'
MOVEMENT
I 1 (
Turn on +JX signal after the elapse of at least 50 ms upon completion
of the signal operation of jog, step or rapid feed operation.
-X-Axis -JX Moving direction is changed to -X-axis direction by this signal.
Other functions are the same as in the case of +JX.
+Y-Axis +JY Moving direction is changed +Y-axis direction by this signal..Other

functions are the same as in the case of +JX.
-Y-Axis -JY Moving direction is changed to -Y-axis direction by this signal.

+Z-Axis +JZ Moving direction is changed to +Z-axis direction by this signal.

-Z-Axis -JZ Moving direction is changed to -Z-axis direction by this signal.

q
174
Signal Operation,
Handle Name Signal HX
Symbol When this signal is Function,
turned on Operation
during and Timing
simultaneous 1 -axis handle op-
X-Axis eration in handle operation mode, manual operation is possible for
X-axis. If this signal is turned on, during simultaneous 3-axis handle
operation (related parameter #1002 D6 = "1"), handle operation of the
X-axis only can be performed.
Handle Operation, HY When this signal is turned on during simultaneous 1-axis handle op-
Y-Axis eration in handle operation mode, manual operation is possible for
Y-axis. If this signal is turned on, during simultaneous 3-axis handle
operation (related parameter #1002 D6 = "1" ), handle operation of
the Y-axis only can be performed.
Handle Operation, HZ When this signal is turned on during simultaneous 1-axis handle op-
Z-Axis eration in handle operation mode, manual operation is possible for
Z-axis. If this signal is turned on, during simultaneous 3-axis handle
operation (related parameter #1002 D6 = "1"), handle operation of the
Z-axis only can be performed.
Return-to-Reference ZRN When this signal is turned on, the return-to-reference poin t mode
Point begins. Operation of return-to-reference point for each axis is started
by the signals listed below
Refe,e.ce
P_m
t ZRN ( --JX ( __jy )i
(- Jz)
x-axis
__ "
"1SignalI I ON +JX)
ON Jr-JY
OFF i +JZ
OFF
Y-axis I lION l OFF ! ON I OFF
Z-axis I ON I OFF t OFF i ON
Single BlOck SBK This is the single block operation signal in memory operation mode.
When the single block signal is on, the current block is executed and
the system stops when the block is completed. Turn on the start
signal (STR) for executing th e next .block.
Machine Lock MLK When this signal is turned on in memory operation mode and the
start signal (STR) is turned on, the current positio n display changes
depending on command, but the machifie will not move. However, M,
S, and T functions are executed. US e this signal when checking pro-
grams. --
M, S, and T FIN This signal clears the signal Output fromthe Mofionpack-ll0 and
Completion advances the program to the next block, •When this. signal is turned
on, M, S, and T signal outputs are as follows.
MOVE l I
OPERATION _ ". .
OUTPUT
(M1]- M.zB) J,.ms
LJ
, '1
* lF @
I I
M SYMBOLREADING _ I " " I
(MF) :
T-BCD
OUTPUT I
(TI 1- "1"28) H tins
T SYMBOLREADING ! " "

(TF) • .. .. ':
' "-2...... "
I . .
SPINDLESPEED I * " 1•
COMMAND _ tins ....... I .
S SYMBOLREADING f - .. I .
(SF) ; ., .........
(FIN) - . "
M, S, T COMPLETION " " "
• Set by parameter #1100. " :
• 175

External Fault ER This is the fault signal at machine side. When this signal is turned
on, alarm output signal (ARM) is output and temporary stop state
occurs.
EXTERNAL FAULT
(ER)
ALARM OUTPUT (ALM) i ,
i
MOVE OPERATION I i
RESET
Be sure to reset for restarting.

Axis Omission NEG When this signal is turned on beforehand even if the start signal
(STR) is turned on in the memory operation mode, only the specified
axis is not controlled and the machine does not move. The current
value display does not change either. The axis is specified in parame-
ter #1006.
Alarm Clear ACR !When this signal is turned on beforehand, even if the servo ready
signal (SVOK) is turned off, no alarm occurs. Normally, turn off the
signal and turn it on only if using the mechanical handle.
SERVO
READYCOMPLETED
(SVOK) I
'i,
A'AMC'EA.
(ACR)
1',-----4i
=>0. hs
Feed Override (1) OV1 This is the feed override selection signal. For the feed rate command-
Feed Override (2) OV2 ed by F symbol in the memory operation, three stages of L, M and H
overrides can be selected by the combination of OV1 and OV2. This
function is effective by setting parameter #1002-D2 to "0".
Three-stage override values are as follows.
Signal State
OVl OV2 Override Value

LO OFF OFF 0% override
L ON OFF 25% override

M OFF ON i 50% override
]
H ON ON i 100% override
L: Low speed M: Medium speed H: High speed
176
I FeedSignal Name(1)
Override SignalOV1
Symbol This is the 21-stage Function, Operation
feed override and signal.
selection Timing For the feed rate
Feed Override (2) OV2 commanded by F symbol in the memory operation, any one of the 21-
Feed Override (4) OV4 stage overrides can be selected by the combination of OV1, OV2, OV4,
Feed Override (8) OV8 OV8 and OV16. This function is effective by setting parameter #1002-
Feed Override (16) OV16 D2 to "1". The 21-stageoverride values are as follows.
Signal State
Stage Override Value
OVl 0V2 OV4 0V8 0V16
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 0%
.1 ON ()Ft r OFF OFF OFF 10%
2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 20%
3 ON ON OFF" OFF OFF 30%
4 OF'F OFF" ON OFF OFF 40%
5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 50%
7 ON ON ON OFF OFF 70%

I 6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 60%
8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 80%
9 ON OFF OFF" ON OFF" 90%
10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF 100%
11 ON ON OFF ON OFF ]10%
12 OFF OFF ON ON OFF 120%
13 ON OFF ON ON OFF 130%
I 15 ON
14 OFF ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON OFF
OFF 150%
140%
16 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 160%
17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 170%
18 OFF" ON OFF OFF ON 180%
19 ON ON OFF, OFF ON 190%
20 OFF OFF ON OFF ON 200%
Note: Override value of combinations not listed
above will be 0%.
t Rapid Feed ROV1 The signals are used to select override in rapid feedrate operation.
Override (1) The rapid feedrate set in parameters #1500, #1700 and #1900 can be '
overridden by combining ROV1 and ROV2 to select any override
Rapid Feed ROV2 value among three stages L, M, and H. Override values are listed
Override (2) below:
Signal State
ROV1 ROV2 OverrideValue

L0 OFF OFF 0% override
L ON OFF 25% override
M OFF ON 50% override
H ON ON 100% override
L: Low speed M: Medium speed H: High speed
Rapid Feed ROV3 When this signal is turned on, the override value by ROV1 and ROV2
Override Cancel is ignored and 100% of speed is used.
177

Jog Feedrate JOV1 The signals are used to select feedrate in jog operation. Any feedrate
Selection (1) value can be selected among 16 stages by using ON/OFF combination
ofdOV1, JOV2, JOV4, and JOV8. The feedrate values and parameter
Jog Feedrate JOV2 numbers are listed below:
Selection (2)
Signal State
Jog Feedrate JOV4 Stage Jog FeedrateSetting
Selection(4) JOV1 JOV2 JOV4 JOV8
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Feedrate 0_
Jog Feedrate JOV8
Selection (8) 1 ON OFF OFF OFF Parametersetting(#1104)
2 OFF ON OFF OFF Parameter setting (#1105)
3 ON ON OFF OFF Parameter setting (#1106)
4 OFF OFF ON OFF Parameter setting (#1107)
5 ON OFF ON OFF Parameter setting (#1108)
6 OFF ON ON OFF Parameter setting (#1109)
7 ON ON ON OFF Parameter setting(#1110)
8 OFF OFF OFF ON Parameter setting (#1111)
9 ON OFF OFF ON Parameter setting (#1112)
10 OFF ON OFF ON Parameter setting (#1113)
11 ON ON OFF ON Parameter setting (#1114)
12 OFF OFF ON ON Parameter setting (#1115)
13 ON OFF ON ON Parameter setting (#1116)

14 OFF ON ON ON Parameter setting (#1117) I
15 ON ON ON ON IParameter
I setting (#t118)
Step Multiplier MP1 This is the signal for selecting the quantity of feed of one step in step
MP2 operation. The quantity of feed of one step can be selected in three
stages and is set by parameters.
i Feed Amount/Step
MP1 MP2
Signal State !
Lo OFF i OFF [ Feed amount =0

kl ON L ' OFF i Parameter setting (#1122)
L2 OFF ON I Parameter setting (#1123)

L3 ON ON Parameter setting (#1124)
L,: Short, U,: Medium, L:,: Long
HANDLE_ This signal also selects the multiplier of move amount per pulse in
Multiplier/ manual operation.
Multiplier of Move Amount Signal State

per Pulse MP1 I MP2
x0 OFF I OFF
x2 ON I OFF
x 10 OFF I ON
x 100 ON t ON
178
Position Memory PMEM When this signal is turned ON, axis position displayed current value
is retained in the offset area. This memory is kept even after the
power is turned OFF.
To validate this funct_0n, set the system parameter #1003 D1 to 1.
POWER OFF ] ON ] OFF
r MEMORY
MEMORY
I
POSITIONMEMORY
(PMEM)
Memory Position Storing Position (offset No.)
Axis Position H88
H89
" H87
Forward Run of FRN If this signal is input when the spindle rotation speed is programmed
Spindle with the S code in memory operation, spindle axis module D/A
output is controlled according to combination with parameter #2004.
SPINDLE
SPEEDCOMMANd J
FORWA.O
OF SPINDLE .U. I I
(FRN)
D/A OUTPUTWHEN
#2004
= "I" 0+ J_///_'///_'/_
D/A OUTPUTWHEN + _/_'/_'//,_//_1

#2004= "3" 0 _
Reverse Run of RRN As with FRN, spindle axis module D/A output is controlled.
Spindle
SPINDLE _!
SPEED COMMAND
REVERSE RUN I I
OF SPINDLE (RRN)
D,A
OUTPUT
WHEN
0 +
#2004= "1"
F///////./A
D/A OUTPUT
#2004= "3" WHEN 0 + /_/_J._/4
Spindle Stop SSTP As with FRN, spindle axis module D/A output is controlled.
SPINDLE I
SPEED COMMAND
SPINDLE STOP I I
(SSTP)
D/A OUTPUT WHEN +
#2004= "1" 0 _
D/A OUTPUT WHEN +

#2004= "3" 0 _
179
9.2.2 DETAIL OF INPUT SIGNALS (Cant'd)
Spindle Gear OR.1 The siganls are used to select gear ratio in spindle gear change. Gear
Select(I) ratio can be selected among three stages L, M, and H by combining
GR1 and GR2. The maximum rotation speed on each gear is
Spindle Gear GR2 specifiedin the parameter.
Select(2)
Gear Signal State

Max Rotation Speed
Ratio GR1 GR2
Lo OFF OFF Stop
L ON OFF Parameter setting (#2150)
M OFF ON Parameter setting (#2151)
kl ON ON Parameter setting (#2152)
Optional Block SK1 This signal determines whether the data of a block containing "/"
Skip (1) SK2 (slash) are to be ignored or not in memory operation mode.
to SK3 When this signal is turned on, the selected block is ignored. For
Optional Block SK4 example,if SK1 signal is on, commands up to the end of block
Skip (8) SK5 containing "/" are all ignored.
SK6 Operation of this signal is ineffective for a block being executed
SK7 or a block stored in the buffer for advance reading. In the case of
SK8 memory operation, the operation becomes effective from the block
which has just been read.
Program Number Wll This signal is used for designating the program number from an
Input W12 external. Designation is possible from 01 to 99 with 2 BCD digits.
W14
Wl8
W21
W22
W24
W28
180
9.2.3 DETAIL OF OUTPUT SIGNALS
Motionpack- ll0
MOTION_MODULE ?,;I.&Cjt_I.N!___l__E_
......_._ MCRD
'
, CONTROLLFR
*"" ,,,.AR,,,
, ,,
STL ', _ CYCLE START
SPL ' L_ TEMPORARY STOP
_-_,_. oP 1___PROCRA,.'4
RUX
2C.N-40 DEN
zc_-_ M ,., L..__ ', t_)SITIONING .COMPLETED
2CN-4I MI)2 [._ PROGRAM STOP

i END OF PROGRAM
2CN-ll! M 30
, [__.' M SYMBOL READING

2CN-42 TV ' T SYMBOL READING
2 SF _L
" , S SYMBOLREADING
2CN-27 RST I
zpx
2_ , EXTERNALRESET
i _ X-AXIS REFERENCE POINT
ZCN.^Ij_.._
' ZPY , _ Y-AXIS REFERENCE POINT
ZCN-: 7 zpz Z-AXIS REFERENCE POINT
ZCN-'ZV M Iz _- UNI I'S

2CN- 4,'-) M 14
2CN- II M 18 _ DIG IT
.-,cx-:,, MZl L_ OUTPuTM'BCD

CODE
(00TO99)
'_'CN-.,,, M,*. _ TIE_ _S
2CN-31
2CN-15 M 28
M24 _ IT
2CN-47' T I1
t_T_
2CN- 16 T 12
_ UNITS
zcN-:r_, T1_ _ DIGIT .. " ' " . .
z -rl_ _ T-BCDCODE
•
2CNI17
.2CN • J.., T21
T 22 ' L4_ (00 TO 99)
,; OUTPUT
[-_ TENS
2_ T._4 L__ DIGIT

. J-5 T28
z Oz4V module mean those in standard 1/0

Note: Terminal. numbers oI_ motion
r,_ _4V t "

allocation.. ..
,,
___ __j o_t_+ _v_....
L__
Fig. 9.7 Connection of Output Signal
• : 181
I
9.2.3 DETAIL OF OUTPUT SIGNALS (Cont'd)
Table 9.6 Function, Operation end Timing of Output Signals (3-1)
Signal Name . Signal Symbol Function, Operation and Timing
Motion Controller MCRD This is the interlocking signal between the machine and motion
Ready module. When this signal ison, preparations for starting begin at
the machine side.
Alarm ALM When this signal is on, there is an alarm state in the system. For the
contents of alarm, refer to APPENDIX-1 LIST OF ALARM CODE.
Cycle Start STL This signal shows the automatic operation in progress and is turned
on during memory operation or single-block operation. The following
shows conditions which turn the cycle start signal off:
• Alarm
• Reset operation
• Stop signal ON
Temporary Stop SPL This signal is turned on when an automatic operation is halted by
stop signal (STP) during automatic operation.
MEMORY OPERATION [
(MEM)
STOP T
TEMPORARY STOP
(SPL)
i' i
I
I
u
t
f I
EXECUTED OPERATION EXECUTIONt STOP I EXECUTION
Program Run OP This signal is used to indicate program running and turned on during
memory or single-block operation. Under the following conditions,
the signal
signal.
is turned off.The current block executed for single-block
I
• Reset operation executed
• Program ended (MOO, M02, M30)
Positioning DEN When M and T codes were commanded by the same block of move
Completed . command, this signal is output after the completion of the move
command.
When there is no move command and M and T codes are com-
manded, this signal is output at the same time as BCD code. This
signal is not output if there is a move command. DEN signal output
is released when M and T completion signal (FIN) if returned to ,dn
Motionpack-ll0.
switching operation.
It is also released by reset operation or mode
I
MOVE OPERATION ] I
POSITIONINGCOMPLETED J I
(DEN)
I
4
__.J
M, S, T COMPLETED D
(FIN)
Program Stop MOO If MOO is read during automatic operation, the operation of the
relevant block is executed, automatic operation is halted and then MOO
signal is output, Restarting from the next block is possible after turn-
ing on the start signal (STR).
Endof Program M02 M02 is commanded at the end of program. When M02 is commanded
during automatic operation is halted, and M02 signal is output.
PROGRAM M02 EXECUTION
EXECUTION I
I
END
OFPROGRAM
(M02) STR J I
182
Return to Program Table M30 M30isOperation

9.6 Function, normally andcommanded
Timing at the end
of Output of program.
Signals (3-2) When M30is
Head after End of read during automatic operation, the operation of relevant block is
Program executed, automatic operation is halted, and M30 signal is output.
PROGRAM M30EXECUTION
EXECUTION 1
I
RETURN
TOPROGRAM
HEAD
AFTER
(M30) ENDOFPROGRAM* I I
I
/
NEXTSTART
SIGNAL
(STR) RETURN
• Returns to the head of program after M30 execution and waits.
M Symbol Reading MF This signal reads "M-BCDcodeoutput". The M symbol read signal
is output t msec after the "M-BCD code" output. Delay time is set by
)arameters, #1t00. The M symbol read signal is released when M, S;
and Tcompletion signal (FIN) is returned to Motionpack-ll0. It is
also released by reset operation or mode switching operation. MF is
P not o.utput in MOO, M02, M30 or internal

to M99).
MOVE OPERATION
processing
.
I !
M symbols (M90
CODE
OUTPUT
(M|MBCDI-M28) Jl , t ms I
I
' I
READING
_ I
(ME)
MSYMBOL j 1 Ii
I
M,S,T
COMPLETED
(FIN)
T Symbol Reading TF This is the read signal of "T-BCD code output". Tsymbol read
signal is output t msec after "T-BCD code output". Delay time is set
by parameters, #1100. T symbol read signal is released when the M
and T completion signal (FIN) is returned to Motionpack-ll0. It is
also released by the reset operation or mode switching operation. -
MOVE
OPERAT,ON
I I
I
I
'T-BeD . "
CODE..OUTPUT I
...
•. i .TSYMBOL
. (TI I-'I"28)
READING'
_ I l' "
(TF)
M,S,T
COMPLE'FED h '
(FIN) . . . .
S Symbol Reading SF This is the read signalof."spindle speed command". T symbol read
signal is 0utpUtt mseCafter "spindle speed command". Delay time is
set by parameter, #1100. T symbol read signal is released when the
M, S, and T completion signal (FIN.) is returned to Motionpack-ll0.
It is also.released by the reset operation or mode switching operation.
MovE OPERATION l I
I
I
I
SPINDLE
SPEED. "I
•COMMAND _._ ms
SSYMBOL i .... i
READNG
(SF) I
M,S,T - _'1
COMPLETED T I
• {FIN
t •= .
•- " • 183
9.2.3 DETAIL OF OUTPUT SIGNALS (Cont'd)
Table 9.6 Function, Operation and Timing of Output Signals (3-3)
Signal Name S!gnal Symbol Function, Operation and Timing

External Reset RST This is used as reset signal for other than Motionpack-ll0. This is
synchronized with the resetsignal (RESET) of Motionpack-ll0.
RESET
(RESET)
EXTERNAL(RsT)
RESET
X-axis Reference ZPX This signal is output only when the position is at the reference point
Point of X-axis.
Y-axis Reference ZPY This signal is output only when the position is at the reference point
Point of Y-axis.
Z-axis Reference ZPZ This signal is output only when the position is at the reference point
Point of Z-axis.
M-BCD Code Mll M21 This is "M-BCDcode" outputsignall It is output at the same time as
Output M12M22 the start of a block containing M symbol. "M-BCDcode" output is
(2-digit Output) M14 M24 released when M and Tcompletion signal (FIN) is returned to
M18 M28 Motionpack-ll0. It is also released by reset operation or mode switch-
mg operation. M-BCD code is not output in MOO, M02, M30 or inter-
nal processing M symbols (M90 to M99).
T-BCD Code Tll T21 This is "T-BCD code" output signal and is used to designate or select
Output T12 T22 tools. It is output at the same time as the start of a block containing
(2-digit Output) T14 T24 "T-BCD code". The output is not released even though the M and T
T18 T28 completion signal returns to Motionpack-ll0. It is held until a new T
symbol is designated. •
(Notch Signal As a special example, this signal is also used as notch signal
Output) output. However, if it is used as notch signal output, the T function
cannot be used. See Par. 4.2.14 and Par. 4. 2.15.
Alarm Code All A21 This signal is output alarm code at hexadecimal. When an alarm
Output A12 A22 does not occur, these signals are all OFF (0).
A14 A24
A18 A28
184
9.3 CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND CRT CONTROL
D STATION AND PERSONAL COMPUTER

Signals related to the CRT control station must be connected to 3 CN connector of the
motion module. For RS-422, the maximum cable wiring distance is 15 m. Shielded twisted
pair cables should be used.
9.3.1 CONNECTION BETWEEN CRT CONTROL STATION AND MOTION MODULE
CRT CONTROLSTATION STANDARD CABLEO MOTIONMODULE

TYPE JEFMC-H011 TYPE JEFMC-W0117 TYPE JEFMC-C02F-]
(OV) CNC-I-_ WIRING DISTANCE_lSmMAX_X

I -
D ......
_ov) CNC-__, ,' I

_' ov)
OV_3CN-2_(°v_
CNC-_ P ; _3CN-8C_)
((RX]D)Rx]D)
CNC-15 _, _llPJ'II _, 3CN-14 (TXD_
( TXlD) CNC-8 _ 3C-0 {RXD)

CTXlD,CNC-14 Ip: , _ (RxD)
( OV
)
(+5\;)
D L_ 3CN-12 ( R'rs)
L_ 3CN-11 ( CT$ )
(RTS )
( FG)
( F(.;) CNC.20 FG
_r 3CN-20 (.CTS)
Fig. 9.8 Connection between CRT Control
D Station and Motion Module
...... ,._ .
• _ .... .. ..•
..-. _,. ,. ,
185
9.3.2 CONNECTION BETWEEN PERSONAL COMPUTER AND MOTION MODULE
Where the personal computer is used for programming, parameter transmission or system
status monitoring, the personal computer can be connected directly to motion module (to
3CN) or through the CRT control station (to CNB) to the motion module. The same cables
can be used in both the cases.
9.3.2.1 Personal Computer, , Motion Module
PERSONAL COMPUTER STANDARD CABLE(_) MOTION MODULE

MODEL PC8201 (NEC) TYPE HEFNC-W020[_] TYPE JEFMC-C02[_]
7 0V _ 3CN-I (OV)
3CN-2 (OV)
I_
i
(lm)
E
I
'
=
3CN-
3CN-3
18 ( DS"-'-R)
(0V)
C 3CN- 15 (RXD)
I E 3CN-4
.3CH-12 +5V)
DSR)
4 I 3CN-lO RTS)
5 3CN-II CTS)
(CTS)
(RXD)_ 3 3CN-16 RTS)
(JUNCTION) 1_ [ !
I i
(_I'XD) 2,- i .(_3 CN- 9 (nxl))
•)
?
(FC) l/(. FG 1 3CN-20 (FC)
* Resistor (4.7k_) may not be required in accordance

with type of personal computer. In that case, shortcircuit
across terminal numbers 3 and 18.
Fig. 9.9 Connection between Personal Computer

and Motion Module
1 86
9.3.2.2 Personal Computer_--_CRT Control Station_ ,Motion Module
PERSONAL COMPUTER STANDARD CABLE@ CRT CONTROL STATION STANDARD CABLE@ MOTION MODULE
MODEL PC8201 (NEC) TYPE JEFMC-W020 TYPE JEFMC-H011 T.YPE JEFMC-W01F-] TYPE JEFMC-C02D
WIRING DISTANCE:
______C!__Z__
I 15_M_ ir
I I
"" _CNB-I (OV) (oV,CNC-I(_ OV I""; j4_.3CN-_ ](0V)

. , c_ :_CN- 2 (0v)
_.v) : ov . ;_(ov)
L.._.@.._.8 ( '5"_-R ) _,,V)CNC-Z( ov : _(ov_"
I.CNB-3 (0v, L.@3CN-18
E ,CNB-I5(RXD)
CNB- 12(DSR ) ,3CN* 12

E_ .CNB-.i (+5V) [_,3CN-4 ,+5V)
,3CN- 1o( RTS )
5 .CNB- II(CTS) ' .3CN- II(CTS)

(CTS)(RTS)"---"_4
/ "_ E ,CNB-I(IiRTS, ,' E --
_ 16(RTS) ' 3CN- 16(RTS)
(RXD) 3- 341_ _ _ _.__B_ - ] 7 ( C'_ ) i', E 3 CN- ,7( C-"T._,

(JUNCTION) 18. , ; s_fCNB]8 (TX2D)(RXID)CNC-9 _ ; I 3CN-8 (TXD)
' 3CN- 14 (TXD)
'
i '
I I (RX1D)CNC-I,'-__ _ ; ,
(:r'XD) 2 I , , _CNB-9 (RX2D) (TXID)CNC-8 ', 3CN-9 (RXD)
" (TXID)CNC-14 ! i 3CN-i.S(RXD)
(FG) ,/ FG _ CNB-20(FG) (FG) CNC-2( FG '_' 3CN-20(FC)

' _ _ " ;
I
I _
* Resistor (4.7 kf2) may not be required in accordance

Fig. 9.10 Connection between Personal Computer

and Motion Module via CRT Control Station
1 87
9.3.3 CONNECTION BETWEEN DNC PERSONAL COMPUTER AND MOTION MODULE
Where the personal computer is used for DNC communication, the computer is connected to
motion module (to 8CN).
PERSONAL COMPUTER STANDARD CABLE(_ MOTION MODULE

FOR DNC TYPE JEFMC-W020 TYPE JEFMC-C027
MODEL PC8201 ( NEC
lira)
t
(OV) 7 OV I _- _ --'8CN-I (OV)

8CN-2 (0V)
8CN-3 (0V)
8CN- 15 ( RXDA )
" _ 8CN- 18
8CN-4 _+SV)
,8CN-12
(RTS)-'--_4
( CTS ;
5 _]
/
<-
K 8CN-ll
8CN-1(, ,CTSA)
,RTSA)
I
(RXD) 3-------2 ,8CN- 16 fRTSA )
(JUNCTION) 18i
:Tk. i,1
F- 8cN-,7,CT A,
.8CN-8 (TXDA)
,
' 8CN-9 (RXDA)
(TXD) z ,,
, '
(FG) r" FG 8CN-20 (FG
* Resistor (4.7kQ) may not be required in accordance

across terminal numbers 3 End 18.
Fig. 9.11 Connection between Personal Computer /

for DNC and Motion Module
188
9.4 CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND AXIS MODULES
k Transmission between the,motion module and axis modules is made through FA bus signal
cables. Up to 4 axis modules can be connected to the motion module via standard cable (_.
MOTION MODULE STANDARD CABLE (_ AXIS MODULE

TYPE JEFMC-C02[] TYPE JEFMC-W084 TYPE JEFMC-B011
r ",
II __}
C.__.NN
6 : I .__; I DATA "¢lCN-'[0
6CN- 20_ !t DATA I
6 CN - 9
- [$ t Osv I
_SCN- 1_ I 0_,' I tCX-19

6CN- 3 CK I 1 CN- 3
6CN-18 ). I C"K I "7';'.;1CN- 18

6CN-4 y I 05v I '_._ CN-4
6CN-17 _ . I O5,.' I "[A1CN-17
I SEL I FL_CN- 16
oct-16 _ l c.---_.
6
_6CN-£._ r o_,, I ,_(:1
l 6CN- 15(_, I} Osv [ ¢ CN-15
l 6 CN -- _i_ [ SLAM I CN-7
! 6CN- 10_ I CLKOFF I ' ,ICN- 10

6CN- 11L. I Osv I CN-It
I I
, I I
4CN-7 _ L .......
"_ J
b 4CN-12 _ X
4CN-
4 CN - 13
4CN-
18 ).
)-
).
\ 20-CORE FLAT CABLE
4 CN'- ll)
4 CN- 16 ),
4CN-I1
4CN-17 ).
4CN-8 f
4CN- _,
4CN-9
4 CN- 15_
4CN-4 [
+5V [ 4CN-5"_[I-
4CN-6 ._[
4CN-1 f/
osv I _CN-2
;,_
4CN-3 I_[, : " '
FG 4CN- 20
Fig. 9.12 C0nnection between Motion Module

and Axis Module
189
9.5 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND Servopack,
TG AND PG
9.5.1 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES ANDServopack
Signals related to the servo should be connected to 3CN connectors of axis modules. These
signals include speed command signals, TG feedback signals, BASE BLOCK signals, etc.
Use shielded twisted pair cables.
AXIS MODULE STANDARD CABLE(_

TYPE JEFMC-B011 TYPE JEFMC-W14LJ Servopack
WIRING DISTANCE: 3m MAX
r,
_"--" DAS
1 ! I REFERENCE
3CN-II ( IP I 0V INPUT
, i ' I
1 i EXTERNAL
I I 0D POWER SUPPLY
I
3CN- 1._/ . Pi I - VD _
I I
3CN- 17 , ; I +TG
I I TG INPUT
3CN-
: I / I --TG __
J I BS I
I t BASE BLOCK
• 3CN-5 1 !
"(_ iP II BSo , ]SIGNAL
_ i / =_0 FAILURE
:gCN- V
0=4 V
3CN- 13 OVF
_ OVERTRAVEL (R)
3CN- 12 OVR
3CN- DEC O O_- 0VERTRAVEL (F)

DECELERATION LS
Fig. 9.13 Connection between Axis Module and Servopack

• i
190
I
i 9.5.2 using
For CONNECTION BETWEEN
DC Servomotor, signals AXIS
related MODULES AND detector)
to TG (speed TG AND andPGPG (position detector)
should be connected to 2CN of axis modules. Two kinds of 5 V line driver output types and
12 V transistor output types are availab]e for PG, requiring a suitable connection for each
type.
For using AC Servomotor, PG signal should be input via the AC Servopack due to
PG and TG signal processing in the AC Servopack.
9.5.2.1 For DC Servomotor 5V Line Driver Output PG
As an IC for 5 V line driver, it is recommended that type SN75174 or equivalent be usedf

STANDARD CABLE@ FEEDBACK UNIT
AXIS MODULE TYPE JEFMC-W07F-] TYPE TFUE-[_[_][]ZD7 OR -E][_I--ISC
TYPE JEFMC-B011 (5V LINE DRIVER OUTPUT)
__ _ WIRING DISTANCE: 25m MAX _ __
• "_1 ' TG
I
I
I
I I
(2CN-18*) 2CN-16 , I
q PA L A
(2CN-19")
2CN- . II: 1,B \
JPG
(2CN-17*) 2CN-19 , PI I P'--B
• f FOR5V)
2CN- 14' , I PC , R 7
2CN-15' , Pl Ii P-'C _ S /
+5V 2CN-4 . I +5V H /
0sV 2CN-I I I 05V

I I 2CN-5 ' , I +5V
i x /
2CN-.O_ I FG T
*For only feedback unit, type TFUE-[[[[[I_SC. ' ' "
Fig. 9.14 Connection between •Axis' Module

and Feedback Unit With 5V PG
191
9.5.2.2 For DC Servomotor 12 V Transistor Output PG
FEEDBACK UNIT
AXIS MODULE STANDARD CABLE (_ TYPE TFUE-[I_-___jZC7
TYPE JEFMC-B011 TYPE JEFMC-W16r-7 OR -,_]{_]SAB* _
WIRING DISTANCE: 15m MAX (12V TRANSISTOR OUTPUT)
I I
2CN-1 _-"} "O l _1
.2CN-I I "O , 1
I i lk_ I I
' °71 ', P_ LA. I

&N-18>
_ " ! _ Z l iPI', 0.v 1\
o.v,,_,? !_1 _ J_ ', I/ ',,,
I=cN-,6>/
•1 I =CN-,.. ,1 '' _ _ /I
_, I PB I L"
/ --_ i ,_ l ipll o,v I 1 "
I_ , IPl', "_
o_ 0.v ._.___//IFOR
IZVl
+sv _CN-4
r _'"l -C ' I 12v __.E/
_
I2c_-l_- ',;
,', <c I_IIov
, i I[I
' "* !I"-',., 'J"

Vov i
JUNCTION TERMINAL
4-
12VDC 12V ]_'_ iI - *2 *I For only feedback unit, type TFUE-[:][:_]SAB.
POWERSUPPLY I *2 Arrange PG wires in such a manner that this i_
FORP6 I I distance becomes as short as possible.
11
I..._
0v ," _.J
_j_
Fig. 9.15 Connection between Axis Module
and Feedback Unit with 12V PG
Connections of shielded cables at the junction terminals should be as shown below.
I _..I_- _ FUNCTION TERMINAL
CABLE
SHIELDED WIRE
Fig. 9.16 Shielded Cable Connection using Junction Terminals
1 92
/
/
/
9.5.2.3 PG for ACServomotor,-'"
AXIS MODULE TYPE JEFMC-W15['_] AC Servopack AC Servomotor

I JEFMC-B011 STANDARD
WIRING CABLE
DISTANCE: 3m@MAX CACR-SR[]r.-j USA _I]!_][_!-L'_][.]
!l" =
fl CN-s3
2 CN - 18",J_
z PB ! ! _ZlCN - 35 2C . -,
--
_fi I I ,
;>
I " I PC
CN - 19 PB '1'
t ,.£2
_1 CN - 36 :,
Ii I
a_ PC ' i r/1 '
z__ PC ' li . ' *
- ----_ ! "i >flcN-zo "_.
ZCN-I'D 0V ! i
= -_-_m_ ' I ._'1 CN- 1 '
_2
CN-_____
ov ',' ',' _qCN-2 t
2 CN - _0_i_____._________ _, 1 CN- 18
__i
• For detailed information, see the technical manual.
Fig.9.16 Connection between Axis Module and PG for AC Servomotor
9.6 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND SPINDLE DRIVES
For transmission of speed reference signal from AC adjustable speed drives, connector 3CN
AC ADJUSTABLE
D is used. Power supply (_+15\ 1, 20 mA) is needed.
AXIS MODULE SPEEDDRIVES
TYPE JEFMC-B011 VS626MTIIB
[-
,
_----_ 3 CN- 14
POWER o,_ , 3CN-I

SUPPLY 3CN-2
(_+15V, 20mA)
3CN-15
D DAS
,
3CN-18 _ f "_ ICN-9
EXTERNAL /_ I i ; ISPEED
0v l I _ .... o/REFERENC
3CN-,I I ) "T ....... [INPUT
] 1,,cN.j
SAL - t CN-35 ALARM
3CN-7 _1 --
OVF
. 1CN-34
oo] "
3CN-12_
3CN-13 I
3CN-6 . ..
3CN-20 i
+24V . ]
+24V 024V
Fig. 9.17 Connection between Axis Module 193

and Spindle Drive
9.7 CONNECTION BETWEEN MICRO PC MODULE AND
MOTION MODULE/PERSONAL COMPUTER
9.7.1 CONNECTION BETWEEN MICRO PC MODULE AND MOTION MODULE
Transmission between the micro PC module and the motion module is made through FA
but signal cables (standard cable _}) ).
MICRO PC MODULE STANDARD CABLE MOTION MODULE

TYPE JEFMC-B110 TYPE JEFMC-Wl00 TYPE JEFMC-C02[_
--!I
4CN-7
_ , . _o_ ,_._7
I t
E I
4CN-14 II II DATA ¢ 4CN-14
II II DATA .L 4CN-I5
4CN-15
I I
4CN-16 ' I 1I, C"-'K _4CN-16

1 CK 4CN-17
4CN-17 'I
I
4CN-18 I I
4CN-19
,,, I SEL / 4CN-19
I
I
6CN-16
6CN-5 I
6CN-18
6CN-]
6CN-3 t 9
6CN-20
6 CN- 2O
6CN-2
0V
6CN-4
6CN-6
6CN-11_
6CN-15 _
6CN- 17 _
6CN-19 @
_ !
Fig. 9.18 Connection between Micro PC Module
and Motion Module
194
9.7.2 CONNECTION BETWEEN MICRO PC MODULE AND PERSONAL COMPUTER
P
PERSONAL STANDARD CABLE
COMPUTER TYPE JEFMC-W020 MICRO PC MODULE
MODEL PC8201(NEC) TYPE JEFMC-B110
- (lm)
OV
--
3CN-I (0V)
(OV) I L
3CN-2 (0V)
I
L 3CN- 18
3CN-3 (0V)
E 3CN- 15 (RXD)
3CN-4 (+SV)
E 3CN - 12
(RTS)_4_---1 5,
(CTS) E 3CN-10
_CN-II (RTS)
(CTS)
.7kfl 3CN- 17 (CTS)
(JUNCTION) 1 I 3CN-8 (TXD)

I
2 3CN-9 (RXD)
,
(TX'---6) , ,( --
?
I , FG I 3CN-20 (FC)
6
(FG)
D * Resistor (4.7 kQ ) may not be required in accordance

Fig. 9.19 Connection between Micro PC Module

and Personal Computer
195
9.8 CONNECTION BETWEEN MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR AND
MOTION MODULE 9
Fig. 9.20 shows connection of the manual pulse generator and motion module. For the
manual pulse generator which operates on 5 V, the power supply incorporated in the motion
module can be used. For the manual pulse generator which operates on 12 V, an external
power unit of 12 V must be provided. Supply voltage of manual pulse generator type
RPEH-2EST/100M ranges from 5 VDC to 12 VDC.
MOTION MODULE
TYPES JEFMC-C023, -C027
F- WIRINGDISTANCE:lmMAX
(+ VDD)1 /_'-"_ +5V 7CN-4 (+5V)

' i I
I . r I [ 0V 7CN-1 (0, V)
_/(o v)// 2 I I
_SIMULTANEOUS\ r [ [ XHA 7CN-8 (XHA)
( 1-AXIS ) ' ]1 [I 7CN-9 (XHA)
_ONLY / (B) 4 I ] XHB 7CN-14 (XHB)

I I
i . = 7CN-15 (XHB)
1
i
I 0V 7CN-2 (05V)
YHA 7CN-IO (YHA)

_ +5V F 7CN-5 (+5V)
Y-AXIS _'_ ,_, . iI' [ 7CN-11(YHA)
; _ YHB 7CN-16 (YHB)

I [ 7CN-17 (YHB)
1 '
I
I
1
i
'
[
I
(+ VD,9I [ I
I
/,_/(0 v) 2 I 0V 7CN-3 (05V)
Z-AXIS (" × _"- (A) 3 I I ZHA 7CN-12 (XHA)
I w
(B) 4 II II ZHB 7CN-18(ZHB)

i [ [ 7CN-13 (ZHA)
_. I 7CN- 19 (ZHB)
t I +SV _ 7CN-6 (+5V)
7CN-20 (FG)
[
Note:
1. Connect to the X-axis terminal, when manual handle (1-axis) is used
simultaneously. The axis is changed by axis change signals
(HX, HY, HZ).
2. When manual handle (3-axis) is used simultaneously, the axis change
signals HX, HY, and HZ must be turned on. See Par. 9.2.2.
3. To use 12 V power supply, connect external power supply 12 V and
0 V to pulse generator terminals 1 and 2, respectively.
Fig. 9.20 Connection between 5V Pulse Generator and

Motion Module (for 3 Axis)
196
9.9 CONNECTOR TERMINAL NUMBER AND SIGNAL NAMES
D 9.9.1 MOTION MODULE, TYPE JEFMC-C02[]
Connector terminal numbers on the panel of motion module and signal names are as shown
below. Power supply terminals for 5 VDC are also provided. Signal names of connectors
with * show those in standard I/O allocation.
CONNECTOR 1CN* (MR-50RMA)
Oz4V HANDLEDNC OVl OV8 ROV2 JOY2 PMEM SSTP +JZ -JY HX MP1 GR2 ER ZRN MLK
1 R21DAP 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 [ 18 [[
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
STEP MEM OV20V16 [ROV3 JOV4 RRN +JX PRT -JZ HY MP2 SOR (_
+33V_4 34
JOG 35
MDI 36
EDIT 37
OV4 38 39
ROVI[JOV1 40
JOV8 41
FRN 42
+JY 43
-JX 44
CLP 45
HZ 46
GRI 47
SBK NE48G 49
FIN 50
ESP
CONNECTOR 2CN* (MR-50RMA)
1 2 3 4 5 6 ? 8 9 10 11 12 i
r
13 14 15 16 17 t 18
Oz4V WI1 W14 i W22 SKI SK4 SK7 SPL MOO M30 SIr ZPY i MII , M18 M24 T12 T21 I T24
19 20 21 22 23 24 2_ 26 27 !28, 29 I 30 31 32
w18 w24 SK2 SK5 SK8 OP MF RST I ZPZ M12 M21 [ M28 T14
46 ' 47 48 49 [
1
50
i SK6STLOEN
I ZPX
iZ,'S,M., M'22
:iT. T18T22
I T28
CONNECTOR 3CN (MR-20RMA)
1 2 3 4 5 6 I 7
OsV OsV OsV +5V +5V +5V
I
D TXD
8 RXD
9 RTS
,0 CTS
11 12 ,3
14 15 16 17 18 19 I 20 6CN
T×DR×D
RTSle I t I FC
CONNECTOR 4CN (MR-20RMA) 1C N
I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3N
OsV OsV O5V +5V +5V +5V CLKOFF
8 9 10 11 12 ,3
DATA DATA CK CK SEL SEL
14 ,5 16 17 18 19 20
m
DATA DATA CK CK I SEL

I
SEL FG
CONNECTOR 5CN* (MR-20RMA 2CN 7CN
l 2 3 4 [
i 5 6 7
STR STP RESET SKIP SVOK MRDY +24V POWER SUPPLY
8 9 10 Ii 12 13 (5VDC) TERMINAL
'4 15 '6 17 '8 19 " 20
ALM MCRD SVON Oa,1V

CONNECTOR 6CN (3428-6OO2)
DATA
1 O5V
2 CK
3 OsV
4 SEL
5 OsV
6 S7MLA 8 9 CLKOFF
10 Note: name
nal Each is
pin described
number and
in sig-
the
20 19 18 17 16 15 ,4 13 12 ,1 place shown below.
DATA OsV CK OsV SEL OzV OsV
SIGNAL. NAME
_ PIN NUMBER
Fig. 9.21 Connector Terminals (Pins) and Signal Names of Motion Module
197
9.9.1 MOTION MODULE, TYPE JEFMC-C02[r-(Cont'd)
• For only Motion Modules Types JEF.MC-C023 and -C027 9

8 9 l0 ll 12 13
XHA XHA YHA YHA ZHA ZHA
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
XHB XHB' YHB YHB ZHB ZHB FG
• For only Motion Module Type JEFMC-C027

1 2 3 _4 5 6 7
OaV 05V OsV +5V +5VI+5V ,din
8 9 10 ll 12 13 •
TXDA RXDA RTSA CTSA 1
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
TXDA RXDARTSA CTSA FG
Fig. 9.21 Connector Terminals (Pins) and
Signal Names of Motion Module (Cont'd)
198
9.9.2 AXIS MODULE, TYPE JEFMC-B011
Connector terminal numbers on the panel of axis module and signal names are as shown
below. Power supply terminals for 5 VDC are also provided.
CONNECTOR 1CN (FRC2-C20L11-OS)
'
i 1 2 3 I 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DATA OsV CK OsV SEL OsV SLAM i CLKOFF
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
DATA OsV CK OsV SEL OsV i OsV

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ]
OsV O5V OsV +5V +5V +5V
8 9 10 11 12 13
+TG -TG
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
D PC
CONNECTOR
-
PC PA
3CN (MR-20RMA)
PA PB PB FG
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 POWER SUPPLY
OD OD BS BSO +24V SAL (5VDC) TERMINAL

8 9 10 11 12 13
-TG OV OVR OVF

I
14 15 16 I +TG
17 18 '+19V24DEC
20 586-256
+VD -VD DAS
D Fig. 9.22 Connector Terminals (Pins) and Signal Names of Axis Module
9.9.3 CRT CONTROL STATION, TYPE JEFMC-H011
Connector terminal numbers on the rear of CRT control station (JEFMC-H011) and signal
names are as shown below. Power supply terminals for 100/110 VAC are also provided.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D CONNECTOR CNB (_4R-20RMA) CONNECTORICNC, MR-20RMA)
O_V OsV OsV +5V +5V +5V OsV OsV
8 . 9 l0 12 13
8 9 10 11 12 13 _ 11
ITX2D RX2D RTS2 CTS2 DSR2 TXID RXID i
I 14 I 15 16 I 17 ID_R2 _ 19 20
TXlDiR×IDi
14 15 16 17 18 19
FO
20
585-187
CNB POWER SUPPLY

100/110 VAC
Fig. 9.23 Connector Terminals (Pins) and Signal Names

ov Hear of CRT Control Station
199
9.9.4 MICROi_C MODULE, TYPE JEFMC-B110
Connector teri-hinal numbers on the panel of micro PC module and signal names are as q
shown below. Power supply terminals for 5 VDC are also provided. Signal names of
connectors with * show those in standard I/O allocation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
0.. V _D52:0 ,5200D2 =5200D5:_2:1 _52:1 _52:1 _D5202 ,D52:2 45202_ .D2:3_ :ZD52:3.,5204D0 _52:4 =5204D6._5205D1 _52_)5 =5205D6
19 2¢J 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
=5200 =5200 #5201 =520] #5201 =5202 =5202 _$52031_,5203 #5203 =5204 =5204 _5204 :$5205
D3 D6 DI D4 D7 D2 D5 DO D3 D6 DI D4 D7 D2
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
_;5200 ,5200 =5200 ,520] ,5201 ,5202 =5202 _5202 ,5203 :_5203 =5203 #5204 g52041:_5205 =5205 _5205 .5205
+24V
D1 D4 D7 D2 D5 DO D3 D6 D1 D4 D7 D2 D5 DO D3 D5 D7
CONNECTOR 2CN (MR-50RMA) •

I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 l0 II 12 }3 14 15 16 17 18
155206 _5206 :_5206 _5207 t¢5207 ,5207 _:5300 $5300 ,5300 g5301 "-5301 ,5302 _5302 _:5302 ,5303 #5303 _5303
02. V DO D 2 D 5 DO D 3 D 6 D 1 D 4 D 7 D 2 D 5 DO D 3 D 6 D 1 D4 D 6
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
g5206 =5206 g5207 #5207 =5207 _:5300 _5300 g5301 =5301 t:5301 95302 X_5302 #5302 :t5303
D3 D6 DI D4 D7 D2 D5 DO D3 D6 DI D4 D7 D2
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
S5206 .5206 t¢5206 #5207 t35207 :$5300 ,5300 :_5300 #5301 =5301 $:5301 _5302 :_5302 _:5303 "5303 =5303 ¢_5303
-.'-24V
D-I D4 D7 D2 D5 DO D3 D6 DI D4 D7 D2 D5 DO D3 D5 D7
CONNECTOR 3CN (MR-2ORMA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
OsV O_V 0sV +SV +5V +5V
8 9 10 11 12 13
TX-D RXD RTS CTS
14 1"5 16 17 18 19 20
TXD RXD RTS CTS FG --6CN

1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0sV 0sV 0sV -_ 5V -F5V +57 CLKOFF -- 4CN

8 9 10 11 12 13
DATA DATA _ CK SEL SEL

POWER SUPPLY
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 (5VDC) TERMINAL
DATA DATA CK CK SEL SEL FG
CONNECTOR 6CN (3428-6002) 586-266
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 _0
DATA O?V CK OsV SEL OaV SLAM CLKOFF
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 ,dm
I
DATA 0sVi CK 0sV SEL 0aV ] 0sV q
I
200 Fig. 9.24 Connector Terminals

of Micro PC(Pins)
Module and Signal Names
9.10 SIGNAL CABLES
9.10.1 LIST OF CABLES 9
Cables are listed in Table 9.7. Usually cables are to be prepared by the users, but the
YASKAWA can provide them if desired. Shown in Fig. 9.1 are the connections between
units with standard configuration and also cable names.
Table 9.7 List of Cables
Cable Application Connector Cable Type Cable Specifications Supplied by Yeskawa

Symbol
(_) Communication MRP-20F/MR-20L KQVV-SW
cable 3P × AWG26 L Type JEFMC L
Control panel_ C = '_ = 13 -W010

-W011 5m
i0 m
Motion module S-CNC M-3CN -W012 15 m
(_ Communication MRP-20F/MR-20L KQVV-SW

cable DB-25P/DB-C2-JG 3P × AWG26
lm I
Personal JEFMC-W020
computer<---* ''
Motion module/ M-3CN,M-8CN
Micro PC or P-3CN
module
(_ TG, PG signal MRP-20F/MR-20L KQVV-SB

lOP × 0.2 L Type JEFMC k
Axis module*--* Packaged -W070 10 m
Servomotor shield oi ,, -i = -W071 15 m •
A-2CN -W072 25 m
@ FA bus signal 3421-6520SB 20-core
Rack-mounted FRC2-AA20-10 [- I [ I I
type
FRC2-AO20-10 Flatcable __ TYPE JEF MC-W084

30m 40_ 40_ 40_
(For 1- to 4-axis) •
(_ FA bus signal MRP-20F/MR-20L KQVV-SB

10P × 0.2 220 mm
Micro PC Packaged Type
module*---* shield " ' JEFMC--Wl00
Motion module P-4CN M-4CN
(_ I/O signal MRP-20F/MR-20L KQVV-SB

10P × 0.2 L Type JEFMC L
Motion
Machine
module
side Packaged
shield [_ .... I -W110
W111 _ 2m
lm
I/O M-SCN -W112 L 5m
(_ I/O signal MRP-50F/MR-50L KQVV-SB

50C x 0.2
Motion module
*--*Machine side Type JEFMC L

I/O L
Micro PC .... W121 2m

M-ICN or
module _--_ P-1CN -W 122 5m
Machine side
expansion
I/O
i_ -W120 1m 9
202
Table 9.7 List of Cables
Cable
Symbol Application Connector Cable Type Cable Specifications Supplied by Yaskawa
(_ i I/O signal MRP-50F/MR-50L KQVV-SB
50Cx0.2
Motion module
*---*Machineside I L TypeJEFMC L
I/O , -W 130 l m
d " "- -W131 2m
I Micro PC M-2CN or
P-1CN -W 132 5m
module*---*
Machine side
expansion I/O
(_ rAC/DC MRP-2OF/MR-20L KQVV-SB

Servopack 10P x 0.2 _ L ] Type JEFMC L
Axis module-,-_ shield

Packaged " [_ ,, ,-
i -W141
-W140 l m
0.5 m
AC/DC
Servopack A-3CN -W 142 3m
(_ AC Serve PG MRP-20F/MR-20L KQVV-SB
Packaged -W 150 0.5 m
D Axis
signal module*---* shield
4P x AWG26 _ -L __ r-- - WJEFMC
Type l 51 1 Lm
AC Servopack A-2CN -W 152 3m
(_ AC Serve, 12V MRP-20F/MR-20L Combined

PG signal Signal cable L Type JEFMC L
Axis module*-*
DC Servomotor
4Px0.2
Packaged
shield
d
A-2CN
....
-W160
W161
-W 162
' 10m
15 m
25 m
D 9.10.2 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
Signal lines of Motionpack-ll0 should be connected with MR connectors. Cables should be

selected in accordance with Tables 9.8 and 9.9. Twisted cable should be KQVV-SB 10P x
0.2 mm 2 (or 3P x AWG26) shown in Table 9.10.
Table 9.8 Cables
D Type _ Crimp type/solder

MRP-5OF/MR-50F type - Crimp type/so|tier type
' MRP-20F/MR-20F
No. of Cores 50 cores 20 cores
Applicable Wire AWG _24-_28 AWG _24-_28

Cutter Diameter 16 ram dia max 10 mm dia max
Plastic multicoi:e control cable
(Example) (Example)
KQVV50C x0.2 . . KQ VV20C X 0.2
(0.2 mm 2, 50 cores) (0.2 mmZ, 20 cores)
Recommended manufactured by Fuj{kura Ltd. manufactured by Fujikura Ltd.
Cable Cores: 0.2 mm 2 tin-plated sob copper standard:. "

wires, 16/0.12 (cores/ram)
Insulating material; Bridged •vinyl
Thickness: 0.3 mrn
Funished outer dia: 1.1 mm : .
D AWG TableSectional
9.9 Dimensions
Area gf of Cores
" Standard Outer Dia of"
Conductor mm" . . vinyl !nsulation mm
24 0.21 1.5 "- Recommended
_26 0.13 1.3
28 0.08 1.2 203

9.10.2 CABLE SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
Table 9.10 Twisted Cables I
Specifications
Item _n_t
KQVV-SB
NO. of Pairs Pair 10
Material " -- Tin-plated soft copper stranded wires

Nominal Sectional Area mm 0.2
Conductor
Configuration Numbers/ram 16/0.12
Outer Diameter mm 0.55
Insulation Material -- Bridged rinyl

Thickness mm 0.3
Circuit Configuration -- Paired strands with pitch of 18, 22, 25, 32
Holding -- Wound with paper tape
Shielding -- Tin-plated soft copper wire braid
Sheath Material and Color -- Vinyl, black I

"qm
Thickness mm 1.2
Approx Finished Outer Dia mm 10.0
Approx Weight kg/km 130
9.10.3 CONNECTOR
9.10.3.1 External Dimensions in mm t
®
Type_
_ c,,mh^ I A B C D
(_)
(_) Connector cover
Cable clamps
--® , (_) Connector clamp spring

Symbol
(_) Connector clamp Name
screw
g (_)* Connector(MRP-_ MR-50F)_°F

B D mE • ._V
• MRF-_v: Crimp type, MR-_F: Solder type.
Note:
1. Manufacturer: Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co:
2. Applicable cable outer dia:
MR-20L--10mm dia max
MR-50L--16mm dia max i
3. Special tools are necessary for crimp type. 1
Fig. 9.25 External.Dimensions of Connector in mm
204
9.10.3.2 Terminal Number and Dimensions in mm
I 2.6 X 17 = .14.2
-- ,&. ¢_. rk ¢'k rk ,,.k t,_ tk ¢'k et ,,k .,'k rk ,.'k
rk t'&lt&l¢'k _ _ ek e'k _k,et ek .,"k _ ek ,"kl _ rket
/
E I
_-_ 2.6
2.6 × 17,= 3?,.8
_, 6.1 , 2.6x6=15.6
I
2.6
I _) t _ / *'_' _,,,'FI,_,_P,:,'F "-'q_F-I 2°c°REs
I 2.6 × 5= 13.0_
Note: Figures above are viewed from wiring side of the connector.
Fig. 9.26 Connector Terminal Number and Dimensions in mm
9.11 WIRING PRECAUTIONS
I 9.11.1 PREVENTION OF INTERFERENCE BETWEEN WIRES
In the Motionpack-ll0 system, various cables with different power levels and signal speeds
are located in proximity, such as wires for main circuit of motor and wires for PG signals.
If a cable for applying a large current, such as main circuit for motor, is located near high
speed signal lines for PG or bus signals, noise might be induced in the signal tines,
resulting in an erroneous operation.
I It is important to prevent interference between wires. Wiring can be roughly divided

into three kinds as shown in Table 9.11
Table 9.1 Classification of Wiring
Classification Category I Category _ Category
Contents Wires carrying large cur- Wires which may be adverse- Wires for digital or analog•
rents or high speed signals ly affected by noise induction signals which are relatively
which may induce noise in from oi_her wires. Stable.
otherwires. i , _ " . _ . . .
Applicable • Wiring between Servopack • Wiring between PG, TG • I/O sighal, @,@ ,@.
Wiring and motor, and axis module,
• Wiring between Servopack ( @ , @ ).
and input wires of AC • Wiring between Servopack
powe/" supply, and axis modules, @. ... ....
• Wiring for regenerative • Wiringbetween CRT : .
resistance units, control station and motion .
module, @. .
• Wiring between personal
t module,
computer @.and motion
" Wiring between motion
module and axis module,
(_), . ..
• Wiring between micro PC
module and motion .
module, @'. 205
9.11.1 PREVENTION OF INTERFERENCE BETWEEN WIRES (Cont'd)
Be sure that wires in different categories are not located close to each other. For q
category ]] wires, the following precautions must be taken.
• They should not be laid in parallel to or close to the wires of category !.

• They should not be laid near parts or units which generate noise. They should not be
laid in parallel to the wires for these parts or units.
9.11.2 INSERTION OF SURGE SUPPRESSORS INTO COILS
Be sure to connect the surge suppressors to the coils of relays, contactors and solenoids.
Examples of suppressors:
• For 200 VAC: Surge Suppressor CRh0500 (Okaya Denki Co.)
• For 100 VAC: Surge Suppressor AU1201 (Okaya Denki Co.) t_
• For 24 VDC: Diode 1S2462 (Toshiba) 11
9.11.3 USE OF INSULATING TRANSFORMERS AND LINE FILTERS
Be sure to connect insulating transformers and line filters to control power supply lines. In
this case, the following precautions should be taken.
• Separate the primary side or the secondary side of insulating transformer or line filter. I
1
• Ground the insulating transformer or line filter using a large diameter wire running the
shortest possible distance.
• Make wiring as short as possible to the input terminals of insulating transformer or
line filter to prevent noise induction.
9.11.4 GROUNDING METHOD
One-point grounding (100m or less) should be made using wires larger than 2 mm z. If the I
'IE
servomotor is to be insulated from machine, be sure to ground the motor. Fig. 9.27 shows
the grounding method. Connect a single line from each unit or module to the grounding
point of the control panel, and then make one-point grounding (100Q or less) from there.
CRT M_CRO
DC CONTROL PC MOTION AXIS MODULE Servopack
POWER STATION MODULE MODULE
_- 100.QOR LESS
Fig. 9.27 Grounding Method

206
I
9.11.5 POWER SUPPLY OF 5VDC
D To prevent a voltage drop due to common impedance, wiring for 5 VDC power supply for
motion modules or axis modules should be carefully made, and large diameter wires
(larger than 2 mm z) should be used.
POWER
SUPPLY MICRO PC MOTION AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE
I
+5v__ _v
_T_ _ _ 1 I 1
l J' 1 J (a) Correct
_1 ) SUPPLY
POWER MICROPC MOTION AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE
D Fig. 9.28 Wiring Method of Power Supply
207
CONTENTS
10. SETTINGS AND INDICATIONS FOR MODULES 210
10.1 MOTION MODULE SYSTEM SETTING 210
10.2 INDICATIONS FOR MOTION MODULES 210

, 10.2.2 Status Indications 211
10.3 AXIS MODULE ADDRESSING (AXIS SETTING) 212
10.4 •INDICATIONS FOR AXIS MODULES 213
10.5 MICRO PC MODULE ADDRESSING 213
D 10.6 INDICATIONS FOR MICRO PC MODULES 214

D
209
10. SETTINGS AND INDICATIONS FOR MODULES
m
10.1 MOTION MODULE SYSTEM SETTING q
When the motion module control system is used by changing the normal on-line mode to
off-line mode, the system switch (2SW) is set, e.g., in micro PC module I/O allocations.
Fig. 10.1 shows the system operation contents according to the "2SW" setup value.
To use the normal on-line system, be sure to set the switch to "0" position.
The sv_itch is preset to "0" at the factory before shipping. Do not set the switch to
any position other than "0" and "9".
2SW Setting System Operation Contents I

"IE
"0" On-line (during normal use of system)
"9" Off-line (only in micro PC module

I/O allocation)
588-310
Fig. 10.1 Motion Module System Setting

d
Set the system with a screwdriver, through the square hole of 2SW on the motion I
module, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
10.2 INDICATIONS FOR MOTION MODULES
10.2.1 INDICATIONS OF INPUT SIGNAL MONITOR
These indications are used to check whether the input signals are normally entering into the I
"IE
input connectors (1CN, 2CN, 5CN) of motion module. There are eight indicator lamps, but
the input signals at 64 points can be checked since the lamps are combined with the indi-
cation changeover switch (1SW). Lamps are lit when the input signals are on and turned
off when input signals are off. Fig. 10.3 shows the checking method of input signal, and
Table 10.1 gives the list of indications and input signals.
INDICATIONS OF
INPUT SIGNAL
MONITOR
INDICATIONS
CHANGE-OVER
SWICTH (lSW) _- _
STATUS
INDICATIONS _,- ....,._::_.
t
210 Fig.lO.2 Indications of Motion Module Fig.lO.a Checking of Input Signal
Table 10.1 List of Indications and Input Signals
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO
1CN-36 1CN-20 1CN- 4 ICN-35 1CN-19 1CN- 3 ICN-34 1CN- 2
0 #30007 #30006 #30005 #30004 #30003 #30002 #3000i-#30000
(EDIT) (MEM) (DNC) -- (STEP) (HANDLE) (JOG) (RAPID)
ICN-23 I-CN- 7 lCN-38 ICN-22 ICN- 6 ICN-37 ICN-21 ICNo 5
1 _30017 #30016 #30015 #30014 #30013 _30012 #30011 #30010
(ROV3) (ROV2) (ROV1) (OV16) (OV8) (OV4) (OV2) (OVl)
ICN-10 ICN-41 1CN-25 ICN- 9 1CN-40 1CN-24 1CN- 8 ICN-39
2 #30027 #30026 #30025 #30024 #30023 #30022 #30021 #30020
(SSTP) (FRN) (RRN) (PMEM) (JOY8) 0OV4) 0OV2) 0OVl)
lCN-44 lCN-28 ICN-12 ICN-43 1CN-27 ICN-ll ICN-42 ICN-26
3 #30037 _30036 _30035 #30034 #30033 #30032 _30031 #30030
(TBXON) (-JZ) (-IT) (-iX) -- (+JZ) (+IT) (+JX )
ICN-31 ICN-15 ICN-46 ICN-30 ICN-14 ICN-45 1CN-29 1CN-13
4 #30047 #30046 #30045 #30044 #30043 #30042 #30041 #30040
(GR2) (GR1) (MP2) (MPI) (HZ) (HY) (HX)
ICN-SO ICN-18 ICN-49 ICN-17 ICN-48 ICN-32 ICN-16 ICN-47
5 #30057 ._.3005__6 #30055 #30054 #30053 #30052 #30051 #30050
2CN-36 2CN-20 2CN- 4 2CN-35 2CN-19 2CN- 3 2CN-34 2CN- 2

I (ESP) (MLK) (FIN) (ZRN) (NEG) (ACR) (ER) (SBK)
6 #30067 #30066 #30065 _$30064 #30063 #30062 _30061 #30060
(W28) (W24) (W22) (W21) (Wl8) (W14) (W12) (Wll)
2CN-23 2CN- 7 2CN-38 2CN-22 2CN- 6 2CN-37 2CN-21 2CN- 5
7 #30077:1530076 #30075-#30074 "-_30073 #30072 #30071 #30070
(SK8) (SKT) (SK6) (SKS) (SK4) (SK3) (SK2) (SKI)
Note:
1. Each pin number, I/O address and allocated signal
name is described in the place shown below:
I/O ADDRESS
I _ ALLOCATED
CONNECTOR SIGNAL NAME
PIN NUMBER
2. Signal names indicate those in standard I/O allocation.
10.2.2 STATUS INDICATIONS
Kinds of status indications are alarm _-_ , servo on _ , motion ready _ ,

D green
t transmission _ and battery alarm _ Six lamps are turned on during
normal status. See Fig. 10.4 and Table 10.2.
Table 10.2 Status Indications
Signal Name Lamp ON Lamp OFF
(Alarm) _ Alarm Normal

SVN
MAL B
(Servo on) _ Operation No-operation MAL !_) _) BAL
MRD
sv. © © l
(Motion Controller Ready) _) Operation No-operation MRD _ _)1 2
S.EN SEN _) (_1 3

(Transmission) _ Operation No-operation
BAL
(Battery Alarm) (_) Alarm Normal
t (Motion Controller Ready)

MCRD _ Operation No-operation
588-305
Note: (_): Red lamp
1. 1 and 2 are spare lamps. _) "Green lamp
2. 3 means motion controller ready (MCRD).
Fig.10.4 Status Indications
211
10.3 AXIS MODULE ADDRESSING (AXIS SETTING)
Data -
is transferred between the motion and axis modules on the FA bus. The axis module l
addresses on the bus must be defined to identify the axis module signals for each axis.
For the axis module, axis designation, that is, addressing is made by setting the
axis a selection switch (1SW). Fig. 10.5 shows the relationship between the axis names and
axis selection switch (1SW) setting. Do not set the switch to any position other than"l" to
Axis Designation 1SW Setting
Axis Module X-Axis "1"
Axis Module Y-Axis "2" q
Axis Module Z-Axis "3"
Axis Module S-Axis "4"
_88-306
x y z S
Fig. 10.5 Axis Module Addressing q
When adjusting the axis selection switch (1SW), there are two approaches, as shown
in Fig. 10.6: One is from the front of the module using a minus screw driver and the other
is from the side using a plus screw driver.
(. z._f
,- _/_ 586-2(_7 586-268 __" _
Fig. 10.6 Axis Setting
t
212
10.4 INDICATIONS FOR AXIS MODULES
indicates
and _ the indications
normal operation of axis for
are provided modules and normal
axis modules data Fig.
(referto transmission
10.7).
between motion modules and axis modules. When a servo alarm condition occurs, the
red lamp of _ is turned on. Normally only the green lamp of _-_ lights up.
Table 10.3 Indications of RUN and ALM
Lamp ON Lamp OFF
D (_)
RUN Normal Error
RUN, ALM
ALM Servo alarm Servo on --INDICATIONS
(_ status status
586-256
D Fig. 10.7 Indications of Axis Module
10.5 MICRO PC MODULE ADDRESSING
Data is transferred between the motion and micro PC modules via the FA bus. The micro
PC module address on the bus must be defined to identify the micro PC module signals.
module, addressing by setting

D For the micro PC is made the address selection
switch (2SW) to the "5" position. Do not set the switch to any position other than "5".
Address Designation 2SW Setting
Micro PC Module "5"
1 '
D 588-312
MOTION MODULE
MICRO PC MODULE
Fig. 10.8 Micro PC Module Addressing 213

10.5 MICRO PC MODULE ADDRESSING (Cont'd)
d
Set the address with a minus screw driver through the square hole of 2SW on the q
micro PC module, as shown in Fig. 10.9.
q
J
jfJ
S _
• 586-270
Fig. 10.9
,,d
10.6 INDICATIONS FOR MICRO PC MODULES q
10.6.1 INDICATIONS OF INPUT SIGNAL MONITOR
These indications are used to check whether the input signals are normally entering into the
input connectors (1CN, 2CN, 5CN) of micro PC module. There are eight indicator lamps,
but the I/O signals on machine side can be checked since the lamps are combined with the ,d
indication changeover switch (1SW). Lamps are lit when the input signals are on and turned I
off when input signals are off. Fig. 10.10 shows the checking method of input signal, and
Table 10.4 gives the list of indications and input signals.
INDICATIONS OF
INPUT SIGNAL
MONITOR
INDICATION
CHANGE-0VER
SWITCH (lSW)
INDICATION
STATUS
586-2_{_
Fig. 10.10 Indications of Micro PC Module
214
586-269
Fig. 10.11 Checking of Input Signal
Table 10.4 List of Indications and Input Signals
_r D7 I D6 D5 D4 D3 I D2 DI DO
i ........ r
lCN-36 ICN-20 1CN-,I J...l.CNs35..[..1CN.:.!9.. 1CN- 3 1CN-34 1CN- 2
0 #52007 ¢52006 #52005._._.5200.4...._.5.200.3.. #52002 #52001 #52000
/ 1
1CN-23 ICN- 7 1CN-38 ICN-22 ICN- 6 1CN-37 1CN-21 ICN- 5
1 #52017 #52016 $52015 #52014 #52013 #52012 #52011 _:52010
ICN-41 ICN-25 ICN- 9 ICN-40 ICN-24 ICN- 8 ICN-39

2 • 1CN-IO { _ "5202(5
#52027 #52025 #52024 ":_52023 #52022 #52021 #52020
.........
I
I
lCN-44 1CN-28 ICN-12 1CN-43 ICN-27 1CN'll 1CN-42 1CN-26
3 #52037 #52036 #52035 #52034 #52033 #52032 #52031 #52030
1CN-31 1CN-15 1CN-46 ICN-30 1CN-14 ICN-45

_5204½ ![.1CN-29 ICN-13
4 #52047 #52046 #52045 #52044 #5204311 ,#52041 #52040
1CN-50 1CN-18 1CN-49 1CN-17 ICN-48 1CN-32 ICN-16 ICN-47

5 #52057 #52056 #52055 #52054 #52053 #52052 #52051 #52050
2CN- 3
6 #52067 #52066 #52065 #52064 #52063 ............... #52061 #52060
2CN-36 2CN-20 2CN- 4 2CN-35 2CN-19 _5206½" 2CN-34 2CN- 2 .
2CN-23 2CN- 7 2CN-38 2CN-22 2CN-6 2CN-37 2CN-21 2CN- 5

7 #52077 #52076 #52075 #52074 '_52073 #52072 #52071 #52070
2CN-10 2CN-41 2CN-25 2CN-9 2CN-40 2CN-24 2NN-8 2CN-39

8 #53007 #53006 ))53005 #53000_ #53003 #53002 #53001 #53000
2CN-44 2CN-28 2CN-12 2CN-43 2CN-27 2CN-ll 2CN=42 2CN-26

9 #53017 #53016 #53015 #530014 #53013 #53012 #53011 #53010
El
2CN-31 2CN-15 2CN-46 2CN-30 2CN=I4 2CN=45 2CN-29 2CN-13
A "'_'5"302"7"''_'53"026"'-g530"2"5"+'_'53002"4_'_'5"3"023"_ #53022 #53021 #53020
2CN-50 2CN-18 2CN=49 2CN-17 2CN=48 2CN-32 2CN-16 2CN-47

B #53037 #53036 #53035 #530034 #53033 #53032 #53031 #53030
1. Each pin
Note: number, I/O address and allocated signal name is
described in the place shown below:
I/0 ADDRESS
SIGNAL NAME
_ CONNECTOR PIN NUMBER
2. Signal names show those allocated by the customer. 215
10.6.2 STATUS INDICATIONS
,din
Micro PC module is provided with two status indication lamps, Fig. 10.12. Lamp _ q
indicates the following status:
• Correct data transmission between micro PC module and motion module,
• Under execution of the logic program of micro PC module.
If a transmission error occurs, lamp _ (red) lights. In normal ON status,
(green) is lit.
Table 10.5 Indications of RUN and ALM
Lamp ON Lamp OFF
RUN Under execution

of data transmission Error
(Green) and logic program
(Red) Battery alarm Normal

ALM '
RUN, ALM
INDICATIONS
586-266
Fig.10.12 Status Indications of Micro PC Module
216
CONTENTS
I 11. TEST RUN 218
11.1 TEST RUN METHOD 218

11.1.1 Wiring Check 218
11.1..2 Power-on Check 218
11,1.3 Voltage Check 219
11.1.4 Input Signal Check 219
11.1.5 Input/Output Diagnosis Number List 220

11.1.6 Setting Parameters 225
11.1.7 Manual Operation and Confirmation of Moving Direction 227
11.1.8 Confirmation of Stroke Limit 228
11.1.9 Confirmation of Return-to-Reference Point Operation 229
I 11.1.10 Confirmation of Memory Operation 230

11.2 ADJUSTMENT METHOD 231
11.2.1 Adjustment of Reference Point 231
11.2.2 Adjustment of Position Loop Gain (Value of K_,) 232
21.7
11. TEST RUN
,dB
11.1 TEST RUN METHOD
Outline of the test run method for the Moritonpack-ll0 is as shown in the flow chart of
Fig. 11.1. Contents of each item are explained below.
I I
!
Execute a and
manual operation
Turn on a power. ] check a moving direction.

I
I
Check the voltage. I Check a stroke limit.
I
t I
Check I/O signals. Check a return-to-reference point, i
I
/
t /
Set the parameters. / Check a memory operation. /

L J
I
Fig. 11.1 Flow Chart of Test Run Method
11.1.1 WIRING CHECK
Wiring check is very important and must be carefully made. If checking of some items is
overlooked during wiring check, abnormal operations may frequently occur in a late stage
of trial run adjustment. In this case, it is very time-consuming to locate the causes of the
abnormal operations. Complete wiring check is the basis of carrying out the trial run
adjustment smoothly. In the wiring check, it is necessary to confirm not only the proper I
connections of circuits but also to check wiring route, size and kind of wires, presence and
polarity of surge suppressors, etc.
11.1.2 POWER-ON CHECK
When the wiring check is completed, the power to the system should be turned on. When the
power is turned on, the control power unit (5 VDC and 100VAC, power supply, of CRT
control station are simultaneously turned on) is first turned on and then the servo power
unit approximately two seconds later.
The power to the system should be turned on while carefully monitoring the system.
If the machine runs roughly or uncontrollably at the time of turn-on of servo power,
immediately turn off the power. The machine may run abnormally in the following cases •
and the wiring must be rechecked. I
• Motor connections are reversed.
• Tachometer-generator connections are reversed.
• A-phase and B-phase of PG connections are reversed.
218
servo power unit, the connections of motor, tachometer-generator and PG are considered to
be correct.If there
Display
are no
of the
abnormal
CRT control
conditions
station (theis as
machine
follows is after
stationary)
turning after
the power
turning on. on the
ALARM 00000 NOOOO
LSK RDY
585-204 585-205
D Fig. 11.2 Display of CRT Control Station after Turning the Power on
11.1.3 VOLTAGE CHECK
After tuning on the power for the system, make sure that the voltage is normal at the follow-
ing points.
(1) Power supply voltage: 200/220VAC _+10% or 100/110 VAC_+10%
(2) Control power supply voltage: 100 VAC_+10%, 5 VDC+5%, 24 VDC_+10%
D (3) PG voltage: 5 VDC_+5% or 12 VDC_+5%

(4) Servo power supply voltage: Varies depending on the model of Servopack. Refer to
technical sheets for Servopack.
11.1.4 INPUT SIGNAL CHECK
Check whether normal input signals are present at the

input connectors (1CN, 2CN) of the motion module. l
D This checking can be made by one of the following I Turn on

!
thepower. ]
methods. [ set,oe_,,mode. ]
T
module. Refer to Par. 10.2 "INDICATION ,heCRTcontrol
station
(depress
(1) FOR
Check MOTION
by input MODULES".
signal monitor lamps of motion i i-6-_keyl.
Se,,odiagno,i,
ai,p,ayr,
oaeon I
(2) Check on the CRT of control station. 1_"
See Fig. 11.3.
\ \ /
/I--I.emir,.e
0o
D _/I_S Ire,ev.n,,o._.,
I ''g"''c'rcu''
o,=u, o.eck) I :
Fig. 11.3 Checking of Input Signals 219

11.1.5 INPUT/OUTPUT DIAGNOSIS NUMBER LIST i
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO _l
(1) Control Fixed I/O of Motion Module Indication 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 II
_L-Open Contact -_-Closed Contact

07 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO
iNPUT Address
s,GNA..oool
_EO"I MEM
I D"CI MD'I STE_
I "A"O'E
2 Edit
I 'OOI RA_'O
I
Memory DNC MDI Step Operation Manual Jog Rapid Feed
Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation Operation
o,oo,
i ROV3
I Roy,
I ROY'
t OV'_I OVS
I 0V4I OV2I OVlI 2,
Rapid Feed Rapid Feed • Feed" Feed
Override Cancel Override Override (21 Steps I Override (3 Steps)
-_'1 I I I I JoVS
I Jov,i,ow I Jov,
Jog
Feedrate Selection
+Z-Axis +Y-Axis +X-Axis
°,°°,t I t I I 1-_ -,.I -,xl

--Z-Axis --Y-Axis --X-Axis •
"_oI I I I I I "_ I .YI .x I Selection ol

Manual Operation Axis
"*'1 _- I I M"2I M"'I _R"I S_'PI _ I S_R

I Return-to- Skip Stop Start
Step Multiplier Reference
Point
#40071 =.PRT MLK ] ABSO I EINV i NEG I ACR I PMEM I SBK [

Protect Machine Absolute External Offset Axis Alarm Position Single
Lock Ref. Point Data SignG Omission Clear Memory Block •
#,oo_l._s_,
I _, I s_,I s_,I s_, I s_ I s_ I s_f I
Optional
Block Skip
.ooo Io_ I_f I I I ss_P

I _" I RR"i
Gear Stop Forward Reverse
Selection Run Run
M, S,T, Completed Reset CompletedMaChine

Ready
External Offset Data BCD Input
..0,_[E_S I E" I E_ I E_ I E_ I E_ I E_ I E_'.....I

°,o,,IEss I E_4I ES_I _S, I E,_I E,. I E,_I E--I

External Offset" Data BeD Input
:_4015 I [ I ESP I ER
External Fault
I BATALM I SVALM I I Servo
SVOKI
Ready
Completed
-0,_1w_ I w-I w_ I w_ll _t_l wt.I _,_1 witI Program No.
°,°',1 I 1 I I
BCD Input
I ! I I
-0,_1 I I I [ I t I I
220 .,o,ol I l I I I I I I
D7 D6 D5 04 03 02 01 DO
C0NT,0L
A,,re.. I
SIGNAL Program End, End of
I I Program
I Positioning
[ Program
] Temporary
I Cycle Start
Head Waiting Program Stop Completed Operation Stop
-50'1 I I I sv°"] _'cR°

I Motion
RST
I A.M
External Reset Alarm
D OUTPUT g4500 M30 M02 MOO Controller
DEN OP SPL STL I
Ready
-502l I I I I TF I S_ ] MF
T Symbol S Symbol " M Symbol
Reading Reading Reading
-'o_1 I I I I I zozI zPYI zPxl

Z-Axis Refer- Y-Axis Refer- X-Axis Refer-
ence Point ence Point ence Point
.,o:[ I I I I I I I I
M-BCD Code Output (0-991
_ °,50°
I _28I ,2, I ,22I ,2, t ,,8 I "' I ,,2 I ,,11 T-BCD Code Output (0-99)
Alarm Code (Hexa.)
$t4508I $28 I $24 I $22 I $211 S18 I $14 I $12 I $11 I
-50.I I I I I I I I
D NOTE
1. Signal name with a bar "-" (e.x. STP) shows a reverse signal. The signal without
description (e.x. SVON) connot be used for internal processing.
2. When [_ key is depressed, the display of 10 lines at a time is made starting from
#4000.
D 3. For changing a page of the display screen, depress the or key.
4. When the ____ or _ key is depressed, the screen is shifted in the following order.
5&5-222 5&5-223 ' 585-224 /
Example: • If set to memory operation mode (MEM), "D_" of #4000 becomes "1".
• If the start signal (STR) is turned on, "Do" of #4006 becomes "1".
D If it is turned off, "Do" becomes "0"
221
11.1.5 INPUT/OUTPUT DIAGNOSIS NUMBER LIST (Cont'd)
.iN
(2) General/Special I/O of Motion Module I

Indication in [----] shows connector pin No. Signal name will be specified at I/O
allocation.
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 DI DO
Address
,.PUT._oI ,c.-3°I,c.-=ol,c.-. I ,_.-3sl,c.-,91,c.-3I '_"-_1,_.-2I
SIGNAL
#30011 ION-23 I ICN-? I I CN-381 1CN-22 I 1CN-6 I I CN-37 I l CN-2I I l CN-5 I
t
._i I I I I I I I I
SIGNAL
#350l j
._.1 I I I I I I I I
._,_1 I I I I I I I I
._o,I I I I I I I 1 I
222
._.-I
"*1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
/
(3) Control I/O of Micro PC Module
D Signal name will be specified at I/O allocation.
Address D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 b I D0
INPUT
S.GNAL
"5_1 1 I I I I t I I
._,n I I I I I I I I
0_21, I n I I I n i i
._31 i 1 i -i i i I i.
b
UP'
._1 i, n i i i i I i
0_1 I I I I I I I I
"_1 1 I I 1 I I I I
.,_'1, I I I I I I I I
D ._1 I I I I I I I I
._1 I -I I I I I I I
outPUT
""_1
SIGNAL I I I I I I I I
B
UP"
.,,o,[ I I I I. I I I I
..,o21 I I I I I I I I
.5'o31 I I I I I I I 1
._,_1 1 I I I. I I I I
._,_1 I I I I I I. I I
._,_1 I I I I I I I I
D ..,o.I I I 1 I I I I I
._,o81, I- I I I I I I I
""_1 I I I I I I I 1223
11.1.5 INPUT/ OUTPUT DIAGNOSIS NUMBER LIST (Cont'd)
,rim
(4) Communication I/0 of Motion Module q

Signal name will be specified at I/O allocation.
D7 Dfi D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO
INPUT Address I
s.o_..._ i i i I I I I
._,i I i I I I 1 I I
._2t i i I i I I I I
._1 I I I i I i I i
._l I I i i 1 l i i I
"qu
._l i t I I i i I i
._,1 I I I I I I I
._.1 I I I I i i I ,dn
._1 I I I I I I I q
._1 I I I I I 1 I
OUTPUT
S,GNA"
"500i I I i I I i i
..5°,
i I I I i i I i
"°_21 I I I I I i i
"'5031 I I I I i I I i
"_l i I I I I I I I
"°_51 i I I I I l I I
"50'i I i I i I I i i
"'50'1 I I I I I I i i
"50'[ J l L ! [ 1 1 ]
22. "'_1 i I I I I I I I
11.1.6 SETTING PARAMETERS
D Parameters are important data for teaching the system specifications to the controller.
Therefore, the parameters must be set before operation. Also, if parameters are not set
or their values are incorrect, the system cannot operate normally. The setting of parameters
can be made on the CRT Control Station or on the personal computer. Figs. 11.4 and
11.5 show the flow chart of the setting procedure for parameters.
11.1.6.1. For Setting Parameters on theCRT Control Station
I Turn power on. I
I
! Se,,oeO.
moO I
b t
(#1100 or more) I (#1000 to #1009)
I Enterparameter
numbers I I " Depress:the []key' "'] :
t t
D -_ Depressthe
t_} key. I I
t
Move the cursor. , II_ _-
Key in the peremeter value to "
be set and depress the_-_ key. For #1000 to #1009, depress

the _R'Tkey if "1 "is needed
,. end depress the ['_ key egein
• • if "0" is needed.
D I
NO NO _
I Premeter writing C°mpleted" I
t
I Turn power off. I
t
I Turn power on. I B_
/
t
I C°mp'e"°n
°'Pereme'er
Se"'gJ ....
Fig. 11.4 Parameter Setting Procedure using CRT Control Station
225
11.1.6.2 For Setting Parameters on the Personal Computer
,rib
For setting parameters on the personal computer, there are two methods: setting the param- g
eters one by one; and batch transferring and setting by file.
Check the STAT of the personal computer as follows:
• Personal computer - motion module: "8E81XS"
• Personal computer - CRT control station - motion module: "8E71XS"
(1) Setting Parameters One by One
Turn off the power of personal computer.
t
Set to "TELCOM" mode. I
t
I Depress thel-_ key" 1 4
f
L_][][].
l Key in the commands
l
Key in tile parameter number and parameter values.
[] [] [] r_ []_] [] [] I
[] []
t 4
Completion of Parameter Writing
t
I ,uro0 e,o,.
I
t
t
Completion of Parameter Setting }
Fig. 11.5 Parameter Setting Procedure using Personal Computer
(2) Batch Transferring and Setting by File 4

1
Refer to Par. 8.3.4 "INPUT OF PARAMETERS FROM PERSONAL COMPUTER".
Parameter numbers begin from #1000. Parameter values are tentatively set at the
time of shipping so be sure to set the parameters at the time of trial run.
226
11.1.7 MANUAL OPERATION AND CONFIRMATION OF MOVING DIRECTION
Operate the system manually and confirm the operation•

Procedure of Manual Operation (Jog Operation) '
l Set to the jog operationmode.
t
JOV1 signal ON,
OFF, JOV2signal OFF
JOV4"signal JOY8 OFF/ /
I Set the jog feedrate to lowsignal
speed(L)•
!
Perform the jog operation. For example,
turn "+JX " signal on the case of
+X-axis direction.
t
1 "
Confirm that X-axis can move.
I
t !
Confirm the operation in 1+) and I--) I

directions for each axis and all axes•
I
YES reverse direction. /

I
Confirm that jog feedrate changes. I

I
NO Recheck and alter the

setting of parame[ers.
' limit switch. See Par.11.1.8.
I Confirm the operation of stroke
t
( Confirmation of Jog Operation Completed.
) •
-
* To achieve reverse running of the motor, reverse the follow-
ing connections:
D Motorterminals
• TG terminals(_) A
andandG B
• Terminals for phases A and B of optical encoder
Fig. 11.6 Procedure of Manual 0peration(3og Operation)
• 227
•, %
11.1.8 CONFIRMATION OF STROKE LIMIT
,rib
Stroke limit should be confirmed at low speed in jog operation. I
I Set to low speed feed in jog operation mode. f[
Release the parameters of soft limit check.

(#1402:X axis, #1602:Y axis, #1802:Zaxis)
Move the system in (+) direction and operate the

over travel limit switch in (+)direction.
Confirm that the system can stopped by dynamic brake.
Depress the _ key. I
f !
Confirm that the systemcannotmove any further in (-}-) I •

direction.
I=
I .
NO
the wiring.
Check and rearrange I
am h kt r
Confirm the stroke limit.
Performsoft limit check and set parameters again.
Fig. 11.7 Confirmetion of Stroke Limit
228
11.1.9 CONFIRMATION OF RETURN-TO-REFERENCE POINT OPERATION
b For the return-to-reference point, confirm the operation by using a temporary reference.
Then perform the adjustment. For the adjusting method, refer to Par. 11.2.1
"ADJUSTMENT OF REFERENCE POINT "
I Temporarflly set deceleration LS. ]
1
I Turn power on. I
For example, turn on "-JX "signal in the

case of x-axis (-)direction.
D I Perform the return-to! reference operation
necessary,the
D YES setting of.theand
Reexamine following
alter,if parameters:
:¢1403 (X-axis), ff 1603 (Y-axis) and
:I 1803 (Z-axis).
T =
< ap0roac 'speed,dooeleralion

Oversho o.rronsandthenre,um.)
I YES Wide the dog width of
Confirmthat the deceleration to creep speed is possible.

I deceleration LS.
I Confirm that the system stopsat the reference point. i[
t
times and Confirm the normal operation.
t
D - . < Confirmation
Pointoperation
Completed
of Return-to-Reference >
Fig. 11.8 Confirmation of Return-to-Reference Point Operation
229
11.1.10 CONFIRMATION OF MEMORY OPERATION
,din
To check the memory operation, perform the single blockoperation, q
I ® .... I
Perlocmthe return-to-reference pointoperation.
Set to memory operation mode. I
I Upon completion of program,execute M30.
I
Set to single block. (Turn on "SBK" signal). I
Turn off the single block and operate continuously,
Designatethe program number. ,
Designate
on the starta signal.
program number and turn 1
I
I Turn on the start signal and execute the program.

I
Execute one block of program and stop. 1
-I I _°°'_e°'_r_'°''s'°°
I I
Turn on the startsignal again. _ Completion of MemoP/ Operation )
Fig. 11.9 Confirmation of Memory Operation
230 I
J
11.2 ADJUSTMENT METHOD
D If fine adjustment is necessary after confirming the operation of the system in accordance
with Par. 11.1 "TEST RUN METHOD", the fine adjustment should be made as follows.
11.2.1 ADJUSTMENT OF REFERENCE POINT
Turn power on. ]
i:
The mac;hine stops at the temporarily
I set reference point.
temporary reference point and the pre-

determined reference point.
Make adjustments until the
tion LS comes near the e.

D end of the dog of decelera-
Increase or decrease by value of A the parameters (=. 1556 for

x-axis, _ 1756 for y-axis, and _t 1956 for z-axis) of final
distance of return-to-reference point•
(Increase where the temporary reference point is behind
the predetermined reference point and decrease where it is
D beyond the predetermined reference point.}
i
Perform the return-to-reference point
operation 4 or 5 times and confirm that
the system normally returns to the pre-
determined reference point.
I
• Completed.
Reference Point Adjustment
MNI
Fig. 11.10 Fine• Adjustment of Reference Point
231
11.2.2 ADJUSTMENT OF POSITION LOOP GAIN (VALUE OF Ke)
,d
Perform a rough adjustmentof position

loop i
gain by setting parameters (#1474, #1674, #1874)
and fine adjustment by adjusting

potentiometer of Servopack. The adjustment
must be made by rapid feed operation.
; 585-175 (
Fig. 11.11 Adjusting of Position Loop Gain
; I Set the rapid teed override to H (high
I speed) and repeat the operation and stop.
IOn,,I_
1
; Observe the input signal wavetorm Of the / •

tachometer-generator of Servopack.
J I
I 1
t t v;" •
Gain : Low Gain : Optimum Gain : High I
eter of Servopack clock- Adjustment not required eter of Servopack coun-

wise to increase the gain. terclockwise to reduce
the gain.
gain parameter by one. gain parameter by one.
I ' I
( End of Adjustment _
232 Fig. 11.12 Adjustment of Position Loop Gain

CONTENTS
D 12. APPLICATIONS 234
12.1 SELECTION OF SERVOMOTOR AND Servopack 234

12.1.1 Confirmation of Machine Specifications 234
12.1.2 Selection of Servomotors 234
12.1.3 Examination of Servo Preformances 236
12.1.4 Selection of Detector 237
12.1.5 Selection of Servomotor Type and Servopac Type 238
12.2 APPLICATION CIRCUITS 239
233
12. APPLICATIONS
41
12.1 SELECTION OF SERVOMOTOR AND Servopock 1
12.1.1 CONFIRMATION OF MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
To control machines, they must be designed based upon the full knowledge of the required
specifications of machines, taking into account the performance necessary for control,
workability, safety environment and other conditions. As basic items, the specifications
and dimensions of the target machine must be studied, examined and determined. As the
calculation data for the selection of servomotor and for the start and stop time, the follow-
ing items must be considered.
• Positioning speed: V [m/rain

• Weightof movingpart: W [kg]
• Coefficient of friction: /2 I
• Efficiency of machine: z/
• Load GD 2 (converted to motor shaft): GD2L [kg • m 2]
• Load torque (converted to motor shaft): TL [kg • m]
• Duty cycle
Moreover, the following specifications are needed as positioning characteristics:
• Detecting resolution: _ 0[ram/pulse]
• Stopping accuracy: --+_ [mm/rev] 41
• Ball screw pitch: PEmm] I
• Number of output pulses of PG: Fpc [pulses/rev]
12.1.2 SELECTION OF SERVOMOTORS
When the machine configuration is as shownin Fig. 12.1, the motor power P required to
drive the moving part (table) at a constant speed is given by
tt WV
(kW_...................................................... (1) q
P- 6.120x 77
Also, acceleration torque T, required for accelerating in the acceleration time t (s) is given
by
GD_L ×NM
To - 375xt +TL (kgom_ ................................. (2)
where, NM is the number of revolutions of motor (rpm).

Then, a motor having the capacity satisfying equations (1)and (2)shoul tentatively
selected. Its type should be determined, and the acceleration torque TA including GD _ of the
motor itself must be determined from the equation shown below.
TA = (GD2L 375
+GD2M)
xt xNM _ TL Ekg ° mJ .................. (3)
234
sometimes become insufficient due to acceleration and deceleration torque, so that effective
torque must
When bestarting
calculated and tostopping
check theare capacity.
repeated When the operation the isthermal
very frequently, made with a pattern
capacity may
as shown in Fig. 12.2, the effective torque T,,, required for the motor is given by
T,m, /T_ • t, +T_ • t2+ (TA- TL)2. t3 (4)

v t f+ t2 + t3 + t4 [kg m]
The rated torque of themotor selected must be greater than T ....
As seen in equation (3), the motor selected must have a large starting torque and a
small value of GD 2 in order to reduce the acceleration time. That is, a motor with a large
power rating must be selected (power rating is obtained by dividing the equare value of the
rated torque of motor by motor inertia; servo performance becomes better as the power
rating increases). As reference, the load GD 2 (GD2L) can be calculated from the following
equations:
• GD 2 (GD2r) for table
GD2r = 0.101W _ [kg • m 2] ....................................... (5)
• GD 2 (GD2B) for ball screw
GDZB = 125_ P LDo _ ............................................................ (6)

where, P : Specific gravity of the material of ball screwEg/cm 3]
D L:
Do: Length
Diameterof ball screwscrew
of ball [m] [m]
• GD 2 (GDZc) of coupling
Sum of values of GD 2 shown above is equal to the load GD 2. That _s,
GD2L =GD2r+_-_ GD2B + GDXc
where, -_-: reduction ratio

D 1
GD 2 for coupling is often ignored but it must always be included in calculation.
MOVING PART (TABLE)
<_ _>V FEED SCREW
OR,V,..O
B---
OR l I h J /-°°
_ _ l/1111111111Yl111_, " . /l/ll/llllrl/A u J
DETECTOR
(TG+PG)
Fig. 12.1 Machine Configuration
D m
235
12.1.2 SELECTION OF SERVOMOTORS (Cont'd)
1
SPEED N ACCEL DECEI.
[rpm] /CONSTANT_
/ SPEED STOP
_ t= == t4 _ TIME t [s]
TA
TORQUE T
[kg.m] [ TI.
J TIME t Is]
Fig. 12.2 Operation Pattern
I
12.1.3 EXAMINATION OF SERVO PERFORMANCES
For the servo system having a position feedback loop, as in the case of Motionpack-110, the
position loop gain (sensitivity) must be set to the optimum value. If the gain is too high,
the machine tends to operate roughly but, if the gain to too low, a longer time is needed for
positioning. The position loop gain is called the Kp value and expressed by the ratio between I
positional deviation pulse _ and maximum command pulse f i,
Kp= f'" [pulse/s] [i/s] ...................................................... (7)

[pulse]
i
Servo performance is enhanced as the Kp value increases. The largest possible Kp value
(largest possible Kp value) can be calculated from the following formulas:
KpL 1.46
t [l/s): .................................................................. (8) a
I
GD2L + GD2M +Nt_
t= Is] (9)
375 ( TA + Tt )
where, t: Acceleration time of motor.
For example, if V = 30 Ira/mini, _ o = 0.01 [mm_ and t = 0.05 [sl, then Kp value is
approximately 1.46/0.05 = 29.2 [1/sl.
Also, from equation (7), _ = 50,000/29.2 - 1712 pulses. That is, deceleration begins
at 1712 pulses or 17.12 mm behind and then the system stops. (However, deceleration
constant is zero.)
30,000/60
Note: fi, - 0.01 - 50,000 [PPs_ I
More accurate values of Kp can be obtained if Kp is calculated using equations (8)
and (9)when setting the parameters for position loop gain adjustment.
236
12.1.4 SELECTION OF DETECTOR
D In a machine configuration as shown in Fig. 12.1, the number of PG output pulses required
(Fpc) is given by
1 P
Fp_ = 7- x _o • N ............................................................... (10)
Since the pulses from PG are multipliedby 4 internallyin the case of Motionpack-ll0, itis
necessary to multiply itby a coefficient
of 1/4.
For example, ifdetectionresolution_ o = 0.001[mm/pulse], ballscrew pitch

P = 6 [mm], and reductionratioI/N = I/2,the number of PG output pulses,Fpc, is given
by
F_c = _-1 x 0.001x2

6 - 750 (pulses/rev)
D As the detector, a feedback unit consisting of PG (for detecting position) and

tachometer- generator (for detecting speed) is installed at the side opposite the load of the
motor.
The number of PG output pulses available from YASKAWA is shown in Table 12.1
foryourselection.
If the number of pulses of PG determined from equation (10)is other then those shown
in Table 9.1, then it is necessary to select a PG having the number of output pulses larger
than the calculated value of FaG and then correct it by the setting of special parameter posi-
tion command unit of the Motionpack-ll0. Refer to Par. 5.4 "SPECIAL PARAMETERS".
For instance, if _ o = 0.001, P = 6 and 1/N = 5/7 in Fig. 12.1.
Fpc 1 6
= T × 0.001×7/5 - 1071.428-.-
D In this case, 2000 pulses

larger than 1071.4, then the following
may be selected
calculations
as encoder
may be made
' of the number
as parameter
of output
of position
pulses
command unit.
B Detection side (Number of encoder output pulses) × 4

A Ballscrew side Pitch of ball screw
1
Detection resolution ×
Reduction ratio
2000 × 4 28
6 15
7
0.001 x-- "
5
D 15/28
Then, x3137469
16777216 = 8987794.286
of 28/15 should
× 16777216 be set as parameter.
= 31317469.87 and the integer portion 8987794 of
As the type of PG pulse output, 5 VDC line driver method or 12 VDC transistor
output should be used. (5 VDC transistor output cannot be used.)
237 I
J
12.1.4 SELECTION OF DETECTOR (Cont'd)
]
Table 12.1 List of PG Output Pulses
_tem
Detector Number of Output Pulses (pulse/rev)
Print Motor Standard Series 3000, 2500, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1000, 750, 720,
Minertia Motor J Series 600, 500, 450, 400, 360, 300, 240
DC Cup Motor Feedback Unit
Hi-Cup Motor
Minertia Motor Standard Series
Minertia Motor RM Series 2500, 2000, 1500, 1000, 800, 600,500,400,300,200
6000 (4000, 3000, 2400, 2000, 1500, 1200, 1000,
F Series
800, 750, 600, 500, 480, 400, 375, 300,
1000rpm 250, 240, 200, 150, 125, 120, 100)
5000 (2500, 2000, 1250, 1000, 625, 500, 400,
S Series 250,200,125,100) I
'ql
1500
rpm
4000 (2000, 1600, 1000, 800, 500, 400, 320,250,
200, 160, 100, 80)
Optical Enc0der
2500 (1250, 1000, 625, 500, 250, 200, 125, 100,
Ac 50)
S Series
1500 (1000, 750, 600, 500, 375, 300, 250, 200,
3000rpm 150, 125, 120, 100, 75, 60, 50)
.
1000 (500, 400, 250, 200, 100, 80, 50, 40)
I
1500 (1000, 750, 600, 500, 375, 300, 250, 200,
C Series 150, 125, 120, 100, 75, 60, 50)
3000
rpm
1000 (500, 400, 250, 200, 100, 80, 50, 40)
* Semi-standard number of output pulses.

Note:
1. If the output pulses from AC Servopack are used, the number
2.
of pulses shown in ( ) may be used as the number of pulses for PG.
Feedbuck unit types:
q
• TFUE-[:]__ZD7 (5V line driver output),
• TFUE-[-_][_]ZC7 (12V transistor outpuut),
• TFUE-[-][-_]SC (SV line driver output for RM series),
• TFUE-[I][-_]SAB (12V transistor output for RM series).
3. Optical encoder types:
• UTOPE-,[-][-_[:]YN for M, F series,
• UTOPI-[:][-][:]YR for S series,
• UTOPI-[:'][_-][:] YR for C series.
12.1.5 SELECTION OF SERVOMOTOR TYPE AND Servopack TYPE
The type of servomotor can be selected when the servomotor and the number of PG output
pulses are determined. Selection of Servopack will depend on the type of servomotor. For
details, refer to relevant technical sheets.
238
o Ohowexmes°onc ITcoc
i 12.2 APPLICATION CIRCUITS +_v,,v +24 2,v
(1) Power-on Circuit (Fig. 12.3) MODULE
(JEFMC
POWER
SUPPLY -Bl10) '
R0 S,> T.
200/220VAC
) MCCB MOTION ]
NOISE (JEFMC
MODULE i
Me2 . XAX,S
_ _F
FILTER - i_
F - Se-_pv°pac-'_' _ XTHR _ =-- . -C02 __ovO_
, MODULE ,L__._--_.Br_L__
D
"
_
.(JEFMC
AXIS
] ,-o_-×I
[..... _ . -"o"
..L__, X-AXIS
),_'--:_c%-F
.
'R Y-AXIS
S MODULE i F__DB__¥I [
T ' (JEFMC _RTB Y%-"_
i..... Ax,s ]
[-_CDjUSTABLE_.---
g 24V " " -"
......
MODULE
(JEFMC
-BO01,_
_)
1
R (S-AXIS)
I
S o.,v.s L-_S-AX,S__i. ----
200/100 v [
,_ I !1_ MCI
,EMERGENCY
STOP POWER POWER
r_6 N_L-I. , _, --
"" 2 POWER 1 _-av F q OFF ON
--L- MCI
II _ t__- ..-#._..-. l_;vl ,_'x,s TLR TIMER
I i POWER/ I
XTHR YTHR OH MC2 SERVO POWER ON
__24VDCj
= ---- 4_ O'-'' F .--oTLR
o _ (FOR DC SERVO)
PG _-_+12v "&LR ALMXALMY OH MC2 CACR-SRi_]BB
_--'I" POWER_--0V --O O----O O--O _j (FOR AC SERVO )
I ___ 12VDSj TLRr:-----I ALMX ALMY "1
_IC, Cal OH MC2 '11CACR-SR__--AA

i F_-r---7 _ __ , I TIMER -
D t 1_, STATION I TLR2 I
-T_, _CONTROLI
(JEFMC ! o.o , _]./(APPROXls)
- '1 (FOR AC SERVO ) II_
!FC -H011 ) MC2 SVOK
_____J , o_ _ SERVO READY

COMPLETED
Fig. 11.1 Power-on Circuit (Exampleof X-, Y-, S-Axis) 239

12.2 APPLICATION CIRCUITS (Cont'd)
d
(2) Typical Connections of DC Servopack and Motionpack-ll0 (Figs. 12.4 to 12.9) W
POWER SUPPLY
2OO1220MAC
50160Hz
XoAXIS
- ............ -D_-S._o_7 ...................
MCCB IT CPCR-FRi[}B, 05C
NOISE MC2 __),., ! i i_+)---_?.
' 200110OV i
IFI_ TO Y" AND I

1/12F
I_ iI
I/1 Z.AXm I
r
T/_T._,r r POWER.ON ] '
SEQUENCE .I I ' 12
I F--_'_ _4 , 0
_-_, CONTROL POWER ', '_
5VDC
I f----,, , , '
I I * _-(_]S"O-WER
II ! _Fc c, E,
_VD_ c, TC
+24 -+ i'_-"'_. "-'t +TG IL(+)
I I i.t ', I II II II --02
I/ zcN-lo_,I=;
iP _
4M--
_,
-- _ ___ l 2CN-16 I I FP. . P.
I I STATION " IIII t I GEl L$ I 2CN-17_ t , PB "[C \_

II tI _j_.:.o,,_
[- -----] IIII : I _c.-"_{_
lip. I, ,r ,,|
,i ,"---_,_,- IIII .,..,. . ', .I

I llll_
,,
I
, _ J,0._\to_
l_c,.;;,_
,,,
I"""% ',Pll, FC "l.s I,,4
I ', I IIIII i • U,cN 1 2CN-I._, , +SV "r_H
_'-
_, I lllll I ; [ L __ I 2CN-4_ l I +5V Ar " I
!._. IIIIIII I I ._c._-_{

,, ',+_vT! I ,
I
J-
1_
'
-_
IIIIII
] IIIII
It ,t ',I AXISMODULE
tJEFMC B011_
2CN-6
" ' '%

_'. ,! o0v .,//1
_C,',I-?_ J_ / V -- G
I,
I
I
= ' 1111111 i II ' " ' 2CN-'Z_/L---J ,

I II II I I , _.C.N-]._. '.)., FEEDBACK UNIT I
I IIII H , L .... _-cN-_-'_OE_!jE-E:;ZD? J
/ CNC [ IIIl'k-I
L. .J
_ ....................
+7)V
] I
I I rz t,
/ ,_ _!I_
li_o.v
llIF_ _ ............................
Y-AXIS _........
MACHINE' _---_-q _H-t"Ji'-_"--_ _+ 24_''
SIDE 3CN I, FDBY
; ' I I Ill I _, ; _ Y-AXiS FWD RUN
I l lll I _ , _ _ OVERTRAVEL
,,ic_ I IIIII I --F--R, , RDBY
l TMOTION IIIIIII ',-T, , _ t_m'_'-'_'Y-AXISREVRUN
i '. MODULE I IIIII 1 .................... -_ FDBY _'-t.._._g"OVERTRAVEL
', I (JEFMC ! IIIII I ,_Zo_ F,:,-,.
i J, -C02[:}) I IIIII I Z-AX,S ...
a'------]
IZCN I. II II L._ f- .................. q RDBY RDY
i ¥ " +_V__:_V , --O
O__
I I ov -- ,,v _ sHkk_j-
! L._ ' FDBZ
_ ,II_ : 0.v
+24V i Z-AXIS FWD RUN
I I5cN • tS-----l-.IJ L----L-, ) _ _
i _ __57__- _: 6CNLJ'" '' _i i --_9__',AX'S REV

RON 'OVERTRAVEL
RDBz'0VERTRAVEL
', .h2_"_'°_)ll _' - ............ ':-- --o_°"--_o.,-.-,_-_°_
,I r--_---J--7 II MC2 FDBX
' 4 CN
1 II _ _-_ , .... O "- _ ,X-AXIS FWO
.o__c_ ._z
'-,'I=CN
" , • !, II
II _R 3BX OVERTRAVEI _ O
I, I, MICRO
I
MODULE
PC It
II
_ ,_ ....
_ _ (-AXIS
)VERTRAVEI
REV
: : (JEFMC II v_Bx FOX DECX
I
,'
IC"L"_
'_' _J
l.B,o, =_]I
2 CN
+5
O_ "_'_j
FC _ ,
RDBX
oo
__
0 0 f_
,
-_ RDX '__
_L{_.
_ DECY Y-AXIS
.AXIS DECEL
DEOEL LS
LS I
.... ] [ _-_
-
_ _
oEcz
Z-AXIS DECEL LS
r, r_ 'd_2J
240 Fig. 12.4 Typical Connection of DC Servopack Type CPCR-FR[_]B and Motionpack-110
POWER SUPPLY
50160
I 200/2_ HzVAC
R T
MCCB r= .............. -oc-_;,oL-;

E................... n=
I 1T CPCR - FR[_]RBA I
I -- i
)u Lz I
NOISE 3'-,_
= MC2
t i ),' L,_ r A (+)MOTOIR
flCN-15 " ', ID_ _2D
200/IOOV hCN-34
_'I
CN- 16 /I DBRT_
_] R,T, f(l CN
)'1 CN-2)
- 10 B _T "
FDBX B(
TO Y- )'lCN-ll [CN 7 J_ _'I'O-'_
T T [l_ r. lZ-AX,S,
POWER-ON
FILTER
i
•
[
--'L'_r,
"].
....
CONTROL
,
"1
' POWER
SEOUENCE, i
--
.c.-9,c.-6m-o07
flCN-
)'l CN-
7))v.)0)u. AT.L
12
FDX;_
]CN-
_!j __RD)
]9y RDBX
'
_t, 5 VDC flCN-I I.CN-5,1_
;r TS-V_ )'1CN-3 1CN-28_ 0ziV I
t ------_, ov_ t i _ICN-l:_

ION-8
_'1CN- 4 1CN_ 24_.J FDBX
Z-'___ _J I -- flCN-14 1. L_['_i
= I/O POWER I )'ION-27 ICN-20._ i,
24 VDC t' l CN-Z_ E_'I_
.g- :_V-_ - I
_ :24% 24V --_. j_-" +TG L(+} TG
I I I 2CN-10_ ' " I /' I
'I_---_FG _ b --('"l _)DB_ ,.'r 2CN"I_" _Pt ', --TG ,(_)_
0--_ I_ I o c_ 2CN-N.i7"_16"J_ ]pI I PA /r _ I I

// I)CRI CONTROL
_JTEAFTM_-NHOI I DEI o _ 2CN- 17 I |
o .EL LS 2CN-IS"I_ _l_ iI _PB . ',C .I
.\_ iI
G 1 2CN-6 '. !
AXIS MODULE' " ZCN:_ I ', 0V __ /
(JEFMC-B011) ZCN-Z
°'X ',_ • _i ov/L___
ov//i
I " 2CN'___DB ACK UNIT
.... q
lj _- _ 4-5V
Y. X,S
0z_V
Ij ' Y-AXIS FWD RUN
OVERTRAVEL
II T MOTION I II I I";:_IT,_'-"-T, RDBY

I ', MODULE IIIIH L--
................... J _ OVERTRAVEL
Y-AXIS REV RUN
-C.02[:]) ....... Z-AXIS ...... ----.O

IJ RDBY RDY
i_ TI 2cN
(JEFMC
+5v. _ +sv FDB..
Y FDY
I I OV/_llV _.O O__
: _ +24
V FDBZ
_-- 5CN 6CN[ 02,V ___ OVERTRAvELZ'AXIS

FWD RUN
• I RDBZ
BUS) r, FDBZ FDZ

I_" _F_' = T, -.-4-_--
L T, .................... J OVERTRAVEL
I 4CN MC2 FDBX [' . ._O_
RUN
_OVERTRAVE
_ cX-AXI_; FWO
, CN ----0_
[ MICRO Pcl RDBX _x-AXI$ REV
MODULE I RUN
IOVERTRAVE
I (JEFMC " I
_ O _ _ _ X-AXIS DECEL LS
" +_v_---
,.. Y.A×,s
DECEL
LS
.... J L. _ -. DEC2
i, Z-AX,SLS
. , , . ..
Fig. 12.5 Typical Connection of DC Servopack Type CPCR-FR[_]RBA and Motionpack-110 241
POWER SUPPLY I
2001220 VAC
50160 Hz
R
...........................................
DC .%_o_c._
- )MCCB 1T 'CPCR- FRt:iRB A
] DCL nTHR._
MC2 L=, A(+) MOl ;II

NOISE X-AXIS A . r
I _'_.- is FDX RD:

CN - 16
FILTER L )o
200/I00 V -- CN-34 DBR_ B(
R, T) CN- 10 FDBX
TO Y- ANO
IF 2F Z-Ax_$ fICN-ll
ICN-2) ICN-7B _
F l
T T ,. r POWER.ON] )']CN-22
,¢N-9 1¢,-6 _o-i

.[ SEOO_NCE..
_
__ ______J __,c,.12_c,-19
_ICN-21 ROBX
/
r ---- IICN:I ICN-S / o,,,V

"
/ ==::iii',i;-i:
/ - 24VOC
_ooE,
) P W R
II ! _ FC
._
•
_1CN-_TICN'_
E_
f .fr +24V_24V I 3( -_-V---_:'----- _'~" +TG L L(+I TGI

/ ' ; I II : I i 2CS-10J I I I "IM *'_ )
| ,.----,r I, _ ¢ E-o .(,,,v • ',P,t,'-TC L(-)%,_'

i
/
i _'L---:J IIII
I - CRT CONTROL [ [[ [
', i 3c.-,_,.oo
; I
,_._,., ,.,, _ >,-. DEC> 2CN 9 ' P| I PA " "bB |
STATION • _ " J I II
/ I ._..o.0,,,IIII ; I ,c._,, _ CELLS
I_¢.,, , , .. ;c .\1 '
r I _ I CN
' [
2CN-17
I 2CN-ISJ '
I
PI I PC
I •
_.S=,._.j
pc I
B: White/Blue
L ' / _____J2CN-4 r , , +sv ]? /1" C: Yellow
- "-_'l' ;111111 ! I ..... ZCN-S'_I / D:White/Yellow
GFC I IIIII 1 ' I :, i ', +sv/_ / D. Green
!
tllllliI iI
I IIIII I ',
(.JI::PML*-I_UII} 2CN°2 "__L.
_c.-:,J_o_-G_,_
°v _L'c" ' S:White/Gr
H : Red
G:S,eck
I: I IIIIII ,-.......
_Y-A_
.........
L___JII_H--_-_; +,v
_,! JJlCN 111111 I';'. ',: ;"i,

IIIII .lEaF'-. "-" q_-OVERT
"°_Y
A
T MOTION iiiiill ,, :_ ._c,c_._,._,_. Y.AXISREV RUN
', ! MODULEIIIII 1 L.................... _ _OVERTRAVEL
! I (JEFMC IIII I I _--_-_' FDY
i I -c02_::)IIIII/ Z.AX,S --o
F"--HlzcN . IIIILJ ,-..................... RDB_Y
-; T +sv.'-t-IIT-_--_i---+_'" __
', '! OV, _ _ oV
I
_____=__________lSCN ]
" _::_:,.v
v-====-,L,_ _
_ + 24 V
_ _
FDBZ
Z.AX,S
_wo
RON
OVERTRAVEL .
I T 6CNI I_ I I • .
! I i _ . RDBZ
) ' _C _ II R._-----R Z-AXIS REV RUN
,
I
_
L_
,c. _--- ___II
-
_:__L¥'
' L------'..................
_ _ )VERTRAVEL
I, -'{F_(_-A ,US) II =_ rL--" FDBZ FDZ

,
I
r---_zz:b---
' 4CN
Mc_
--
FD_x ---o
T
1CN
MICRO PC
, -oo _ RDBX
v_"_'s.L: -o"°_ .oz
/ MODULE IvUENRTRA'_ I
'l(JEFMC -- :-AXIS RE l DECX]
/.8110) - 0 o-_, _ (-AXISDECEL LS
.... _-_"_]-i'I TI 2 c N +5v.,Fc,_.__

0 V" ] . RDBXo_)__ RDX t _z-AxIS_ Y-AXIS DEcELDECEL
LsLS t
rz I,
242 Fig. 12.6 Typical Connection of DC Servopack Type CPCR-FR!_]RBA and Motionpack-110
(Feedback Unit: Type TFUE-[]I-]i:]SC)
2001220 VAC
b POWER SUPPLY
,50/60 Hz
B_ _ r- X-AXIS
_X ___ _ DC Se_o_c_
_--_ M_ ', _T CPCR-
FR!:-RB
A
I U,= U, u L
NOISE -I I f ,
I ...... DCL THR ._A (+_ MOTo_
FILTER I I / , Y_'T_eI,_:_CE_" * <) t + ,_'_ _ !
1 I /. _ _lZ_Szzz_'. [ _o_#_.,_x /J. I;
• _.,,,_"®"
I I
11
R,T,
'I L_
I
_ ,c,-,+
...... J.,{--_,+VD"WT..!LL'r_'z) a _
, ,EV2o
I
i._,_)" ,
.I,'B(--'I I'
rim TOY-AND I [ .'*LN-14_ iP|
i "OD ,_[ICN-10 T FDBX "1 'l I
I FIA IAZF Z-AX,S , / 3CN-I _ :'1
! _ _'ICN- _....lx_,_ _ | ill
. --- '
I (D t_-, , I:
•r "r r _ ' / 3CN-2_; o1' DD_flCN-Z2 T v_l ) Ill
I _'_- r POWER-ONI I I Z ..... & !Pl ,--VD_( ....... ICN-19J_" ...... I 'II
l I I. SEQUENCE
"l I I '_'_" '_ I DAS -Y_! _ =W-l= I ff Ub,'. I I
I f---'4 "-t 'I I 3CN-18_ICN-9 Ps' 6 _-"_-'_ I
¢ _-'-, .....
-T-Mc ' I `;CN-U_i_l! ,,v _lCN-2 ""- 3 - -I I 'I'
_r, CONTROLPOWER I | 3CN'9-'1_ '1 i ,_ICN l ICN " _ I [ '
I _"_"t, 5 VDC I I ' "'_ J_' '. ; r"x_ iv;- ' ' ";)_T i III
] I r--T_9.-P I= +2V I 3CN-16_ f l, '1 _.,'_ICN-2 L I III
"[. I CN- 28 0z,V I , I
I t""""_. _ " 0V4 11 1 ..[(IV ._CN.4_ICN_I:`;ICN.80_.._.Q....(_3 i

I II
I
II __f---J
I -
L +5v4
_oPow_R
T
//
//
,_, L _1: :`;CN-,_#
r"_F(; " '._ "_
;!_
.`;c_,-_,_'
,'I!i+'%_,CN-,
B._._ic__,.,
'. SAL 7.. .....
,CN-2,_-JF_BX
,- _CX-',.&
I I"_D__xl
_
II
I
111
',ll
,I .
24VDC I --J-- [ 3(_N-7 '_"-" ' - ' i ;
- -- - lI .... 124V[- " I CN - 2:'; E l Ii

I I II
T I ")' +++'1 T II ; .... I 3CN-IgOE ...... - +24V P---_. ,.-.. . IL(+) Ill
I I L , / II ', / - [ FOBX '- i2CN-IO ' "' " _'¢'TG II
I I----'[' ,,,,t /_ll , ...I :`;CN-_:`;_-O--O-_._.V• I ; ! IM-+L_,11
I I _I"FG _'1 Illl ; ", [ RDBXI _2CN-II .... _ "1 '
II II _R_-_+#
STATION
/
IIII
;i i
:`;_N-,_-#_
I. _=_I 2CN-18J_
i ',
; .,i
!__.,=_¢._A !
I_".
,_
:',
iii
I I IJEFMC-H011 Jill I 3CN'_L_'--O O-I OECEL LS ] -._ IPl I T ] I _, I I, I
F---] I ,+,.;,+,
I ! " :i='
'++ l;+-m;t' +I
,,, _fi ll21+
,,+x
---++g
++i
"l '
F(;
I
'
I/IICI i I
.............
_#cODoIUL)
Y-AXIS
E
............................
"
_cN-'2o_------_
2
FEEDBACK UNIT
-= ....
""
I
* A:
c:B:
D:
E:
F:
Blue
GreenYell°w
Black
Red
Black
CNC ._.- ............... "
MACHINE
Ii ---d_- _44-_--_- +_.1_
..... '
SlOE I _- 3CN_ FDBY
I J (JEFMC I-'°B.
Y FDY
(_ I[2CN
-co_z:_) . Z-AX,S . --oRDBY
i +5 V -- RDY
[, T', MODULEov '_i-11111 _ L--- o+SV

sx]
................. --- -_O_ OVEmTRAVEL
"TT'I'-_'_ + 2,t\
1 " _ O_+V FDBZ
Z-AXIS FWD RUN
5CN 6CNI _ OVSRTRAVEL
' L 4cNFG R'"_"I-_"_R' _ OVERTRAvELZ-AXISREVRUN

'II -F_,F-
A ' `;US
, r,L.....................
. FDB.Z FDZ
' ,_--V_-c_-_-_ !_'-' F_× --o

l CN _ VERTRAVE "--O-- RDZ
II RDB3 REV
1 MICRO PC b_,s
VERTRAVE
_ MODULE
(JEFMC II _°"× FDX DECK
, -B110) +SV _ I O _ _ .AXISDECELL5

DECY
0V
'_[12CN _ RDBX RDX
.... J
' r:
I
rz Ii
DECZ -AXIS OECEL LS
Fig. 12.7.Typical Connection of DC Servopack Type CPCR-FR_]RBAand Motionpack-110 243

(Feedback Unit: Type TFUE-E-][][]SAB)
l
POWER SUPPLY.
200/220 MAC
,50160Hz
4
- MCCB " -D_3_,;_

X-AX,S .......
............
P _ IT CPCR-MRO1C-070
NOISE
FILTER I
I
I
_
-
MC2
-4) + " /
.I
I"
H
(_),_2.L._I
i
v_
v
u,
u=
AI+ _
)
t I . , I,"
....
rA(+) MOTOR
I
I
+
_.J_,,o_.
ii ,,.___:___J
[:i ,,), , ._I _4-_v. , _ox_
I _j.L,r.41
,_i_o_
',_n121=, !,
;_o._;.,0,,
/ ,oN-,_,,
+:v
'S_._q / )1
T T >-,POWERO.)
, I ,_,:,',
;_.° i'_ ..... 3CN-2 ,
o4__4 /
__
,I
t
I t--"', 5 VOC ', ', ;I ;I "0 ] _, , '1

----
] I ' i / 3CN- 17 " _ .... 4 / ] I]

I t----'.--'.--'.--'.-_b_
°W ,, q,,)v,c_-,_ ,_ <_)& I !;
I I J--_
1.____J 'I L.. 3cN-s_,, E,M-.-- I ',1
I I - ;;'voc " I/0 POWER
, _-L--i.,oN-7
__, rG , .
T+ I ,I
L-I_.,F
I !.
+..,4
,
',-:_,,I
i I --'I FDBXI
33CN--169'_-'ii_.. -_'_+'2_--_..--
12CS-10eI , ) ..i" _ I
+ TG IL(+, TC! J
_"--"'--""_1 L, I 3CN'I:';(_-O--O--qJ,--_-Oz+V
I I. Pl I -,-,-/P ,C4 ,I
[ il'_ FG 0Vl J-- ')" I RDBXI , zcN-nO ', -'_ _'-''"_q I
CR CON OL EC Ip I --
I . (JEFMC-H011) ...... _ U--"OECEL

Ls I _cNi_ ' [ PB "L.c \1 'I;
I F- _ _c_-;;_7ti _ _D\\t ',I,
I,._ r :A'BUS) ', I _,, ;;_,( , I PC _R ',_Ec, I'
----2, L______J._cN-_# , I +_'_" 'I ,,

I I A XSMODULE
I : CN-6
Bx_ I, ,_ ov LC_ l I
__'J_ ! (JEFMC-B011) __;_- --/ I,
I
I
:-- _-_ .... J-_ue-<:ZZT_°L
;
L . CNC__l +SV Y-AXIS
MACHINE i +:t_v r, ,,
SIDE '[ I--- C--'_r
3 ---], Oz_V
.... -1 "X I:Z3_()V Y.AXIS FWD RUN i

0VERTRAVEL
1CN = R,
H,- 'I
[T MOTIO_N
[
E ,
]
MODUL
(JEFMC
"1",- u
, _...................
T, _J _
FD_.Y
RDBY
Y-AXIS REV RUN
FDY OVERTRAVEL
_ _co2r2) ....Z-AX,S
............. ---oo
RI)BY @
" i T ' + ov.,

5 V"_-r_]-_-_'-
_ _ ov
++24v
5v .._0-- 0.--_ RDY
5CN _ Z-AXIS FWD RUN
6CN _ FDBZ OVERTRAVEL
"'
'
I
/
L__ _J --- II
4CNF Ji R '_'_-"- R '
T, : L= T,
Z-AXIS REV RUN
I 4Z_}_ F A.BUS) r,- ............... _ - -- FDBZ FDZ 0VERTRAVEL

r----_- 7 MC? FI)BX _
,r==L.___ 4 CN -- ,, __ RDBZ_RDZ
)VERTRAVE _ O ,. r,,'v_
l I MICRO PC [ II _-,x,s,,v
+'--'_-mmx HALt"
_UN E
) I MODULE ] ]] )VERTRAV
(JEFMC ]] FDBX FDX • DECX
, _ _0___ _-; ,__ _.Y.AX,S DECEL

CS
J i J ¢--- l '-_ _o_cz
1 t r''-_' Z-AXISDECEL LS
r, -r, t,
244 Fig. 12.8 Typical Connection of DC Servopack Types CPCR-MRO1C to 75C and Motionpack-110
POWER SUPPLY
200/220 VAC
50/60 Hz
R S T X-AXIS
_1
;I (2I
_'_¢.. r .............. -_.-,._;.a........... _E_;._
;.-,,v7-- ----
o")-D-_,
MCCB . I gb":_."_;L',_E, .&%%.....
S.S._ ".(__ ! _ --- -R ,-Po-
---.,S'--
-q
NOISE [ l" r -- 1 I ..c.z // i L(;_z'_r'-°J_3"°JUOll---_-MO-_0 R
FLTERT_ "1 " /If r 9R A_" _ _ 'LA'+, ,
lllll ---_ ,[------"_ E2 / DBRA IB(-T ],

I 3CN - _,_ ' I_) . , t
iF zr ,, :_c_-i
_11 . . ',
" T "I" r------'-'-] i | 3CN-2_I _" RIJB_I l '
.oo,.c,= ' r POWER-ON
t
! I
I
/.c, ;-_ "_ N- r
CN- 18
, VD 12
9
._7
S
!i ,
I
I
_-----J
_L....r, CONTROL POWER
,I /I .,c.-',;__
" ; '_" I ; f"['l
_t ......
hu% "
' I
:1
It
I f'_', 5voc ' / j ; [ xp 8_ ,
' "" d_ ,--T( ,
- _____v _ .. .,p_l
3CN-5_ 11 El
I-q
:,vP°c
w_ i _ I ......-' " , - , '
I -4_r +Z4V_+'-'IVI ?,CN-_9.c._ _- ', _ +24V _---_ ,-', +TG _/[-'+' TOl,
I I ' ! I II ', = I FDBX I I zcs-m_ ; I ' "[M _ '
I ('_'-4" .L I_11 ; ', :_cx-_:dr-_o--c-_---0_,v / 1. "Pt" -T_: I.,-,k_.'l
I I _r4_';---- "vc-I1TI---T-, -'1 J. E"-"L
_l ',"9-!'.rZ ',, .A ¢-A " _1
I I _c_co.zaZ IIII !I ;_CN- 12
_qYEcT7 F ( 2LN 16
.....
-I"-_ ,"I, r_ % \. Ii
I I STATON
eT#"c-"0;,-
....
IIII ! I
I .,,>.f--o--O_OECE,
LSI_c.,.:;;
_ i P,.,_ _
.... ._(l _'_O_]r')
PB
5_,_\
D
, .L._-L, , PB
i 2CN-19 _ [ , pc I
I ii IIIllr-c: l"* _CN-5 I , _ ,

_,-_; IIIIit i I' =cJ_,, :+:,'7,"/ I
I I IIIII I , AXISMODULE ',c._-_
_ ' ' "_ J:<" / I
-L-_ I IIIII I ' I (JEFMC-B0U) ;/:...',_ ', ', "v//I
- I IIII1,1
i I I :v_-::
: c__
' , nV _____
B.L'__A_
CK UNIT
• CNC
L-'--C:_-'--IIII L_I F ....................
.....
I II _ +sv
I } iV r"
I r1 t
MACHINE _ &-- _. uV
_.,,,.
+2
SIDE il I 3CN , .....
ICN _.OVERTRAVEL
', T MOTION
I _:'_
_ l
I MODULE
JEFMC I[ IIIII#IF7_ __ FD .Y FDY Y-AXIS REV RUN
OVERTRAVEL
I I ov_ ' ,,v
5CN , "_,'. _ Z-AXIS FWD RUN

0VERTRAVEL
T 6CN
L . _ ' "
_ Z-AXIS REV RUN
OVERTRAVEL
F I(FA.BUS)I} F,-................ q 7- - FDB_.
Z FDZ
- - _ ' X-AXISFWD
1 CN OVERT.RAVE
' _v , xb%x,s
R_V
2CN 0 "
' _ X-AXIS DECEL LS
;
' L
I gI , __
Ruux _u,)kl • Y-AXIS
DECEL
LS
....._,CRO _;ULE
(JEFMC.B110) r, ,.. _I,, . Z-AXIS DECEL LS
Fig. 12.9. Typical Connection of DC Servopack Types CPCR-MR08Cto 75C and Motionpack-110; , 245
12. 2 APPLICATION CITCUITS (Cont'd)
(3) Typical Connections of AC Servopack and Motionpack-ll0 (Figs. 12.10 _. 12.13) I
POWER SUPPLY
200/220 VAC
50/60 Hz
R S , X-AXIS
I CACR- SR:'_:i BB
MCCB MCl II _AC.....Set ,opock
NOISE = C Z F .......................................... ' "
_,,_v-" 1111I
_ AXIS MODULE
CN -7 v'
Wi
"1
TO Y- AND
Z-AXIS
IF 2F [ l ,,RST (JEFMC-B011) +z4v FDBX BSX CN-8 ---
1 I b POWER-ON! -- FICN-4I
L .._:"°°'-j = r, CONTROL POWER
t
' 5 VDC ALMX
'
_Y_ IT ,",o,
i F24V
I"
CRT CONTROL FDBX -f-Zl V

(JEFMC-H011
STAT,ON
IIII ,r..... IIII (:'A-BU-';, _[,
I _
_D c_
.....
ECEL L,(
ill
1"_/
f
i_° ILL/,
II/I," I IIII
1
i_lCb
oo,
_
_ ---,
PA
_c_ "l--F-z_(_. _ ,
I OV
__ __ _.j See a IEu_n for
ill/ I AC servo series
L_,
- //// L L__.............----'-'
//-L[_.,_-]-% -}Y-A×,S---, ,TS_E.S__-,.,L_._
MACHINE -----
sDE ', I , :,c,_

-]_tttr-_--_'
+24'vIm---_ {_,JV "
I ....
J / IIIl[' (. i r
CN , ._.._, I N
, .--d---- = , Y-AXIS FWD RU
MOTION I _ L(_}., OVERTRAVEL
, I MODULE IIII I IT LL%Z j ....
(JEFMC IIII I I ---" ............. "_""
_t I _^2,-_ _I t n I t _-_-_'_ ' Y-AXIS REV RUN
_L__A_
2CN
=_' IIII1 I AXIS
r .................... q,
-- _'OVERTRAVEL
_ i ITI +5, _'+5v i

i i
I +24V
ff-_--%5
CN 6CN t Z-AXIS FWD RUN
• ' ' OVERTRAVEL
I L.m.l ---- s ----L'- s i
:
I r--
_
l_t--]
_o_, *r_:.............. _--_I I
_ _ 0VERTR,V_L_'AX'S
i_|
' CN
,
[ C
RX
_jANX
I S FWD
OVERIRAVEI
I 2 CN 0V RvUNRTRAVEI DECX
, FG _ _ X-AXIS DECEL LS
I r, r_ t,
_ DECY
*-AXIS
DECEL
_S
MICRO PC MODULE
(JEFMC-Bl10) _ c_, _ Z-AXIS DECEL LS
Fig. 12.10 Typical Connection of AC Servopack Type CACR-SR[][_]BB

246 (M, F, S, Series, Rated Speed: 1000 rpm) and Motionpack-110
200/220VAC
D POWER SUPPLY
50/60Hz R ST X-AXIS
_))-;-) ;) MCCB MC1 I CACFI_-SR_';2-;BC I
FILTER _ ....r _ [ [ MC2

T, ,
] / J
2---1 ............
T"
, , _--'_
I - I ', ,,_ ,
1 I i, I / I _R _MOTOR',,
U U --I
_w200j,o0v iJlll_ Ax,s

MOOOLE
..... ' I RI_;I (JEFMC-B011) T'tV ....
?T
_ICN-7
_
_W W_
"")_L 'l
' " ' "--" 0z_V _ubx BSX T ',
TO Y-AND 1 -8 ' I
,_tr_F _-AX,S,_ __O_NS_ :,
::MC/L__ __ ' l "'o=5 Jq ..... : I ,I
,}-_r CONTROL ' [ FDBX _f _1_'_0 I ! '
I_" POWER
svoc ', I _]CN-24 1 i ',I
/_ ov b /_ i l- 3CN-I _ ^_ ' I _ICN 49 llCN-39 1'

|___ I FG] 3CN-Z___/_ ',p,, _1CN-47 [I il
l 24VDC I| I J-- I ; _a_, j _--_1 CN-J2 ]
D |_.-_-.l---._424"_'_-
= I/OPOWERI/
I[ !l =_ i 3CN-]S._f
3CN-18-_'2_ " !'l
[p,' J_1CN-46 I
, L-_lCN_13 I '1
II __2, ] Ill j+z,,'l acN._,__ tL! ,L--?,cN... I! Ii ',;
I _FC ov_ |,ll ,- I _ : BSX "_1_---_C_]5 l[
] ] +_-_-J Jill 'Oz4V 3CN-4_+2_VL_'-_ICN-50 I [ ]/
I IORTOONTROLI/II
I I _C"-'_ =+=,VI ; I '
II [STATION
[(JEFMC-H012) // ',, :I I FDBX
3CN-13_--o_02,V I, I[ I] [I
I[
-_" [ 3 CN-12 _a_x t I
I I / I/I/f II 2CN-I6_ PA ,-, LS _ICN_ [ [ 'l,

' ' z CN- ] 7 _ ',PI: -oo ,
1 CN , 1 CN-34 I
,
////11
Ill/
! I I
I
I
'
I
2CN 1
2CN-2•
.... - " Id
OV
0V
- '
i,
I
I
I
I
=
1CN-1
.O'1CN-3
'
', See a bulletin for
II
I
i _.._ Ill/Ill i L!CN-___ '.' _c.-_/ ACservo series ,
.... n I_ _ , //111 I _-====

-t- 5V .............
.......... __Y-AXIS
.... =---_-TSE-S_00-2._ ....
SIDE [ - ._-_.. "" _'-_--_ +24V l
o2_v ',
-"T"- I
/MOTION
_MODULE S...,,..___ST
-i .................. --JI _ Y-AXISovERTRAvELFWD
RUN
_"--w-- }¢ i FOBY
i(JEFMC-C02_-_)II
]I RDBY
_-_,_; +SV_+
L-IIII
LI _....... -_:_'-_-
......... 5v
_ OWRTRAwLY'AX'S
R_V
RU"
! I 0 24V
5CN6CN FDBZ
_ Oz4V Z-AXIS FWD RUN
4CN F a I IJlI _' _':: ," }e
I/ OVERTRAVEL
; u'_"J_
]_, _--_---"v- A..... _ 1[ T

--,, =L-T s .................. I J _ _RDBZ Z-AXIS REV RUN
', .[--4CN"_ II
i.r ÷s,,_.
.ct-_,_i:
_I._,I .ON
,
,
II !__X-AX,SovERTRAvELRON
FWOI OVERTRAVEL _ X-AXIS OECEL kS
....
.,c.oPC
_1
MOO.., .....
Fig. 12.11 Typical Connection of AC Servopack Type CACR-SR[--]J_BC

(M, F, S, Series, Rated speed: 1000rpm) and Motionpack-110
247
POWER SUPPLY
200/220 VAC
50/60Hz R T
¢_ X-AXIS
l-o")---_."L
^) MCCB I, .................... -_-c--_rvo_ac_ ...........
MCI CACR-SRi_!_]AB 1 ER
NO,SEJ-- ]___ I
47----1 USAREM;+'
r " I
FILTER _ I I NIC2 I I I 9t .I F-_---e-t_" I

- l [ I I /_ ' / I
l -I - HI'-- i I ] ! +R _MOTOR ;,
I 1 I i_ II1,-', ; I,; ,,iY'-'h II
_200/J00V I J l 1 I AXIS MODULE . V ?T _ _ ) If
v 11! I (JEFMC-B011) ff-2_ _ICN 7 .J,w W.L+/_"---r_hs],
I I T6;A_4D r .... -1 m.,vF_XssxT " _' T I ',/,
---. . - ! ]CN- ' - ,
_r, CONTR()L "J I _Go_O. ._I CN-26 [ I

_ _ I rum,, ] CN-24 '
I ,r'- POWERSVDC
I /,
I ' _ .
ALMXI
t ' / i 0V
oD ,' | I
__ u_,v
I .f----CL. ov_ ,_ , J. acN.,_ ._]CN.49_"
[ "[ ___l/ I FG[ 3CN'2_lCN-47 /
I I - ,/u=-'UWt'-H / -_:-4" aCN-15D '" !'ll ._lCN-46
:l 2_p;_.. I/ !_r L DAS , , ]CN-]Z
' 't J , ,_ ,T aCN-1l._ _ " ',_';_IL---_ICN..I4
I ? t____ IIII ;vz'_ / _'ix-qSf'_,_,,,tTvv--"_lCN-50
1 Illl 3CN-6 "' - u_4v I
STATION IIII . vDBx

• :1(JEFMC-H012) /Ill I 3 CN-13 _-_._'-T-'--0zN
• "--- 3 CN-'12 :--.....o-_'_
DECX D
:_ / ////_l 2CNi6 PA .- LS I
:_I, #'FG iI Hill_N= CN-17 _ "PI', . _'-33
tllll l t ! eCN-,8 PB : I ' _-,,-_2eCN /
I I ////I I i i 2CN-]9&' P_ ,p , ; _;-oo
' 2 CN-14 PC ', ,; Gt_ -36
I
Ilttl t t t 2CN-1 _ 0V , , .' CN-20 _ PG "

; I /l/Ill ; i 2CN-2_ ov ', _ cN-t i]
, 2CN-3 _ -_ -
• I l/Ill I ! [ 9r-.vgnj;r_. ' ' .( ICN-3 See a bullet,nfor ,
] CN'C I |HH ] iI L_'______o
L _i',-_ _,
" '/ _l CN-18 AC servo series I
= L.__J qll u _-=.==::::::----- ........ -:--------- TSE-S800-2.1 .... -I
MAOH,NE
=: _tt : OV
.... n _. + 5V .... ] Y-AX S
._CN = °TW JlllJ7

i IM NIIIIIt
IV k............... "
, ,, I
J
,
FDSV t, L.UN
' ,'(JEFMC -C0 z:!illl
_-q I --- _ RDBY ..............
II I Z-aXIS
+5vL I11 r- +-_-v ................ I
: ,, ov_-!!!= iT0v
/ i _ I _+zav I
_[_ 5CN 111_ _ i -024V I
F T eC_LL - _ : FDBZ
: k _c_FC_- _-.--_ , _ Z-AX.S

FWD.UN
I T =LLT l
,,' : _,-_u -J_
-_ = s
_, ....................
=i =s
JI _
Z-AXtS REV RUN
OVERTRAVEL
r-" t]
! L 4CN / I MC2 FDBX_x

_'_ _J , RUN I
--'C_ +5+_ z---- l r--_ "AxIsFwD
OVERTRAVEL
I
U 2CN 0V _
_" I_-I_
--
/
|
t " X-AX,SREV
l _ ] RUN I DECX
.... J'. '

[..... - --
_', r_t t=
IOVERTRAVEL X-AXIS DECEL LS
(JEFMC-B110)
MICRO PC MODULE l _ Y-AXIS DECEL LS
Z-AXIS DECEL LS
Fig. 12.12 Typical Connection of AC Servopack Type CACR-SR[_J_B1

(R Series, Rated Speed: 3000 rpm) and Motionpack-110
248
POWER SUPPLY t
50/60 Hz POWER UNIT

D 2001220VAC
._ ,_ (JUSP-ACP[:]AA), " " X-AXIS
o_ O_MCCB F -l ............... -_-c-s.,;o;o;_
..............
_r-_ ; ' CACR-AR-=iL:!_AA
FILTER _ MC2 I yll ,, _N r----]

20O/I°°vLvwJ I_'_'_ ](_rt't'-__! U _ MOTOR I
• C, C, 4 4 " ,_
.-rt___Jlllllll .....
II FDBX I
()2_V -- ICN'8
[ [ _----_ PN1234I I Lo oJ __- \ I ,I

I I ',. _1 TOY.AND[ I FDBX / J- i '1
n _ rPOWER-ONI Z-AX( I 0"-- "%" JJ
i _ s-EOUEN-cEI S AXIS MODULE _oDBc.___----- I " "

r CONT=n/ om .... I (JEFMC-B011) I FDBX 1 [
' 5 VDC t 1
I _ .... / )l , ALMX I
l I l I ; ' VD _"J . ;N-38, .,'_+24V
I L----J., v I' , tv _cN-,j DO ___ _ :_ -

I I _,-%_£J II ', 1° _"-_, _ _--4
I 24 VDC I I 'I _ I D i
/ " "" I l 3LN-IIJ -- "'"7

., I_//
, I II ,..... , BSX --L
V
,_
FG 0V
...... _ l
CRT CONTROL I ] +24v '
(JEFMC-H011
STATION FDBX I II
, __ IIGN
FC" 2CN "'_
= i 2 CN- 15 --
IL_
SeeaLbu_
erieTi6
c
................ (J_S E__-

_S8N_-2=5_)_.
_,CN._C
. -----2------_-_2E2--_-_-_-_-2__ _ Y-AXIS
MACHINE .... '

S,OE I
..... I
: -1 r_
1CN FDBY
MOTION _ , Y-AXIS FWD RUN
MODULE " L_-" .................... RDB_ 'OVERTRAVEL
• (JEFMC
'. -C02[]) Z-AXIS _ _ ,Y-AXIS REV RUN
'OVERTRAVEL
i +sv,, +sv
2CN
5CN 6CN
OV/ -- ;-7 ..................... FDB
_,Z-AXISFWD RUN
_[rv'v'x, Z-AXIS REV RUN

_--L _ t, _RDBZ,' OVERTRAVEL
OVERTRA VEL
II
II
' [ l'
2CN
l CN
+ 5V
(IV
FG
"
I r, r,
.
_
RDI_X '
,,
OVERrRAV_t
OVERTnAVEL ..... _
_DECY
DECX
X-AXIS DECEL LS
Y'AXISDECEL LS
MICRO PC MODULE
D (JEFMC-B110)
(C Series,
_
Fig. 12.13 Typical Connection of AC Servopack Type CACR:SR[_][_]AA
Rated
, Z-AXIS
Speed: 3000 rpm) ,,nd Motionpack-110
DECEL LS
249B
I
(4) Typical Connection of AC Adjustable Speed Drive and Motionpack-110 (Fig. 12.14) t
POWER SUPPLY
200/22OVAC
50/60 Hz
)MCCB
NOISE -- MCZ
II
FILTER L 200/I(K)V t111
SPINDLE
l I _ SPINDL._EE
CONTROLLER MOT_0R
A_C 7
IF{_ 1_2F 1! r POWER-ON-_" AXIS MODULE _-_ ,5'.- b"_SM'`'I]

'Z', _."jx__u-
I:"_FAN C-_SING
L rL _-" i SEOUENCE ; (JEFMC-B011) L_ B .s,,_,,,_ ,_._:__Juu _--.. I_
| | 24 VDC " +z4v/ _FT w " n I /

r--_- V , 3 CN-6
l 1 L 4\ t _C 1
r ',. " _! ',- ! [ I-'_-- ! THER"O_TAT I l
I I 1 or# v I OVR_._CN-]._ , ,,, _ .-. L8 _ I /
I I xt , I_.... () zl V _3CN-12 ...... ,L t cx- r_, .... _ _1 E !)_ln /
rc_____l :_CN-2(, _=-y(; ....... ,,v !, c:, ,
_,unH_v= rvvvL , ' • - ' FWD nu IC._--[: ' " n' ';:
L / .....
+,__3cN-14
+_'uJ REV
TORQUE LIMIR_MNI_b_ BETA
I
/
/I /I |L ov_
- , ]
I --V,, l
3CN-I TORQUE LIMIT(L)_
OVERRIDECANCEL_
THFTAI l_;_
THE"rA ') 1C%2(>
'. .'_ I
"_-'/RESOLVER
/|
/ _--'---_l t -- 1:) V J_'L_f 3 CN" 15 SOFTSTART CANCEL
_-°_:)--_ i C_<-ii " - _ " E___" ___J /
/ I r--,fFC 5v _j)_j J OV !. MALFUNCTIONRESETT
"_ "Y " i .... a
/ I 4--_---#_ u'_ B"_CN-') I ', (>V ', /
I I _RT CONTROL- [[ "l" - i I _ ..... / J
I I
I I
STATION
I i
//
//
,
i
I
T
:_c_-u 'T
,,. r; c°MZ'PDr (°LOSE°AT'R
I)AS
.
-
"_
a "T, _,(iv
ION 4 S
a_
]c_--':_
ZEROSPEEDSIGNAL
_1
I '
r I //
'
I 1 q
....
_ (1V NI)ET
" " __
SPEEDDETECTINGSIGNAL
(CLOSED AT SET SPEED 0R BELOW) /
/ ._,
"1 ' I
//
// / I
iOVE..,oE SET_I_
_c u 'I'
:_c_::: _R
' , 2CX-T
_,.REEC_I_
" • ' -[ IC:_ ZeJ.
SPEEDCOINCIDENCESIGNAL
CLOSEDWITH IN +151OFCOMMANDSPEED)
/
/
'
i , tl -r,,
_5V I "
_,,\
" -
......, /
1 I / f_--# 'v I SPEEOOME-rER1mADe ....... F,,%
..... )_'T_--_ TORQUEDETECTINGSIGNAL /
r_ FG J I J t_ F(" J INTERNAL RESISTANCE .v_.-,"2-c_--_-" "- ..... ICN-_+, (CLOSEDAT SET TORQUE OR OVER) I
I I J I J J ] --' J 2ko OR BELOW _ , CN+,) ,_,k -A ,.l(._:.:l[)_. /
I -_ _ = LC. 4
-L
-- , LOAD METER mADC - ,_2_._:_ V )'V • . EX CESSVE SPEEDDEVIATIONSG NAL
- J ' / I --"_'-- ! _NkT%RRNALLREwStSTANCE
{_ - _ I E. r_ (CLOSEDATSPEEDDEVIATIONSO'_OROVER) /
-_
,,
',
r; -
MOTION
-
I / I
/I II ; _E_°_
"',
,, ;k,c__:.,{_ I
cx _
........
J.
.... I .. I
OF Z4v _"/
.I
II
_1_, (JEFMC I / I I! II _po:o ', :,_;;-;;,
,,. THALM II l_ ....
[ nn')_'*_ ] / ! _t"°'9 ' ' ;:_c_:]_I)r, oz,v
_ ..... _cC;]MALFUNCTION
i I FcJ,-, I I l I __....!tE:_-," '"' _# Ac_/INDICATIONS
! i I_1 I ; ; , ' _ _ coM-J
c-'--rl_cN A___I_I(F_._,s)
A l v !
_--r----_" 6CN] _iUI[ ...... ..I[]cN
3 CN-7 I :_CX-:_l o i
L_ 4CN __ ' i ........ J
_)'_'_V Seemanualsfor AC
r-_-T_-CN -_ adjustablespeeddrives,
VS-626MT]] B series =
CRO P ,.-,2).
I MODULE
I (JEFMC I
I ! -Bll0) _vJ_
F(;,
2CN OV ,__.__::
___J
Fig. 12.14 Typical Connection of AC Adjustable Speed Drives,

VS-626MT ]_ B Series and Motionpeck-110
250
I
CONTENTS
D APPENDIX-1 LIST OF ALARM CODES 250
APPENDIX-2 LIST OF SERVOMOTORS 255
APPENDIX-3 LIST OF Servopack UNITS 258
APPENDIX-4 LIST OF Motionpack-110 261
251
APPENDIX-1 LIST OF ALARM CODES
,dB
Code Contents Cause Corrective Action q
NOTCH ERROR • Notch parameter is not set. Set parameter #1003.

010 • Offset number designation error.
PROG ERROR M code (M90-M97) for internal Correct the program.

011 (M90) processing is used.
OVER FLOW The number of the characters in a Correct the number of characters
012 (128ch) block exceeds the limit (128) . in a program.
PROG ER:ROR • No data after address. Correct the program (words).

013 (NO ADDRESS) • No address before data.
PROG ERROR "-", "0" are not used correctly. Correct the program. (
014 ("-', "0") • Use of decimal point movement is
erroneous.
PROG ERROR Character that cannot be used in Correct the program.

015 (UNUSE CH) significant information section is
programmed.
PROG ERROR Input data digits overflow (more Correct the numbez" of digits in
016 (8 DIGITS) than8). theprogram. I

1
PROG ERROR G code that cannot be used is Correct G code in the program.
017 (G) programmed.
PROG ERROR Use of G group in a block is Correct G code in the program.

018 (G) erroneous.
PROG ERROR F is not programmed in interpolation Add F command to the program.

019 (F) operation. 1
PROG ERROR Radius is 0 in circular command. Correct the program (I, J or R).
020 (R=O)
PROG ERROR Out-of-area designation error in Correct the program

021 (G02/G03) circular command. (X, Y, or R)
PROG ERROR The value of P is not in parameter Correct the program

022 (P) area. (P).
O23
,din
PROG ERROR Axis data is programmed in G10 Delete axis data in the program, q
024 (G10) block.
252
i
Code Contents Cause i Corrective Action
reset, start at top of
D 025 M02 RESTART After stop with M02,cycle

depressed, start is After
program.
026
FG ERROR • Interpolation module error Check the program.

027 (G01, G02, G03) • Plane designation error
• End point designation error
PROG ERROR Skip signal is not input in G31 block. Check the skip signal.
028 (G31)
OFFSET ERROR • G43 or G44 is used in G02 or G03 Correct the program (G43-G48).
029 mode.
• G45-G48 are used in any mode other
D PROG ERROR P than

is not G00-G03.
designated in M98 block. Add P to the program.
030 (M98)
PROG ERROR In call with M98 and M99, program Check the related program.
031 (M98/M99) number is not found.
PROG ERROR Subprograms are nested exceeding Nest the subprograms in a
D 032 (M98 NEST) five levels, maximum of four levels.

PROG ERROR Axis designation is made in G04 Delete the axis data in the
033 (AXIS) block, program.
PROG ERROR There is not M code for the program Add the M code for the program
034 (M02/M30/M99) completion in the end of the program. • completion (M02, M30, or M99).
D 035
O36
037
NO AXIS The axis to be used is not effective. Set parameter #1000.

O38
PROG ERROR G code (G40-G49) related to error • Correct tSe program.

• Execute G80 reference before
039 (G80) compensation during combined references related to
operation command is specified, compensation.
D SOT (X) An alarm occurred in soft limit After reset, return the X-axis, in
040 switch (X-axis). the opposite direction and check
the program.
.... 253
APPENDIX-1 LIST OF ALARM CODES (Cont'd
Code Contents Cause Corrective Action q
SOT (Y) An alarm occurred in soft limit After reset, return the Y-axis in
041 switch (Y-axis). the opposite direction and check
the program.
SOT (Z) An alarm occurred in soft limit After reset, return the Z-axis in
042 switch (Z-axis). the opposite direction and check
the program.
043
044
o45
P-SET At the termination of positioning Adjust the machine and

046 ERROR (X) operation, the position error pulse parameters (#1406, #1474).
exceeds the allowable value (X-axis).
P-SET At the termination of positioning Adjust the machine and

047 ERROR (Y) operation, the position error pulse parameters (#1606, #1674).
exceeds the allowable value (Y-axis).
,d
P-SET At the termination of positioning Adjust the machine and q

048 ERROR (Z) operation, the position error pulse parametez:s (#1806, #1874).
exceeds the allowable value (Z-axis).
EXTERNAL Error caused by "external error ER" Examine the "external error ER"
049 ERROR signal input, signal.
MACH External signal "machine ready Check the "machine ready
050 UNREADY (MRDY)" is not turned on. MRDY" signal, a
SERVO POWER Signal "servo ready SVOK" from the Check the "Servo ready SVOK"
051 NOT SUPPLY servo controller is not turned on. signal and servo power.
MP UNREADY Motionpack is not in READY status. • Check the signal from the servo
052 system.
• Check FABUS cable.
EMERGENCY Emergency stop Clear emergency stop.

O53 STOP
OVER TRAVEL Over-travel signal input (X-axis). Check over-travel LS. After reset,
054 (X) return the X-axis in the opposite
direction.
OVER TRAVEL Over-travel signal input (Y-axis). Check over-travel LS. After reset,
055 (Y) return the Y-axisin the opposite •
direction. I
OVER TRAVEL Over-travel signal input (Z-axis). Check over-travel LS. After reset,
056 (Z) return the Z-axisin the opposite
direction.
254
Code Contents Cause Corrective Action
SERVO ERROR Error excess (X-axis) Examine the servo system, motor
057 (X) system, and mahcinesystem
(X-axis).
SERVO ERROR Error excess (Y-axis) Examine the servo system, motor
058 (Y) system, and machinesystem
(Y-axis).
SERVO ERROR Error excess (Z-axis) Examine the servo system, motor
059 (Z) system, and machinesystem
(Z-axis).
SERVO ALARM Servo system error alarm (X-axis) Check the servo system (fuse,
060 (X) heatsink,etc.). (X-axis)
SERVO ALARM Servo system error alarm (Y-axis) Check the servo system (fuse,
061 (Y) heatsink,etc.). (Y-axis)
SERVO ALARM Servo system error alarm (Z-axis) Check the servo system (fuse,
062 (Z) heatsink,etc.). (Z-axis)
063
064 .
065
COMM ERROR Transmission error between motion

066 (X) and axis modules (X axis)

067 (Y) and'axis modules (Y axis) Check the setting of parameter
..... and rotary switches.
" If the error occurs again after
COMM ERROR Transmission error between motion power is turned on, notify
068 (Z) andaxis modules (Z axis) maintenance personnel.

069 (S) and axis modules (S axis)
ABSOENCODER Interface error of Check the wiring of

090 ERROR (X) absolute encoder (X axis) servo and motor systems
• (Xaxis).

091 ERROR (Y) absolute encoder (Y axis) servo and motor systems
(Y axis).

092 ERROR (Z) absolute encoder (Z axis) servo and motor systems
(Z axis).
255
J
APPENDIX-1 LIST OF ALARM CODES (Cont'd).
,all
Code Contents Cause Corrective Action I
ABSO POSITION Reference value for ref. unit system Check the reference
093 OVERFLOW or pulse system exceeds value or parameter.
ERROR (X) ± 2147483647.(X axis) (X axis)
ERROR (Y) .T_+
2147483647.(Y axis) (Y axis)
ERROR (Z) - 2147483647.(Z axis) (Z axis)
DNC ERROR Machining program reading Check the program for

100 error during DNC operation DNC operation transfer.
Check the parameter.
In data transmission to/from personal Turn power on again, d

200 computer, buffer becomes full, and Change the program.
input is disabled.
Transmission error between motion If the error occurs again after

255 and axis modules power is turned on, notify
maintenance personnel.
256
APPENDIX-2 LIST OF SERVOMOTORS
D
IDC Servo I Print Motor Standard Series
I (UG)PMES (UG)PMES (UG)PMES (UG)PMES

Ffl_{ L -09A2 -12A2 -16A2 -20A2
Rated Torque kg.cm 2.43 6.5 19.5 32.5
Rated Speed rpm 4000 3000 2500 3000

I_ Rated Output W 100 200 500 1000
Rotor (GD_4) kg.cm 2 0.46 1.5 6.2 20.3
580-357 Inertia
DC Servo [ Minertia Motor Standard Series
| Type UGMMEM UGMMEM UGMMEM UGMMEM UGMMEM UGMMKR
J_! Item _._.

Rated Output W -06AAI
185 -13AAI
401 -25AA1
771 -50AAI
1540 -1AAAI
3080 -2AAA1
6170
Rated Torque
Rated Speed kg.cm:
rpm 3000
6.0 3000
13 3000
25 3000
50 3000
100 3000
200
580-56 Rotor
Inertia (GD_'4) kg'em _ 0.567 1.41 2.83 9.00 25.2 52.5
D
I De Servo I Minertia Motor RM Series
Type UGRMLMUGRMEM! UGRM_ UGRMEMIUGP,

MEM UGRMEM
Rated Output W 60 100 120 200 300 500
D Rated
Rated Torque kg.cm
Speed_-02SA2
rpm 1.95
3000 3.25
3000 3.9
3000 6.5
3000 9.74
3000 16.2
3000
Item -02MA2 -04SA2 -04MA2 -08SA2 -08MB2
582-265
Rotor t n r_2j_
Inertia _" _,,t kg.cm 2 0. 157 0.28 0.96 1.68 5.1 8.33
[ DC Servo I Cup Motor
Type UGCMED UGCMED UGCMED UGCMED UGCMEDIUGCMEDUGCMFD

Item _. -04AA1 -08AAI -15AA1 -22AA1 -37AA1 -55AA1 -75AA1
Rated Output kW 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
Rated Torque kg.cm 22.3 41.7 83.5 123 206 306 417
Rated Speed rpm 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
Inertia _,.,urn
D 281-30 Rotor tnnS_ kg.¢_ 22.4 44.2 101 152 298 723 723
257
APPENDIX;2 LIST OF SERVOMOTORS (Cont'd)
[DeServeI Hi-Cup
Motor 9
Type UGh'LED UG_tED UGHt_ED UG_ED UGHI_D UGI-54EDUGHI_D

(-06GG1)I(-12GG2) -20GG2) (-30GG2)
Rated Output kW 0.25 0,6(0,51) l..,l._

_ '>J 2(1,8) 3(2.88) 4.4 6.0
Rated Torque kg.cm 24 58.4(50) 117(117) 195(175) 292(280) 428 584
Item
Rated Speed -,.,,...,.,_
rpm -03GG1
1000 -06AA2
1000 -12AA2 ]000{1000)
]000)il000(1000) -20AA2 1000(1000)
-30AA2 -44AA2
1000 -60AA2
1000
281-30 Rotor (GD2/() kg.cm 2 20.3 ;'3(331 134(]34) 292(234) 494(365) 1138 1138
Inertia
DC Servo [ Minertia Motor J Series
Type L:CJ_D UGJ,_EDUGJ_ED UCJ_f£D UCJ_D UGJM£DUCJ_ED UGJMED •

Item _.._ -10MR2 -40MR2 -40LA2 -60MR2 -60LA2 -80MR2 -80LA2 -80KA2 II
Rated Torque kg.cm 9.7 15.6 24.4 44 83 107 175 255

Rated Output kW 0.1 0.16 0.25 0.45 0.85 1.1 1.8 2.6
Rated Speed rpm 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ]000 1000 1000
580-53
- Rotor (nn_l_ kg.cm 2 6 16 ] 20 44 63 140 245 35
: Inertia _v_,,, I
ACServo M Series (]000rpm)
;. Type
Item _ -03MA1t -06MA -09MA -012MA -20MA -30MA -44MA -60MA
Rated Output kW 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.2 2.0 3.0 I 4.4 6.0
Rated Torque kg.cm 29 58 88 117 195 290 428 584
Rated Speed rpm 1000
Inst.Max
' Speed
Toroue rpm 73 144 197 2000 286 449 650 930 15001080
386-5 Inst. Max ko.cm
Inertia (GD2/_) kg.cm 2 13.5 24.3 36.7 66.8 110 166 263 263
ACServo] F Series (1500rpm)
Item -05FAI iI
[-09FA1 i-13FA2 I-20FA2 i -30FA2 -44FA2
_ _/t;_! Rated Output kW 0.45 0.85 1.3 1.8 2.9 4.4

_:_,, . - Rated Speed rpm 1500
_,__ Rated Torque kg,cm 29 55 85 117 190 290
_-,,,.,_,,_j/ Inst. Max
Speed rpm 2500
386-5 Inst.Max
Torque kg.cm [ 91 155 252 347 552 778
Inertia (GD2/_) kg.crr{ [ 13.5 24.3 36.7 66.8 1 110 166 a
258
b [ ACServo[ S Series (3000rpm)
p,-
_ Type USA SEM US.._.SEM L'S.-\SEM IJS.& SEM US;, SEM
Item _.._.._ -03AE2 _ -05AE2 -08AC1 I -15AC1 -30ACI

Rated Output kW 0.308 0.462 0.771 1.54 3.08
t
RatedSpeed rpm 3000
Inst. Max
Speed rpm 4000
__ RatedTorque kg.cm 10 15 25 50 100
Torque 30 41 75 147 !
Inst.Max rpm I 231
5,S6-3,1 Inertia (GO"4) kg.cm = 0.5] 0.76 2.85 3.3 5.74
[ AC Servo[ C Series (3000rpm)
Type USACEM USACEM USACEM USACEM USACEM
I Item "_'_----.._._. - .45A A2 -(.IA,_2 -02AA2 -03AA2 -05AA2

Rated Output kW 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.50
Rated Torque kg.cm 1.62 3.25 6.49 9.74 16.2
Rated Speed rpm 3000

Inst. Max
Speed rpm 3000
Torque 5.97 ]0.2 20.6 29.5 49.8

585-39 Inst. Max rpm
Inertia (GD_) kg.cm: 0.06 0. It 0.45 0.70 2.50
259
APPENDIX-3 LIST OF ServoDack UNITS
DC Servo ] Servo :NwckType CPCR-FR [_[Z]RBA Series t
__ Type
Item _..
Servomoter Output W 10(3 200 500
I _ CPCR- FR01RBA FR02RBA FR05RBA
Control Method Single-phase, ull-wave rectifiedPWM control
,_)/ll.9 VAC +-,0% or
Single-phase.
Main Circuit Power Supply 200/220 VAC ± 10% at 50/60 Uz
Control Circuit Power Supply 18 V-0 V-J8 VAC (by powertransformer)
Rated Voltage/Current 32V/5.5 A 42 V/6.2 A 83 V/7.3 A
Instantaneous Max Output Current A 12 20 20

Waveform Factor 1.05max
Derating Factor 95% rain
Speed ControlRange 1: 1000rain

585-245 q
]DC Servo I Servo _.=ckType CPCR-MR [-][_]CSeries
-I 01C
MR MR
02C MR
05C MR
07C MR
08C MR
15C MR
22C MR 75C MR MR
99C
_CPCR Type I 55C
Iservomotortem
Output
kW_l
/
0.t 02 0.5 0.7 0.8 1.5 2.2 3.7-5.5 7.5 11
Single-phase, full-wave rec- Three-phase. full-wave rectifying, tran- •

Control Method tifying, transistorized PWM sistorized PWM control 1
control
Single-phase, 100/110 VAC Three-phase. -900/2-90 VAC + 10% at 50/6(I
Power Supply ± ,0% or 200/220VAC + Hz

10%at 50/60 Hz
Speed Control Range 1 : 1000
Waveform Factor 1.5max
581-188 Derating Factor 95% min
AC Servei Servolxack M Series (1000rpm) I
SPEED CONTROL, TYPE CACR- SR _-7;-IBB
___Type
Item _ SR
03BB i0_RBB SR
10BB IS5RBB[20BB
SR 3SoRBB 44BB
SR SR
60BB
Speed Control Range 1 : 3000
Servomotor
OutputkW 0.3 0.6 0.9 1.22.0 3.0 4.4 6.0
Power Cricuit Three-phase 200 to 230VAC -,5%at 50/60Hz

M_ + '0%
SupplYlContr_
I
C--_-cuit Single-phase 200 to230VAC _+'°%,5%at 50/60Hz
Continuous , [
0utout Current _rmsA)l 3.0 5.8 7.6 11.7 18.8 26.0 33.0 45.0
MaX Output (rmsA) 7.3 13.9 16.6 28.0 42.0 56.5 70.0 80.6
C,urrAnt
586-22
1
260
AC Servo Servo_ckSPEED
F Series (1500rpm)
CONTROL, TYPE CACR- SR r-lr-7BB
r . I I
• sa sa SR lab 'sa sa
F'_ "_ I _Item _ Type 05BB 10BB 15BB 20BB 30BB

Speed Control Range 1 " 3000
'ower Main Circuit Three-phase200to230 VAC +-15%

10% "
at50/60H : z
. "
upply Control Circuit Single-phase200 to 230 VAC -+ 15%

lo% at 50/60 Hz
ontinuous 0utput(rmsA, ' 3.8 6.2 9.7 15.0 20.0 3().0

IW urrent
',urrent
p flaxOutput (rmsA', Ii.0 17.0 27.6 35.7 56.5 77.0
' ::'; " .':':" i'
[AC Servo [ Servopack S Series (3000rpm) .......
SPEED CONTROL,TYPE CACR ......

-SR......BB .... '
'_ i_ _ Type SRIOB 1 S
Speed ControlRange
ServOmOtOr
Output kW 0.308 0.462 1: 3000 I
0.771 1.54 3.08. . .
Power Main Circuit Three-phase 200to 230 VAC _+]°%15%

at 50/60 Hz
i Supply Control Circuit sRo3BB sR0sBB
Single-phase200 B __s%
to 230VAC SR158B
at 50/60 Hz+ 1o%
i "f Continuous Output

Current (rmsA) 3.0 4.2 5.3 10.6 26
Max Output Current(rmsA) 8.5 11 15.6 28 57.6
586-25
261
APPENDIX-3 LIST OF ServoDack UNITS (Cont'd)
I
IA Servo,I rv= c Series (aooorpm)
_r¥o_k, SPEED CONTROL, TYPE CACR- SR [:][:] AA
SRA5AA SR02AA SR03AA SR05AA

Type SR01AA [
Speed Control Range ] : 1000
ServomotorOutput kV 0.05 _ 0.20 _ 0.50
Power Main Circuit 100 to 160 VDC (Supplied by power unit)
Supply Control Circuit 24 VDC, ].4 A (Supplied by power unit)
ContinuousOutput 1.0 1.6 2.9 4.2 5.3

Current rmsA
Max Output Current rmsA 3.5 4.9 9.2 12.7 16.3
POWER UNIT (
585-342
_Type JUSP- ACP07AA ACP15AA ACP20AA
Specifications
Voltage Single-phase 100/110 VAC -15_*{0"_
at 50/60 Hz
Power Supply [ i
Capacity (Rated Output) 1.5 kVA [ 3 kVA [ 5 kVA
I I
Continuous
Output Voitaoe ].00 tO 160 VDC
Main Circuit
Output Current
co.t, .... 7 ADC [ 15 VDC [ 20 ADC
Control Circuit ContinuousOutput Voltage 24 VDC, 6 A ,rim

Protective Function Circuit breaker
I
Ambient Operation 0 to 60°C
Temperature Storage -20 to +85°C
Mounting Structure Basemounted
5_,-1_ Applicable No. of Axes 4 max 4 max 4 max

Range Totalof
ServomotorsOUtput Approx 0.6 kW Approx 1.2 kW Approx 1.8 kW
262
APPENDIX-4 LIST OF Motionpack-llO
D The following Table shows each type of standard modules and cables used for
Motionpack-ll0 control system.
Components Type JEFMC-
5kB+P to P C020
Motion Module 64 kB+lnterporation C 023
64 kB+lnterporation+DNC Communications C027
Axis Module B011
Micro PC Module B 110
CRT Control Station H 011
31 For Communication Cable

(CRT_ Motion Module) W 011 (10m)
W010 (5m)
W 012 (15m)
ForCommunication Cable
J2 (Personal Computer_Motion Module) W 020 (lm)
For Tach-gen/Optional Encorder Signals W 070 (10m)

J7 (Axis Module_ DC Servopack/Servomotor) W 071 (15m)
W 072 (25m)
For FA Bus W 084 ""

(Motion Module_ Axis Module) (for up to 4 axes)
For FA
(Motion
Bus
Module_Micro PC Module)
- W 100
W 110 (lm)
For I/O Signals W 111 (2m)
Cable (I/O Devices_ Motion Module (5CN)) W 112 (5m)
W 120 (lm)
W 121 (2m)
For I/0 Signals W 122 (5m)
(:1/O
Expansion
Devices--I/O Devices,---,Micro
Motion Module PC Module 1 W 130 (lm)
D W 132 (Sin)
W131 (2m)
W 140 (0.5m)
For AC/DC Serve Controller, Servopack W 141 (lm)
(Axis Module_ AC/DC Servopack) W 142 (3m)
W 150 (0.Sin)
For A( Serve Optical Encorder Signals W 151 (lm)
(Axis Module_AC Servopack) W 152 (3m)
For DC Serve 12V Optical Encorder Signals W 160 (10m)

(Axis Module_DC Servomotor) W 161 (15m)
W 162 (25m)
Note :
1. J8 is the standaerd attachment to the motion module.
2. J 10 is the standard attachment to the micro PC module.
3. The connector (solder type) to each module is the standard attachment.
I
263
I DESCRIPTIVE
INFORMATIO
MOTIONPACK-110
YASKAWA MOTION CONTROLLER FOR FA/FMS
FORUPTO 3-AXISDRIVE 4
TOKYO OFFICE Ohtemachi Bldg, 1-6-10htemachi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100 Japan

Phone (03) 3284-9111, -9145 Telex YASKAWA J33530 Fax (03) 3284-9034
SEOUL OFFICE Seoul Center BIdg, 91-1, So Kong-Dong, Chung-ku, Seoul, Korea
Phone (02) 776-7844 Fax (02) 753-2639
TAIPEI OFFICE Union Commercial Bldg, 14F, 137, Nanking East Road, Sec 2, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone (02) 507-7065, -7732 Fax (02) 506-3837
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC. : SUBSIDIARY
Chicago-Corporate Headquarters 2942 MacArthur Blvd. Northbrook, Ilrinois 60062-2028, U.S.A.
Phone (708) 291-2340 Fax (708) 498-2430
Chicago-Technical Center 3160 MacArthur Blvd. Northbrook, Illinois 60062-1917, U.S.A.
Phone (708) 291-0411 Fax (708) 291-1028
Los Angeles Office 7341 Lincoln Way, Garden Grove, California 92641, U.S.A.
Phone (714) 894-5911 Telex (230) 678396 YASKAWAUS TSTN Fax (714) 894-3258
New Jersey Office 30 Two Bridges Road, Fairfield, New Jersey 07006, U.S.A.
Phone (201) 575-5940 Fax (201) 575-5947
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH : SUBSIDIARY
Niederhochstadter Stra,Be 71-73, W 6242 Kronberg-Oberhochstadt, Germany
Phone (06173) 938-0 Telex 415660 YASE D Fax (06173) 68421
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA. : SUBSIDIARY
Av. Brig. Faria Lima, 1664-cj. 721/724, Pinheiros, S&o Paulo-SP, Brasil CEP-01452 ,,Ill
Phone (011) 813-3933, 813-3694
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
CPF Bldg, 79 Robinson
Phone 2217530
Telex (011) 82869 YSKW BR Fax (011) 815-8795
Road No. 13-05, Singapore 0106

Telex (87) 24890 YASKAWA RS Fax (65) 224-5854
q
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

4
SlE-C881-10D
Dueto or_ng productmodific_tion/improvemen&
datasubjectto changewithc_notice. (_) Printed in Japan July 1992 87-1 0.3TA ,_
189-46

Motionpack 110

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motionpack 110

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Motionpack 110

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

I DESCRIPT,

FOR UP TO 3-AXIS DRIVE

2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SPECIFICATIONS 7

2.3 FUNCTIONS AND OPERATION OF MODULES 11

2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF MODULES 15

3.1 TYPES OF OPERATION MODES 22

3.2 MANUAL RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT 24

3.4 FEEDRATE ACCELERATION/DECELERATION 29

3.5 MEMORY OPERATION 30

3.6 DNC OPERATION 33

3.7 UNRESTRICTED LENGTH POSITIONING 33

3.8 POSITION CANCEL 33

3.9 POSITION MEMORY 34

3.10 MECHANICAL HANDLE 34

3.12 MDI OPERATION 36

3.13 ADDRESS SEARCH FUNCTION 36

3.14 PARAMETER/PROGRAM PROTECT FUNCTION 37

3.15 ALARM CODE ouTPUT FUNCTION 38

4.i INPUT FORMAT 40

4.2.5 Circular Interpolation (G02, G03) 48

D 4.2.10 Skip Function (G31) 54

4.2.15 Notch signal Commands B (G66, G67) 63

4.3 EXTERNAL OFFSET COMMAND (INDIRECT SPECIFICATION) 76

4.4 SIGNAL OUTPUT COMMANDS 77

5.1 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS 84

5.2 VARIETIES OF PARAMETERS 84

5.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS 86

5.4 SPECIAL PARAMETERS 90

5.5 MACHINE SPECIFICATION PARAMETERS 94

5.5.5 Step Feed Displacement Distance Setting (#1122, #1123, #1124) 96

5.6 SERVO-RELATED PARAMETERS 99

5.7 RETURN -TO-REFERENCE POINT 104

5.8 SPINDLE PARAMETER SETTING 106

5.9 NO-USING PARAMETER SETTING 106

6. I/0 ALLOCATIONS 108

6.1 I/O SIGNAL TYPES AND ALLOCATION AREA 108

6.2 I/O SIGNAL FORMAT 112

6.3 CAUTIONS ON ALLOCATION 112

6.5 ALLOCATION METHOD 114

,6.6 STANDARD ALLOCATION I17 " 7'

7. OPERATION OF CRT CONTROL STATION 128

7.1 CHARACTER DISPLAY AND KEYS 128

7.2 DISPLAY AND WRITING OPERATION "' 133

7.3 DISPLAYING AND WRITING PARAMETERS 739

7.4 DISPLAYING AND WRITING OFFSET DATA I4!

7.5 EDITING PROGRAMS 143

8. PERSONAL COMPUTER 148

8.1 INTERFACE W_TI-t Motionpack-ll0 148

8.2 OPERATINGMETHOD WHEN USING PC-8201 IS1

8.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT BETWEEN CRT CONTROL STATION

8.4 DIRECT TRANSMISSION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE

8.5 CREATING PROGRAMS 161

9. INTERFACE BETWEEN EQUIPMENT 164

9.1 ITEMS RELATED TO POWER SUPPLY 165

9.2 INPUT/OUTPUT AT MACHINE SIDE 168

9.3 CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND CRT CONTROL STATION

9.4 CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTION MODULE AND AXIS MODULES 189

9.5 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND Servopack, TG AND PG 190

9.6 CONNECTION BETWEEN AXIS MODULES AND SPINDLE DRIVES 193